JP7321550B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine such as a bullet-type pachinko game machine.

The pachinko game machine includes a main control board that controls the progress of the game, and an effect control board that controls the effect of the game through the control of the liquid crystal display on the game board surface and the accessories. Among pachinko game machines, there are those that perform effects using images, sounds, lamps, and accessories during special symbol changes and during special games. Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2002-200011 is a document that discloses a technique related to the presentation of this kind of game machine.

JP 2015-195798 A

By the way, the effect of this type of gaming machine has room for improvement in terms of the interest of the effect during the variation of the special symbols.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention has been made in view of such problems, and an object of the present invention is to further enhance interest in games on gaming machines.

In order to solve the above-mentioned problems, the present invention provides performance means including image display means, movable accessories, lamps, and audio output means, pattern display means, special game execution means, and each lottery including a jackpot lottery. Then, based on the result of the lottery, the symbol display means is caused to execute symbol variation display, and the special game execution means is caused to execute a special game, thereby generating a plurality of types of commands including commands corresponding to the progress of the game. A main control means, and a production control means for receiving a command generated by the main control means and performing production by the production means according to the symbol variation display and the special game based on the received command, and the production When the timing at which the control means receives the predetermined command is during execution of a predetermined fixed development effect in the effect that matches the symbol variation display, the movable accessory continues the operation mode of the fixed development effect, When the timing when the performance control means receives the predetermined command is during execution of a predetermined premium performance in the performance in accordance with the symbol variation display, the movable accessory terminates the operation mode of the premium performance. It is characterized by

According to the present invention, it is possible to further enhance the amusement of the game on the gaming machine.

1 is a front view of a gaming machine 1 according to a first embodiment of the present invention; FIG. 2 is a rear perspective view of the game machine 1 shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1; FIG. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing a first operation mode of a movable accessory 33c in the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a second operation mode of the movable accessories 33c and 33d in the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a third operation mode of movable accessories 33a, 33c, and 33d in the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a fourth operation mode of movable accessories 33a, 33b, 33c, and 33d in the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1; FIG. 3 is a diagram showing an example of an effect in the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1; FIG. 1. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the kind of jackpot in the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1, and the combination of the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, the right symbol 36R, and the 4th symbol 36Z. 2 is a diagram showing each effect mode of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1, and effect images, light emission modes, and effect sounds in each effect mode; FIG. It is a figure which shows the example of production|presentation of the live mode of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1, and special training mode. It is a figure which shows the example of production|presentation of the intensive training mode in the game machine 1 shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the production example of the normal variation production|presentation in the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the production example of the normal ready-to-win production in the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an effect image, a lighting mode, and an effect sound of a normal ready-to-win effect in the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1; It is a figure which shows the production example of SP ready-to-win production|presentation in the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an effect image, a light emission mode, and an effect sound of an SP ready-to-win effect in the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1; It is a figure which shows the production example of the step-up production|presentation in the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an effect image, a light emission mode, and an effect effect sound of a step-up effect in the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1; 4 is a diagram showing an example of a character appearance effect in the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1; FIG. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing an effect image, a light emission mode, and an effect sound for character appearance effects in the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1; 4 is a diagram showing an example of a roulette effect in the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1; FIG. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing an effect image, light emission mode, and effect sound of a roulette effect in the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1; It is a figure which shows the example of a production|presentation of SP development fan production in the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an effect image, a light emission mode, and an effect effect sound of an SP development fan effect in the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1; It is a figure which shows the example of the production|presentation of the SP development fixed production|presentation in the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an effect image, a light emission mode, and an effect effect sound of an SP development finalization effect in the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1; It is a figure which shows the production example of the cut-in production|presentation in the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a cut-in effect image, light emission mode, and effect sound of a cut-in effect in the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1; It is a figure which shows the example of the production|presentation of the fixed accessory operation production|presentation in the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an effect image, a light emission mode, and an effect effect sound of a fixed accessory actuation effect in the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1; It is a figure which shows the production example of the rank-up production|presentation in the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. FIG. 9 is a diagram showing an effect image, a light emission mode, and an effect effect sound of a look-ahead suspension display change effect in the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1; FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a data structure command of an animation pattern in the game machine 1 shown in FIG. 1; FIG. 2 is a flowchart showing main processing of the main control board 10 of the game machine 1 shown in FIG. 1; 4 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing of the main control board 10 of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1; 2 is a flowchart showing input control processing of the game machine 1 shown in FIG. 1; It is a flow chart which shows the first start opening detection switch input processing of the game machine 1 shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the special symbol reservation storage area of the main control board 10 of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1, and the production information storage area of the production control board 120. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a pre-determination table of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure special electric control processing of the game machine 1 shown in FIG. It is a flow chart showing a special symbol storage determination process of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 2 is a flowchart showing a jackpot determination process of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1; It is a figure which shows the jackpot determination table and normal symbol lottery determination table of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a symbol determination table of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1; FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a variation pattern determination table of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1; FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a variation pattern determination table of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1; FIG. It is a flow chart showing a special symbol variation process of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the special design stop processing of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the special game control table of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the big winning a prize opening-and-closing control table of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. It is a flow chart showing a jackpot game process of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. It is a flow chart showing a jackpot game ending process of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the setting table at the time of the special game end of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1. It is a flowchart which shows the normal figure normal electric control process of the game machine 1 shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the main process of the production|presentation control board 120 of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process of the production|presentation control board 120 of the game machine 1 shown in FIG. 2 is a flowchart showing command analysis processing of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1; 2 is a flowchart showing command analysis processing of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1; 2 is a flowchart showing command analysis processing of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1; It is a figure which shows the fluctuation production|presentation pattern determination table of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the look-ahead pending|holding display change production|presentation selection process of the production|presentation control board 120 of the game machine 1 shown in FIG. It is a diagram showing a look-ahead pending display change effect execution determination table and a final stage pending display mode determination table of the effect control board 120 of the game machine 1 shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the pending|holding display change production|presentation scenario determination table of the production|presentation control board 120 of the game machine 1 shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the pending|holding display change production|presentation scenario determination table of the production|presentation control board 120 of the game machine 1 shown in FIG. 2 is a flowchart showing stage change determination processing of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1; 2 is a diagram showing a stage change execution determination table of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1; FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a new stage determination table of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1; FIG. It is a flow chart showing a special game effect selection process of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the round production|presentation control processing of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing timer update processing of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1; It is a flowchart which shows the production|presentation input control processing of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing an operation information storage area of the game machine 1 shown in FIG. 1 and an example of update thereof; FIG. 2 is a flowchart showing main processing of an integrated control unit 141 of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1; FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing drawing end interrupt processing of the general control unit 141 of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1; FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing V-blank interrupt processing of the integrated control unit 141 of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1; 4 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing of the general control unit 141 of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1; 2 is a flowchart showing main processing of a lamp/drive control unit 150 of the game machine 1 shown in FIG. 1; 4 is a flow chart showing drawing end interrupt processing of a lamp/drive control unit 150 of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1; 4 is a flowchart showing V-blank interrupt processing of the lamp/drive control unit 150 of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1; 4 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing of the lamp/drive control unit 150 of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1; 3 is a flowchart showing animation pattern setting processing of the general control unit 141 of the game machine 1 shown in FIG. 1; 3 is a flowchart showing animation pattern setting processing of the general control unit 141 of the game machine 1 shown in FIG. 1; 3 is a flowchart showing animation pattern setting processing of the general control unit 141 of the game machine 1 shown in FIG. 1; 3 is a flowchart showing animation pattern setting processing of the general control unit 141 of the game machine 1 shown in FIG. 1; 3 is a flowchart showing animation pattern setting processing of the general control unit 141 of the game machine 1 shown in FIG. 1; 3 is a flowchart showing animation pattern setting processing of the general control unit 141 of the game machine 1 shown in FIG. 1; 3 is a flowchart showing animation pattern setting processing of the general control unit 141 of the game machine 1 shown in FIG. 1; 3 is a flowchart showing animation pattern setting processing of the general control unit 141 of the game machine 1 shown in FIG. 1; 3 is a flowchart showing animation pattern setting processing of the general control unit 141 of the game machine 1 shown in FIG. 1; 3 is a flowchart showing animation pattern setting processing of the general control unit 141 of the game machine 1 shown in FIG. 1; 3 is a flowchart showing animation pattern setting processing of the general control unit 141 of the game machine 1 shown in FIG. 1; 3 is a flowchart showing animation pattern setting processing of the general control unit 141 of the game machine 1 shown in FIG. 1; 3 is a diagram showing a normal variation effect image control mode determination table of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1; FIG. 3 is a diagram showing a step-up effect image control mode determination table of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1; FIG. 3 is a diagram showing a normal reach effect image control mode determination table of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1; FIG. 3 is a diagram showing a premium character appearance effect image control mode determination table of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing a character appearance effect image control mode determination table of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1; FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a roulette effect image control mode determination table of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1; FIG. It is a figure which shows the SP development fan effect image control mode determination table of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 3 is a diagram showing an SP development finalized effect image control mode determination table of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1. FIG. It is a figure which shows the SP ready-to-win effect image control mode determination table of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 3 is a diagram showing a premium cut-in effect image control mode determination table of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1; FIG. 3 is a diagram showing a cut-in effect image control mode determination table of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1; FIG. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing a fixed accessory actuation first effect image control mode determination table of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1 ; It is a figure which shows the fixed accessory act|operation 2nd effect image control mode determination table of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing image control timer update processing of the integrated control unit 141 of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1; 4 is a flowchart showing image control timer update processing of the integrated control unit 141 of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1; 4 is a flowchart showing image control timer update processing of the integrated control unit 141 of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1; 4 is a flowchart showing image control timer update processing of the integrated control unit 141 of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1; 4 is a flowchart showing image control timer update processing of the integrated control unit 141 of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1; 4 is a flowchart showing image control timer update processing of the integrated control unit 141 of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1; 4 is a flowchart showing image control timer update processing of the integrated control unit 141 of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1; 4 is a flowchart showing image control timer update processing of the integrated control unit 141 of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1; 3 is a flow chart showing sound pattern setting processing of an integrated control unit 141 of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1; 3 is a flow chart showing sound pattern setting processing of an integrated control unit 141 of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1; 3 is a flow chart showing sound pattern setting processing of an integrated control unit 141 of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1; 3 is a flow chart showing sound pattern setting processing of an integrated control unit 141 of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1; 3 is a flow chart showing sound pattern setting processing of an integrated control unit 141 of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1; 3 is a flow chart showing sound pattern setting processing of an integrated control unit 141 of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1; 3 is a flow chart showing sound pattern setting processing of an integrated control unit 141 of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1; 3 is a flow chart showing sound pattern setting processing of an integrated control unit 141 of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1; 3 is a flow chart showing sound pattern setting processing of an integrated control unit 141 of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1; 3 is a flow chart showing sound pattern setting processing of an integrated control unit 141 of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1; 3 is a flow chart showing sound pattern setting processing of an integrated control unit 141 of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1; 3 is a flow chart showing sound pattern setting processing of an integrated control unit 141 of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1; FIG. 3 is a diagram showing a normal fluctuation effect sound control mode determination table of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1; 2 is a diagram showing a step-up effect sound control mode determination table of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1; FIG. 3 is a diagram showing a normal reach effect sound effect control mode determination table of the game machine 1 shown in FIG. 1; FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a premium character appearance effect sound control mode determination table of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a character appearance effect sound control mode determination table of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1; FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a roulette effect sound control mode determination table of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1; FIG. It is a figure which shows the SP development hype production sound effect control mode determination table of the game machine 1 shown in FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an SP development finalized effect sound control mode determination table of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1; It is a figure which shows the SP reach production sound effect control mode determination table of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a premium cut-in effect sound control mode determination table of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1; FIG. 3 is a diagram showing a cut-in effect sound control mode determination table of the game machine 1 shown in FIG. 1; FIG. It is a figure which shows the fixed accessory act|activation 1st effect sound control mode determination table of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the fixed accessory operation|movement 2nd effect sound control mode determination table of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing a voice control timer update process of the general control unit 141 of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1; 4 is a flowchart showing a voice control timer update process of the general control unit 141 of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1; 4 is a flowchart showing a voice control timer update process of the general control unit 141 of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1; 4 is a flowchart showing a voice control timer update process of the general control unit 141 of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1; 4 is a flowchart showing a voice control timer update process of the general control unit 141 of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1; 4 is a flowchart showing a voice control timer update process of the general control unit 141 of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1; 4 is a flowchart showing a voice control timer update process of the general control unit 141 of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1; 4 is a flowchart showing a voice control timer update process of the general control unit 141 of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1; 4 is a flowchart showing lamp emission information setting processing of the integrated control unit 141 of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1; 4 is a flowchart showing lamp emission information setting processing of the integrated control unit 141 of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1; 4 is a flowchart showing lamp emission information setting processing of the integrated control unit 141 of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1; 4 is a flowchart showing lamp emission information setting processing of the integrated control unit 141 of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1; 4 is a flowchart showing lamp emission information setting processing of the integrated control unit 141 of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1; 4 is a flowchart showing lamp emission information setting processing of the integrated control unit 141 of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1; 4 is a flowchart showing lamp emission information setting processing of the integrated control unit 141 of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1; 4 is a flowchart showing lamp emission information setting processing of the integrated control unit 141 of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1; 4 is a flowchart showing lamp emission information setting processing of the integrated control unit 141 of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1; 4 is a flowchart showing lamp emission information setting processing of the integrated control unit 141 of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1; 4 is a flowchart showing lamp emission information setting processing of the integrated control unit 141 of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1; 4 is a flowchart showing lamp emission information setting processing of the integrated control unit 141 of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1; It is a figure which shows the normal fluctuation production|presentation lamp control mode determination table of the game machine 1 shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the step-up production|presentation lamp control mode determination table of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the normal reach production|presentation lamp control mode determination table of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a premium character appearance effect lamp control mode determination table of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing a character appearance effect lamp control mode determination table of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1; FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a roulette effect lamp control mode determination table of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1; FIG. It is a figure which shows the SP development fan effect lamp control mode determination table of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the SP development fixed production|presentation lamp control mode determination table of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the SP reach production lamp control mode determination table of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 3 is a diagram showing a premium cut-in effect lamp control mode determination table of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1; FIG. It is a figure which shows the cut-in effect|presentation lamp control mode determination table of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the fixed accessory operation|movement 1st production lamp control mode determination table of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the fixed accessory operation|movement 2nd production lamp control mode determination table of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing a lamp control timer update process of the lamp/drive control unit 150 of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1; 3 is a flowchart showing a lamp control timer update process of the lamp/drive control unit 150 of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1; 3 is a flowchart showing a lamp control timer update process of the lamp/drive control unit 150 of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1; 3 is a flowchart showing a lamp control timer update process of the lamp/drive control unit 150 of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1; 3 is a flowchart showing a lamp control timer update process of the lamp/drive control unit 150 of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1; 3 is a flowchart showing a lamp control timer update process of the lamp/drive control unit 150 of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1; 3 is a flowchart showing a lamp control timer update process of the lamp/drive control unit 150 of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1; 3 is a flowchart showing a lamp control timer update process of the lamp/drive control unit 150 of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1; FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing a role product drive information setting process of a lamp/drive control unit 150 of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1; FIG. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing a role product drive information setting process of a lamp/drive control unit 150 of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1; FIG. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing a role product drive information setting process of a lamp/drive control unit 150 of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1; FIG. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing a role product drive information setting process of a lamp/drive control unit 150 of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1; FIG. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing a role product drive information setting process of a lamp/drive control unit 150 of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1; FIG. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing a role product drive information setting process of a lamp/drive control unit 150 of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1; FIG. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing a role product drive information setting process of a lamp/drive control unit 150 of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1; FIG. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing a role product drive information setting process of a lamp/drive control unit 150 of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1; FIG. It is a figure which shows the step-up production accessory control mode determination table of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the premium character appearance production accessory control mode determination table of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 3 is a diagram showing a character appearance effect accessory control mode determination table of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1. FIG. It is a figure which shows the roulette production accessory control mode determination table of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the SP development instigation performance accessory control mode determination table of the game machine 1 shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the SP development fixed production accessary control mode determination table of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the premium cut-in production accessory control mode determination table of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the cut-in production accessory control mode determination table of the game machine 1 shown in FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a fixed accessory actuation first performance accessory control mode determination table of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1 ; It is a diagram showing a determined role actuation second effect role control mode determination table of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing an accessory control timer update process of a lamp/drive control unit 150 of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1; FIG. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing an accessory control timer update process of a lamp/drive control unit 150 of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1; FIG. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing an accessory control timer update process of a lamp/drive control unit 150 of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1; FIG. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing an accessory control timer update process of a lamp/drive control unit 150 of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1; FIG. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing an accessory control timer update process of a lamp/drive control unit 150 of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1; FIG. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing an accessory control timer update process of a lamp/drive control unit 150 of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1; FIG. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing an accessory control timer update process of a lamp/drive control unit 150 of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1; FIG. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing an accessory control timer update process of a lamp/drive control unit 150 of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1; FIG.

FIG. 1 is a front view of a gaming machine 1 that is one embodiment of the present invention. 2 is a perspective view of the back side of the gaming machine 1. FIG. FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing the overall configuration of the gaming machine 1. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 1, the housing of the game machine 1 has a rectangular outer frame 60 and a glass door 50 that covers the game area 6 of the outer frame 60 so as to be visible.

One end of the glass door 50 (the left side facing the game machine 1 ) is connected to the outer frame 60 via a hinge mechanism 51 . A locking mechanism is provided at the other end of the glass door 50 (on the right side when facing the gaming machine 1). When the locking mechanism of the glass door 50 is unlocked with a special key, the glass door 50 can be swung by the hinge mechanism 51 to open the game area 6 . The glass door 50 is provided with a door opening switch 18a for detecting opening of the glass door 50. - 特許庁

Outside the portion covering the game area 6 in the glass door 50, the first special symbol display device 20, the second special symbol display device 21, the first special symbol reservation display device 23, the second special symbol reservation display device 24, the normal A symbol display device 22 and a normal symbol reservation display 25 are provided.

The first special symbol display device 20 informs the lottery result of the jackpot lottery that is triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first start port 14 of the game area 6 (hereinafter referred to as "start winning prize"). is. The second special symbol display device 21 informs the lottery result of the jackpot lottery that is triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second start port 15 of the game area 6 (hereinafter referred to as "start winning prize"). be. The first special symbol display device 20 and the second special symbol display device 21 variably display a plurality of types of special symbols that can be identified from each other. The first special symbol display device 20 and the second special symbol display device 21 are composed of 7-segment LEDs. In the following description, the special symbol variably displayed in the first special symbol display device 20 is appropriately referred to as the "first special symbol", and the special symbol variably displayed in the second special symbol display device 21 is appropriately referred to as the "second special symbol". It's called "pattern".

The first special symbol reserve display 23 displays the number of reserves for the variation of the first special symbol. The second special symbol reservation display 24 displays the number of suspensions of variation of the second special symbol.

Here, the suspension of the variation of the first special symbol is based on the establishment of the starting condition that was established earlier, although the starting condition for executing the variation of the first special symbol was established by the start winning of the first starting port 14. It occurs when the variation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is being executed or the special game is being executed.

Similarly, the suspension of the variation of the second special symbol is based on the establishment of the starting condition that was established earlier, although the starting condition for executing the variation of the second special symbol was established by the start winning of the second starting port 15. It occurs when the variation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is being executed or the special game is being executed.

Each of the first special symbol reservation display 23 and the second special symbol reservation display 24 is composed of two left and right LEDs. Specifically explaining the display mode of the number of reservations in the first special symbol reservation display device 23 and the second special symbol reservation display device 24, in the first special design reservation display device 23, the reservation number of the fluctuation of the first special symbol is If there is one, the left LED lights up. When the number of reserves for the variation of the first special symbol is two, the right LED lights up. When the number of pending changes in the first special symbol is 3, the left LED blinks and the right LED lights up. When the number of pending changes in the first special symbol is four, the left and right two LEDs blink. The display mode of the number of reservations on the second special symbol reservation display 24 is the same as that of the first special symbol reservation display 23 .

The normal symbol display device 22 notifies the lottery result of the normal symbol lottery that is triggered by the passing of the game ball through the normal symbol gate 13 . The normal symbol display device 22 variably displays a plurality of types of normal symbols that can be identified from each other. The normal design reserve display 25 displays the number of reserves of fluctuations in the normal design. The normal symbol holding display 25 is composed of two left and right LEDs. The display mode of the number of reservations in the normal design reservation display 25 is the same as that of the first special design reservation display 23 and the second special design reservation display 24 .

A game area 6 of the game machine 1 is substantially egg-shaped. The game area 6 is divided into a left area 6L on the left side and a right area 6R on the right side of the center in the horizontal direction. At the left end of the left area 6L, rails 5a and 5b extending in an arc are provided with a gap slightly wider than the game ball between them. A ball return prevention piece 5c is provided at the upper end of the inner rail 5b of these rails 5a and 5b.

A performance button 35 is provided under a portion of the glass door 50 covering the game area 6. - 特許庁The effect button 35 is for advancing the operation effect accompanying the operation. The production button 35 is provided with a production button detection switch 35a. When the performance button detection switch 35a detects that the performance button 35 has been pressed, it outputs an ON signal indicating that fact.

A cross key 39 is provided to the left of the effect button 35 . The cross key 39 consists of an up cursor key 39A, a down cursor key 39B, a left cursor key 39C and a right cursor key 39D. A center key 39E is provided at a position surrounded by the up cursor key 39A, the down cursor key 39B, the left cursor key 39C and the right cursor key 39D.

An up cursor key 39A, a down cursor key 39B, a left cursor key 39C, and a right cursor key 39D of the cross key 39 are provided with cross key detection switches 39a, 39b, 39c, and 39d. The center key 39E is provided with a center key detection switch 39e. When the cross key detection switch 39a detects that the up cursor key 39A has been pressed, it outputs an ON signal indicating that fact. When the cross key detection switch 39b detects that the down cursor key 39B has been pressed, it outputs an ON signal indicating that fact. When the cross key detection switch 39c detects that the left cursor key 39C has been pressed, it outputs an ON signal indicating that fact. When the cross key detection switch 39d detects that the right cursor key 39D has been pressed, it outputs an ON signal indicating that fact. When the center key detection switch 39e detects that the center key 39E has been pressed, it outputs an ON signal indicating that fact.

A saucer for storing game balls is provided on the back side of the performance button 35 on the glass door 50.例文帳に追加An operation handle 3 is provided at the lower right of the performance button 35 on the glass door 50. - 特許庁The player performs a shooting operation, which is an operation of gripping the operating handle 3 with his or her right hand and turning it clockwise.

A touch sensor 3 a is provided in the operating handle 3 . The touch sensor 3a is composed of a capacitance-type proximity switch that utilizes a change in capacitance due to contact with the operating handle 3 by the player. A tray of the glass door 50 is provided with a ball feed solenoid 4b. The ball feed solenoid 4b is composed of a rectilinear solenoid. A firing volume 3b and a firing solenoid 4a are provided in the vicinity of the rotating portion of the operating handle 3. As shown in FIG. The firing volume 3b consists of a variable resistor. The firing solenoid 4a is composed of a rotary solenoid.

These units 3 a , 3 b , 4 a , 4 b perform operations related to shooting the game balls in the tray to the game area 6 under the control of the shooting control board 160 . More specifically, when the player's hand touches the operating handle 3, the touch sensor 3a supplies a touch signal indicating this to the firing control board 160. As shown in FIG. When the player's hand rotates the operating handle 3 , the firing volume 3 b outputs a voltage divided according to the amount of rotation of the operating handle 3 to the firing control board 160 . The firing control board 160 controls energization of the firing solenoid 4a and the ball feeding solenoid 4b based on the output voltage of the firing volume 3b while the touch signal is supplied from the touch sensor 3a.

By the energization control of the shooting control board 160, the ball feeding solenoid 4b feeds the game balls in the tray one by one toward the hitting member directly connected to the shooting solenoid 4a. A firing solenoid 4a rotates the ejection member. A game ball sent out from the receiving tray toward the hitting member is hit between the rails 5a and 5b by the rotation of the hitting member, guided by the rails 5a and 5b and raised. The game ball that has risen between the rails 5a and 5b passes through the ball return prevention piece 5c, reaches the game area 6, and falls within the game area 6 unpredictably. Here, the rotation speed of the firing solenoid 4a is set to about 99.9 (times/minute) from the frequency based on the output cycle of the crystal oscillator provided on the firing control board 160. FIG. As a result, the number of shots per minute is about 99.9 (pieces/minute), because one shot is shot each time the shooting solenoid 4a rotates once. That is, one game ball is shot approximately every 0.6 seconds.

A decoration member 7 is provided on the upper part of the game area 6 to affect the flow of game balls. At the periphery of the game area 6, a first performance drive device 330a, a second performance drive device 330b, a third performance drive device 330c, and a fourth performance drive device 330d are provided. The first performance driving device 330a has a first movable accessory 33a. The second effect driving device 330b has a second movable accessory 33b. The third effect driving device 330c has a third movable accessory 33c. The fourth performance driving device 330d has a fourth movable accessory 33d.

The first performance drive device 330a, the second performance drive device 330b, the third performance drive device 330c, and the fourth performance drive device 330d are under the control of the lamp/drive control unit 150 in the performance control board 120. , the first movable accessory 33a, the second movable accessory 33b, the third movable accessory 33c, and the fourth movable accessory 33d.

The first movable accessory 33a, the second movable accessory 33b, the third movable accessory 33c, and the fourth movable accessory 33d are positioned behind the periphery of the game area 6, where part or all of the accessory is hidden. (This position is hereinafter referred to as the initial position), and by moving from the initial position to the side of the game area 6 to expose the role, the development of the performance, the confirmation of the big win, etc. are notified.

More specifically, when the performance during the symbol variation display develops into a performance with higher reliability of the big win, the third movable accessory 33c may perform the motion of the first motion mode which is performed alone. . As shown in FIG. 4, in the action of the first action mode, the third movable accessory 33c falls to the game area 6 side.

When the performance during the symbol variation display encourages the development of a performance with higher reliability of the big win or notifies the development, the second movable accessory 33c and the fourth movable accessory 33d are interlocked. The operation of the operation mode may be performed. As shown in FIG. 5, in the operation of the second operation mode, the third movable accessory 33c falls to the side of the game area 6, and the fourth movable accessory 33d moves in the width direction of the fourth movable accessory 33d. After moving to a position where approximately half of the decoration member 7 is exposed inside, the fanning operation to return to the initial position is repeated several times.

In the effect during the symbol variation display, when a big win is announced, the third action mode action performed in conjunction with the third movable accessory 33c, the fourth movable accessory 33d, and the first movable accessory 33a, or The third movable accessory 33c, the fourth movable accessory 33d, the first movable accessory 33a, and the second movable accessory 33b perform the operation of the fourth action mode in conjunction with each other.

As shown in FIG. 6, in the operation of the third operation mode, the third movable accessory 33c falls to the side of the game area 6, and the fourth movable accessory 33d is moved so that the inner edges of the left and right fourth movable accessories 33d It moves to a position connected in an egg shape in the center of the game area 6, and the first movable accessory 33a falls to a position inside the inner edge of the left and right fourth movable accessories 33d.

As shown in FIG. 7, in the operation of the fourth action mode, the third movable accessory 33c, the fourth movable accessory 33d, and the first movable accessory 33a perform the same actions as in the third action mode, and then the third The second movable accessory 33b rises to a position inside the inner edge of the left and right third movable accessories 33c. Swing with the center of gravity as the swing axis.

As shown in FIG. 1, in the center of the first movable accessory 33a of the gaming machine 1, a first lighting device 340a for presentation is provided. The first production lighting device 340a has a first lamp 34a. At the center of the upper portion of the glass door 50, a second production lighting device 340b is provided. The second production lighting device 340b has a second lamp 34b. A third production lighting device 340c is provided in the center of the third movable accessory 33c. The third production lighting device 340c has a third lamp 34c. A fourth production lighting device 340d is provided slightly inside the upper left and right corners of the glass door 50 . The fourth production lighting device 340d has a fourth lamp 34d. The first lamp 34a, the second lamp 34b, the third lamp 34c, and the fourth lamp 34d are RGB full-color LED lamps.

The first production lighting device 340a, the second production lighting device 340b, the third production lighting device 340c, and the fourth production lighting device 340d are controlled by the lamp/drive control unit 150 in the production control board 120. , the first lamp 34a, the second lamp 34b, the third lamp 34c, and the fourth lamp 34d emit light to produce a game effect.

Audio output devices 32 (speakers) are provided on the left and right sides of the second lighting device 340b for presentation in the upper part of the gaming machine 1 . The audio output device 32 performs game production with production effect sounds under the control of the integrated control unit 141 in the production control board 120 .

Below the left area 6L in the game area 6, a plurality of general winning openings 12 are provided. The general winning hole 12 is provided with a general winning hole detection switch 12a for detecting passage of a game ball in the general winning hole 12. - 特許庁When the general winning hole detection switch 12a detects the passage of game balls, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of prize balls are paid out.

A first big winning opening 16 is provided below the right area 6R in the game area 6. As shown in FIG. The first prize winning opening 16 has a horizontally long rectangular shape. The first big winning hole 16 is provided with a first big winning hole detection switch 16 a for detecting the entry of a game ball in the first big winning hole 16 . When the first big winning hole detection switch 16a detects the entry of game balls, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out.

The first big prize winning opening 16 is provided with a first big winning opening opening/closing door 16b, which is a special electric accessory, and a first big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 16c for switching opening and closing of the first big winning opening opening/closing door 16b. . The first big prize winning opening/closing door 16b has a rectangular plate shape with approximately the same size as the first big winning prize opening 16 . The lower edge of the first big prize winning opening/closing door 16b is pivotally connected to the lower edge of the first big winning prize opening 16. As shown in FIG. When the first big winning gate opening/closing solenoid 16c is turned off, the first big winning gate opening/closing door 16b rises substantially flush with the board surface of the game area 6 and closes the first big winning gate 16.例文帳に追加When the first big winning gate opening/closing solenoid 16c is turned on, the first big winning gate opening/closing door 16b is opened with the lower edge of the first big winning gate 16 as a fulcrum and inclined forward.

While the first big winning hole open/close door 16b is in the closed state, the game balls falling from above the first big winning hole 16 pass in front of the first big winning hole 16 as they are. Therefore, the game ball does not enter the first big winning opening 16 while the first big winning opening opening/closing door 16b is in the closed state. On the other hand, while the first big winning opening/closing door 16b is in the open state, most of the game balls falling from above the first big winning opening/closing door 16 are directed upwards of the first big winning opening/closing door 16b. It hits the receiving plate surface and is guided to the side of the first big prize winning opening 16.例文帳に追加For this reason, while the first big winning opening opening/closing door 16b is in the open state, the game ball is likely to enter the first big winning opening 16.例文帳に追加

A second big winning opening 17 is provided in the central lower portion of the game area 6 . The second big winning hole 17 is provided with a second big winning hole detection switch 17 a for detecting the entry of a game ball in the second big winning hole 17 . When the second big winning hole detection switch 17a detects the entry of game balls, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out.

The second big prize winning opening 17 is provided with a second big winning opening opening/closing door 17b, which is a special electric accessory, and a second big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 17c for switching opening and closing of the second big winning opening opening/closing door 17b. . The second big prize winning opening opening/closing door 17b has a rectangular plate shape with substantially the same dimensions as the second big winning prize opening 17. As shown in FIG. The lower edge of the second big prize winning opening/closing door 17b is pivotally connected to the lower edge of the second big winning prize opening 17. As shown in FIG. When the second big winning gate opening/closing solenoid 17c is turned off, the second big winning gate opening/closing door 17b rises substantially flush with the board surface of the game area 6 and closes the second big winning gate 17.例文帳に追加When the second big winning gate opening/closing solenoid 17c is turned on, the second big winning gate opening/closing door 17b is opened with the lower edge of the second big winning gate 17 as a fulcrum and inclined forward.

While the second big winning opening/closing door 17b is in the closed state, the game balls falling from the oblique upper right and left oblique upper sides of the second big winning opening 17 pass in front of the second big winning opening 17 as they are. do. Therefore, the game ball does not enter the second big winning opening 17 while the second big winning opening opening/closing door 17b is in the closed state. On the other hand, while the second large winning opening opening/closing door 17b is in the open state, most of the game balls falling from above the second large winning opening opening/closing door 17 are directed upwards of the second large winning opening opening/closing door 17b. It hits the receiving plate surface and is guided to the side of the second big prize winning opening 17.例文帳に追加For this reason, while the second big winning opening opening/closing door 17b is in the open state, the game ball can easily enter the second big winning opening 17.例文帳に追加

Above the second big winning opening 17 in the central lower part of the game area 6, there are a first starting opening 14 and a second starting opening 15. As shown in FIG. The first starting port 14 and the second starting port 15 are arranged vertically. The first starting hole 14 is provided with a first starting hole detection switch 14a for detecting passage of a game ball through the first starting hole 14. As shown in FIG. When the first start hole detection switch 14a detects the passage of game balls, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out.

The second starting hole 15 is provided with a second starting hole detection switch 15a for detecting passage of a game ball in the second starting hole 15. As shown in FIG. When the second starting hole detection switch 15a detects the passage of game balls, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out.

The second starting port 15 is provided with a pair of movable pieces 15b. These movable pieces 15b are switched between open and closed states by a starting port opening/closing solenoid 15c. When the starting port opening/closing solenoid 15c is turned off, the pair of movable pieces 15b are in a closed state in which they stand upright. When the starting port opening/closing solenoid 15c is turned on, the pair of movable pieces 15b are in an open state inclined in an inverted V shape. The movable piece 15b constitutes an electric tulip (hereinafter referred to as "electric tu" as appropriate) as a normal electric accessory.

While the movable piece 15b is in the closed state, most of the game balls falling toward the second starting port 15 from the left and right obliquely above the second starting port 15 bounce off the outer surface of the movable piece 15b. Therefore, while the movable piece 15b is in the closed state, it becomes difficult for the game ball to pass through the second starting port 15.例文帳に追加On the other hand, while the movable piece 15b is in the open state, most of the game balls falling toward the second starting port 15 from the left and right diagonally above the second starting port 15 are guided to the inner surface of the movable piece 15b. The second starting port 15 is reached. Therefore, while the movable piece 15b is in the open state, the game ball easily passes through the second starting port 15.例文帳に追加

A normal symbol gate 13 is provided at a position slightly upward from the first big winning opening 16 in the right area 6</b>R of the game area 6 . The normal symbol gate 13 is provided with a gate detection switch 13a for detecting passage of a game ball through the normal symbol gate 13. - 特許庁

In the gaming machine 1, a jackpot lottery is executed when the starting condition of the first special symbol is established by the starting prize of the first starting port 14 and the starting condition of the second special symbol is established by the starting prize of the second starting port 15. When the lottery result of the big win lottery is a big win, the special symbols are stopped in a big win stop mode after being displayed in a variable manner for a predetermined time. When the result of the lottery is a loss, the special symbol is stopped in a loss stop mode after a variable display for a predetermined time. In addition, normal symbol lottery is executed with establishment of normal symbol start condition by passage of game ball through normal symbol gate 13, and when the lottery result of normal symbol lottery is winning, normal symbol fluctuates for a predetermined period. After the display is displayed, it stops in the hit stop mode, and the movable piece 15b is opened in the hit release mode. When the result of the lottery is a loss, the normal symbols are stopped in the stop mode of a loss after a variable display for a predetermined time.

When the special symbol stops at a jackpot symbol, a special game corresponding to the kind of jackpot indicated by the stop symbol is executed. In the special game, the number of prizes won in the first big prize hole 16 or the second big prize hole 17 reaches the specified number or the opening time reaches the specified time. is set as one round of a round game, and this round game is repeated a plurality of times. The types of jackpots of the gaming machine 1 are seven types shown below.

a1. 1st Special Figure 16R Probability Variation Win This jackpot is one of those that can be selected when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery triggered by the establishment of the starting condition of the first special symbol is a jackpot. In the special game when winning the jackpot, 16 round games from the 1st round to the 16th round are performed. In each round game of 16 times, the number of winning prizes in the first large winning opening 16 reaches a specified number (for example, 9) or the opening of the first large winning opening 16 until 29 seconds elapse → the first large winning opening for 2 seconds The first big prize winning opening 16 is opened and closed in an opening/closing mode of closing the winning opening 16.例文帳に追加

When winning the jackpot, the game state related to the jackpot lottery after the end of the special game becomes a high-probability game state more advantageous than the low-probability state. During the low-probability game state, the winning probability of the jackpot lottery is 1/300. During the high-probability game state, the winning probability of the jackpot lottery is 1/60.

When the jackpot is won, the game state related to the normal symbol lottery after the end of the special game becomes a time-saving game state more advantageous than the non-time-saving game state. During the non-time-saving game state, the normal pattern lottery winning probability is 65535/65536, the normal pattern variation time is 29 seconds, and the movable piece 15b of the second starting port 15 is opened per winning of the normal pattern lottery. time becomes 0.2 seconds. In addition, during the time-saving game state, the probability of winning the normal symbol lottery is 65535/65536, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 3 seconds, and the movable piece 15b of the second starting port 15 per winning of the normal symbol lottery. The opening time is 3.5 seconds.

When the jackpot is won, the game state changes to the high-probability game state and the time-saving game state through the special game, and then the high-probability game state and the time-saving game state are continued until the big win is won again.

b1. 1st special figure 8R probability variable hit This jackpot is one of those that can be selected when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery triggered by the establishment of the starting condition of the first special symbol is a jackpot. In the special game when winning the jackpot, 8 round games from the 1st round to the 8th round are performed. In each round game of 8 times, the number of winning prizes of the second large winning opening 17 reaches the specified number (for example, 9 pieces) or until 29 seconds elapse, the opening of the second large winning opening 17 → the second large winning opening for 2 seconds The second big prize winning opening 17 is opened and closed in the opening/closing mode of closing the winning opening 17.例文帳に追加When the jackpot is won, the game state after the end of the special game becomes a high-probability game state and a time-saving game state. The high-probability game state and time-saving game state are continued until a big win is won again.

c1. 1st Special Figure 8R Normal Win This jackpot is one of those that can be selected when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery triggered by the establishment of the starting condition of the first special symbol is a jackpot. In the special game when winning the jackpot, 8 round games from the 1st round to the 8th round are performed. The opening and closing aspect of the second big winning hole 17 in each round game of 8 times is the same as that of the first special figure 8R probability variation. When the jackpot is won, the game state after the end of the special game becomes a low-probability game state and a time-saving game state. The low-probability game state and time-saving game state are continued until the big win is won again or the number of times of variation after the special game reaches 100 times without winning the big win.

d1. 1st Special Figure 2R Probability Variation Win This jackpot is one of those that can be selected when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery triggered by the establishment of the starting condition of the first special symbol is a jackpot. In the special game when winning the jackpot, two round games from the first round to the second round are performed. In two round games, the number of winnings in the second big winning opening 17 reaches the specified number (for example, 9) or until 10 seconds have passed, the opening of the second big winning opening 17 → the second big winning for 2 seconds The second big winning opening 17 is opened and closed in an opening/closing mode of closing the opening 17.例文帳に追加When the jackpot is won, the game state after the end of the special game becomes a high-probability game state and a time-saving game state. The high-probability game state and time-saving game state are continued until a big win is won again. Here, the time required for the special game when winning this jackpot (total opening time of the big winning opening) is compared to the time required for the special game when winning another jackpot (total opening time of the big winning opening). short. Therefore, the number of acquired game balls is larger when winning another jackpot than when winning this jackpot. The first special figure 2R probability variable hit is also called “short hit” or “sudden hit” in the sense of a jackpot that becomes a high probability game state after a short jackpot.

e1. 2nd special figure 16R probability variation hit This jackpot is one of those that can be selected when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery triggered by the establishment of the start condition of the second special symbol is a jackpot. In the special game when winning the jackpot, 16 round games from the 1st round to the 16th round are performed. The opening and closing aspect of the first big winning hole 16 in each round game of 16 times is the same as that of the first special figure 16R probability variation. When the jackpot is won, the game state after the end of the special game becomes a high-probability game state and a time-saving game state. The high-probability game state and time-saving game state are continued until a big win is won again.

f1. 2nd special figure 8R probability variation hit This jackpot is one of those that can be selected when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery triggered by the establishment of the starting condition of the second special symbol is a jackpot. In the special game when winning the jackpot, 8 round games from the 1st round to the 8th round are performed. The opening and closing aspect of the second big winning hole 17 in each round game of 8 times is the same as that of the first special figure 8R probability variation. When the jackpot is won, the game state after the end of the special game becomes a high-probability game state and a time-saving game state. The high-probability game state and time-saving game state are continued until a big win is won again.

g1. 2nd special symbol 8R normal win This big win is one of those that can be selected when the lottery result of the big win lottery triggered by the establishment of the start condition of the second special symbol is a big win. In the special game when winning the jackpot, 8 round games from the 1st round to the 8th round are performed. The opening and closing aspect of the second big winning hole 17 in each round game of 8 times is the same as that of the first special figure 8R probability variation. When the jackpot is won, the game state after the end of the special game becomes a low-probability game state and a time-saving game state. The low-probability game state and time-saving game state are continued until the big win is won again or the number of times of variation of the special symbols after the special game reaches 100 times without winning the big win.

In the following description, the 1st special figure 16R probability variation, the 1st special figure 8R probability variation, the 1st special figure 2R probability variation, the 2nd special figure 16R probability variation, and the 2nd special figure 8R probability variation are summarized as appropriate. It is called a definite hit. In addition, the first special figure 8R normal per and the second special figure 8R normal per are collectively referred to as "normal per" as appropriate. In addition, the first special figure 16R probability variation per and the second special figure 16R probability variation are collectively referred to as "per 16R" as appropriate. In addition, the first special figure 8R normal per and the second special figure 8R normal per are collectively referred to as "8R normal per". Also, per 1st special figure 8R probability variation, 1st special figure 8R normal per, 2nd special figure 8R probability variation per, and 2nd special figure 8R normal per are appropriately collectively called "8R per". The first special figure 2R probability variation per is appropriately called "per 2R".

There are two types of losses in the gaming machine 1, ie, special losses and normal losses. A special loss is a loss that can be selected only in a big winning lottery triggered by establishment of the starting condition of the first special symbol.

When the first special symbol is stopped by the special losing symbol, the game state related to the normal symbol lottery after the stop of the symbol becomes the first special time-saving game state. During the first special time-saving game state, the normal symbol lottery winning probability, the normal symbol variation time, and the opening time are the same as those in the time-saving game state. The first special time-saving game state is continued until a big win is won or the number of times of variation of special symbols reaches 200 times without winning a big win.

The normal loss is a loss that can be selected in both the big winning lottery triggered by the establishment of the starting condition of the first special symbol and the big winning lottery triggered by the establishment of the starting condition of the second special symbol.

Unlike the special loss, stopping with a normal loss pattern itself does not trigger a change in the game state. However, in the low-probability gaming state, if the variable display that stops with normal losing symbols continues over 800 times, the gaming state related to the normal symbol lottery after the 800th symbol stop is the second special time-saving gaming state. become. Even during the second special time-saving game state, the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery, the variation time of the normal symbols, and the open time are the same as in the time-saving game state. The second special time-saving game state is continued until a big win is won or the number of times of variation of special symbols reaches 600 times without winning a big win.

An out port 11 is provided in the center of the bottom side of the game area 6 . A game ball that reaches the bottom of a game area 6 without entering any of the general winning opening 12, the first starting opening 14, the second starting opening 15, the first big winning opening 16 and the second big winning opening 17. is discharged through the out port 11 .

An image display device 31 is fitted between the decoration member 7 and the first start opening 14 in the game area 6 . The image display device 31 performs game effects using effect images under the control of the integrated control unit 141 in the effect control board 120 .

More specifically, the image display device 31 performs a symbol variation effect as an effect in accordance with the symbol variation display of the special symbols. As shown in FIG. 8(a), in the pattern variation production, the left pattern 36L, the middle pattern 36C, the right pattern 36R, and the fourth pattern 36Z (hereinafter, these patterns 36L, 36C, 36R, and 36Z are appropriately referred to as the "production pattern 36”) is displayed. The left pattern 36L, the middle pattern 36C, the right pattern 36R, and the fourth pattern 36Z are changed in synchronization with the first special design display device 20 and the second special design display device 21, the first special design display device 20 and the second The same jackpot determination result as that indicated by the special symbol of the special symbol display device 21 is notified.

The symbols displayed as the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, and the right symbol 36R include "1" symbol, "2" symbol, "3" symbol, "4" symbol, "5" symbol, "6" symbol, " There are 7" symbols, 8" symbols, and 9" symbols. Moreover, the display mode of the fourth pattern 36Z includes a first display mode and a second display mode.

As shown in FIG. 8(a), when the variable display of the special symbols triggered by the starting winning of the first starting port 14 or the second starting port 15 starts, the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C and the right symbol 36R are displayed. Each is "1" pattern → "2" pattern → "3" pattern → "4" pattern → "5" pattern → "6" pattern → "7" pattern → "8" pattern → "9" pattern → "1" ' symbol, and the fourth symbol 36Z starts to be displayed in a cycle of the first display mode→the second display mode→the first display mode. When the special symbols stop after the variable display for a predetermined variable time, the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, the right symbol 36R, and the fourth symbol 36Z are fixed (perfectly stop), the fourth lamp 34d emits green emission pattern (0), and the effect sound is muted. If the confirmed combination of the left pattern 36L, the middle pattern 36C, the right pattern 36R, and the fourth pattern 36Z is a jackpot, a special game is executed, and if it is a normal loss or a special loss, the next variation is performed. done. The types of jackpot, special loss, and normal loss reported by the combination of the left pattern 36L, middle pattern 36C, right pattern 36R, and fourth pattern 36Z in the pattern variation production, and the types of jackpot, special loss, and normal that are reported by the special pattern The type of loss is always the same.

FIG. 9 is a diagram showing the relationship between the types of jackpot, special loss, and normal loss, and combinations of the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, the right symbol 36R, and the fourth symbol 36Z. In the gaming machine 1, when winning a 16R variable winning jackpot lottery, the left pattern 36L, the middle pattern 36C, and the right pattern 36R are either "333" or "777" and the fourth pattern 36Z is the first display mode, combination to stop.

If you win the 8R variable hit in the jackpot lottery, the left pattern 36L, middle pattern 36C, and right pattern 36R are "111", "222", "444", "555", "666", "888", and " 999", the fourth symbol 36Z stops in the first display mode.

When the 8R normal hit is won in the jackpot lottery, the left pattern 36L, the middle pattern 36C, and the right pattern 36R are "111", "222", "444", "555", "666", "888", and " 999", the fourth symbol 36Z stops in the second display mode.

When winning the 2R probability variable winning jackpot lottery, the left pattern 36L, the middle pattern 36C and the right pattern 36R are "135" and the fourth pattern 36Z is stopped in the first display mode.

When the result of the jackpot lottery is a special loss, the combination of the left pattern 36L, the middle pattern 36C and the right pattern 36R being "808" and the fourth pattern being the first display mode is stopped.

When the result of the jackpot lottery is normal loss, the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, the right symbol 36R, and the fourth symbol 36Z are stopped in a combination other than the above.

Here, the fourth pattern 36Z is extremely small in display size compared to the left pattern 36L, middle pattern 36C, and right pattern 36R. For this reason, when the left pattern 36L, the middle pattern 36C, and the right pattern 36R stop with the same pattern combination other than "777" and "333", it is not possible to know which of the 8R probability variation hit and the 8R normal hit. It has become. When the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, and the right symbol 36R stop at "777" or "333", it is easy to understand that the 16R probability variation hit is won at the time of stopping.

As shown in FIG. 8(a), the gaming machine 1, when the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, the right symbol 36R, and the fourth symbol 36Z are stopped in the winning mode and the special game is performed, A special game production is performed. In the special game production, an opening production related to the opening of the special game, a round game production related to the round game, and an ending production related to the ending of the special game are performed.

As shown in FIG. 8(b), an image 37(0) of the variation is displayed in the lower center of the image display device 31. As shown in FIG. When there is a suspension of the variation of the first special symbol, on the left side of the image 37 (0) of the variation on the image display device 31, the image 37 ₁ of the first suspension (the first suspension in the order of variation) in the first special symbol (1), the image 37 ₁ (2) of the second hold (the second hold in the order of change), the image 37 ₁ (3) of the third hold (the third hold in the order of change), and the fourth hold (change A maximum of four images of the image 37 ₁ (4) of the fourth pending) are displayed.

Also, if there is a suspension of the variation of the second special symbol, on the right side of the image 37 (0) of the variation in the image display device 31, the image of the first suspension (the first suspension in the order of variation) in the second special symbol 37 ₂ (1), the image 37 ₂ (2) of the second reservation (the second reservation in the change order), the image 37 ₂ (3) of the third reservation (the third reservation in the change order), and the fourth reservation A maximum of four images of the image 37 ₂ (4) of (4th pending in order of change) are displayed. Here, in FIG. 8B, only images 37(0), 37 ₁ (1), 37 ₁ (2), and 37 ₁ (3) are shown for simplicity.

When the number of reserved display of the first special symbol reserved display device 23 increases, the image 37 ₁ (1), 37 ₁ (2), 37 ₁ (3), or 37 ₁ (4) corresponding to the number of reserved after the increase Appear. When the number of reserved display of the second special symbol reserved display 24 increases, the image 37 ₂ (1), 37 ₂ (2), 37 ₂ (3), or 37 ₂ (4) corresponding to the number of reserved after the increase Appear.

During the display of the image 37 ₁ (1), 37 ₁ (2), 37 ₁ (3), or 37 ₁ (4) corresponding to the number of pending display of the first special symbol pending display 23, the special symbol is once Each time the variation of the image 37 (0) disappears, the image 37 ₁ (1) of the first suspension moves to the position of the variation image 37 (0) of the variation, and the images after the second suspension 37 ₁ (2), 37 ₁ (3), or 37 ₁ (4) move to their respective right neighbor positions.

During the display of the image 37 ₂ (1), 37 ₂ (2), 37 ₂ (3), or 37 ₂ (4) corresponding to the number of pending display of the second special symbol pending display 24, one special symbol Each time the variation of the image 37 (0) disappears, the image 37 ₂ (1) of the first suspension moves to the position of the variation image 37 (0) of the variation, and the images after the second suspension 37 ₂ (2), 37 ₂ (3), or 37 ₂ (4) moves to the position to the left of each.

In the following description, images 37(0), ₃₇₁ (1), ₃₇₁ (2), 371(3), ₃₇₁ (4), ₃₇₂ (1), _{372 (} 2), ₃₇₂ ( 3) and 37 ₂ (4) are appropriately referred to as “holding display images”.

As shown in FIG. 10(a), the gaming machine 1 has four modes: normal mode, live mode, special training mode, and help mode. Among the four modes, the normal mode is a mode for digestion with a left-handed strike. Live mode, special training mode, and help mode are modes that are digested by hitting right. The normal mode is a mode in the low-probability game state and non-time-saving game state. The live mode is a mode in a high-probability game state and a time-saving game state. Special training mode is a mode in the low-probability game state and time-saving game state. The help mode is a mode at the time of the low probability game state and the first special game time saving state, or the low probability game state and the second special time saving game state.

The player starts playing in normal mode. In the normal mode, the gaming machine 1 carries out stage productions of three stages, a marine stage, a savanna stage, and a cosmo stage, in addition to the symbol variation production. In the normal mode, there is a stage change at each predetermined timing (for example, immediately after the start of the variation) within the symbol variation display with one or more symbol variation displays interposed therebetween, and in this stage change, the type of stage production is changed.

As shown in FIG. 11(a), when winning with a variable probability, the effect after the end of the special game is the effect of the live mode. In the live mode production, the background image that is normally changing becomes an animation showing how a plurality of anime characters sing.

Live mode continues until the jackpot is won again. If the next winning jackpot is a probability variable hit, the effect after the special game ends is the live mode effect again. If the next winning big win is a normal win, the effect after the special game ends is a special training mode effect.

As shown in FIG. 11(b), when the player wins normally, the effect after the special game ends is the special training mode effect. In the special training mode, the background image, which is normally changing, becomes an animation showing how the anime character is training in preparation for the live performance.

In the lower right corner of the background image, the number of remaining training mode is displayed. The remaining number of times immediately after shifting to the special training mode is 100. The remaining number of times is counted down as 100→99→98 . When the left pattern 36L, the middle pattern 36C, the right pattern 36R, and the fourth pattern 36Z are determined in a losing manner in the pattern variation performance of the variation with the remaining number of times being 1, an image of "special training mode end" appears.

As shown in FIG. 12(a), when the special symbol stops at a special losing symbol during left-handed hitting, the effect after the stop becomes the help mode effect. In the production of the help mode, the characters "Enter the help time" appear, and the production during normal fluctuation becomes an animation showing how the yacht drifts in the sea.

In the lower right corner of the background image, the remaining number of help modes is displayed. The remaining number of times immediately after the transition to the help mode in the case of stopping with a special losing pattern is 200. The remaining number of times is counted down as 200→199→198 . The character "Last" appears in the pattern variation effect of the variation in which the remaining number of times is 1. In this variation, when the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, the right symbol 36R, and the fourth symbol 36Z are fixed in a losing mode, an image of "help time ends" appears.

As shown in FIG. 12(b), during the low-probability gaming state, when the number of fluctuations in which the special symbols stop with normal losing symbols reaches 800 times, the effect after the 800th fluctuation stops is a help mode. It will be a performance of In this case, the remaining number of times after shifting to the help mode is 600. The remaining number of times is counted down as 600→599→598 . The character "Last" appears in the pattern variation effect of the variation in which the remaining number of times is 1. In this variation, when the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, the right symbol 36R, and the fourth symbol 36Z are fixed in a losing mode, an image of "help time ends" appears.

As shown in FIG. 13, the gaming machine 1 performs the normal variation effect at the beginning of the effect in accordance with the symbol variation display. In the normal variation effect, the image display device 31 displays the left pattern 36L, the middle pattern 36C, and the right pattern 36R in a normal variation (the left pattern 36L, the middle pattern 36C, and the right pattern 36R are randomly displayed in a round) image and the present image. The background image corresponding to the mode (in the example of FIG. 13, the background image of the marine stage) is displayed, and the lighting device 340d for production causes the fourth lamp 34d to emit light in a light emission mode corresponding to the current mode, and outputs sound. Device 32 outputs background music corresponding to the current mode.

FIG. 10(b) is a diagram showing a background image, lighting mode, and BGM in each mode. As shown in FIG. 10(b), in the marine stage in the normal mode, the background image that is normally changing becomes an underwater animation, the light emission mode of the fourth lamp 34d becomes the light emission pattern (1), and the BGM is music ( 1). In the savanna stage of the normal mode, the background image during normal change becomes a savanna animation, the light emission mode of the fourth lamp 34d becomes light emission pattern (2), and the BGM becomes music (2). In the Cosmo Stage in the normal mode, the background image during normal change becomes an animation of the universe, the light emission mode of the fourth lamp 34d becomes light emission pattern (3), and the BGM becomes music (3).

In the live mode, the normally changing background image becomes animation of singing by an anime character, the light emission mode of the fourth lamp 34d becomes light emission pattern (4), and the BGM becomes music (4). In the special training mode, the background image that is normally changing becomes the special training animation, the light emission mode of the fourth lamp 34d becomes light emission pattern (5), and the BGM becomes music (5).

In the help mode, the normally changing background image becomes an animation of a yacht traveling on the ocean, the light emission mode of the fourth lamp 34d becomes light emission pattern (6), and the BGM becomes music (6).

As shown in FIG. 14, in the production corresponding to the symbol variation display, there is a case where the production proceeds from the normal variation production to the normal ready-to-win production. In the normal reach effect, the image display device 31 displays a normal reach effect effect image, the effect lighting device 340d causes the fourth lamp 34d to emit light in the normal reach effect light emission mode, and the sound output device 32 emits the normal reach effect BGM. to output The reliability of the jackpot when proceeding from the normal fluctuation performance to the normal reach performance is higher than when not proceeding to the normal reach performance.

When proceeding from the normal fluctuation effect to the normal ready-to-reach effect, one of the left pattern 36L and the right pattern 36R (the left pattern 36L in the example of FIG. 14(a)) is temporarily stopped, and the production effect of "dung" indicating the stop of the left pattern. A sound is output. After the two patterns excluding the temporarily stopped one continue to be displayed for a while, the other of the left pattern 36L and the right pattern 36R (the right pattern 36R in the example of FIG. 14(a)) is assumed to be stopped first. The games are temporarily stopped at the same type of symbol, and the effect sound "dung" indicating the stop of the right symbol is output, and the effect sound "reach" indicating the formation of the ready-to-win state is output. In accordance with this, the background image, lighting mode, and BGM are switched to those of the normal reach effect.

15A and 15B are diagrams showing a background image, a lighting mode, and BGM in the normal reach effect. As shown in FIG. 15, in the normal reach effect, the background image becomes an animation showing how the adventure is carried out, the light emission mode becomes light emission pattern (7), and the BGM becomes music (7).

As shown in FIG. 16, there is a case where the normal ready-to-win effect develops into the SP ready-to-win effect in the effect matched to the symbol variation display. In the SP reach effect, the image display device 31 displays the effect image of the SP reach effect, the lighting device for effect 340d causes the fourth lamp 34d to emit light in the light emission mode of the SP reach effect, and the audio output device 32 emits the SP BGM for ready-to-win performance is output. The SP reach production is a development production developed from the normal reach production. The reliability of the jackpot when the normal reach performance develops into the SP reach performance is higher than the case where the SP reach performance does not proceed.

When the normal ready-to-win performance develops into the SP ready-to-win performance, the middle pattern 36C decelerates and almost stops, then rotates at high speed, and the left pattern 36L and right pattern 36R move away from the left corner and right corner of the screen. In accordance with this, the effect image, the lighting mode, and the BGM are switched to those of the SP reach effect.

17A and 17B are diagrams showing a background image, a lighting mode, and BGM in the SP ready-to-win effect. As shown in FIG. 17, in the SP ready-to-win effect, the background image becomes an animation showing a battle between a plurality of characters, the light emission mode becomes light emission pattern (8), and the BGM becomes music (8).

As shown in FIG. 18, there is a case where a step-up effect is executed as a specific effect within the effect in accordance with the symbol variation display. The step-up effect is a effect in which the step effect progresses from among the four stages as the upper limit to the stage designated as the final stage (two stages in the example of FIG. 18). In the step-up production, photo images of girls unique to each stage are superimposed in order. In the step-up production, the higher the level of development, the higher the reliability of the jackpot. In the step-up production, the image display device 31 displays the production image of the step-up production, the production drive device 330c operates the movable accessory 33c in the step-up production operation mode, and the production lighting device 340c The third lamp 34c is caused to emit light in the light emission mode of the step-up production, and the sound output device 32 outputs the production sound effect of the step-up production.

19A and 19B are diagrams showing an effect image, an operation mode, a light emission mode, and an effect sound of the step-up effect. As shown in FIG. 19, in the step-up effect ending at the first stage, a photo image of a girl appears, the light emission mode of the third lamp 34c becomes the light emission pattern (9), and a shooting sound "cash" is output. be. In the step-up effect progressing to the second stage, the first photo image and the second photo image overlapping it appear in succession, the movable accessory 33c operates in the first operation mode, and the third lamp 34c turns on. The light emission mode becomes the light emission pattern (9), and a shooting sound of "click, click" is output. In the step-up production that progresses to the third stage, the first photo image, the second photo image, and the third photo image appear in succession, the movable accessory 33c operates in the first operation mode, The light emission mode of the third lamp 34c becomes the light emission pattern (9), and a photographing sound of "click, click, click" is output. In the step-up effect progressing to the fourth stage, the first photo image, the second photo image, the third photo image, and the fourth photo image appear in succession, and the movable accessory 33c It operates in the first operation mode, the light emission mode of the third lamp 34c becomes the light emission pattern (9), and the photographing sound of "click, click, click, click" is output.

As shown in FIG. 20, there is a case where a character appearance effect is executed as a specific effect within the effect in accordance with the symbol variation display. The character appearance effect is a effect in which a character that suggests the possibility of a big win appears. Characters include character A, character B, character C, and character D. The reliability of the jackpot of the four types of characters is Character A<Character B<Character C<Character D. Character D is a premium character. When the character D appears, the jackpot is confirmed. A character appearance effect in which the character D appears is a rare premium effect.

In the character appearance effect, the image display device 31 displays the effect image of the character appearance effect, the effect drive device 330c operates the movable accessory 33c in the action mode of the character appearance effect, and the effect illumination device 340c The third lamp 34c is caused to emit light in the light emission mode of the character appearance presentation, and the sound output device 32 outputs the presentation effect sound of the character appearance presentation.

21A and 21B are diagrams showing an effect image, an action mode, a light emission mode, and an effect sound of a character appearance effect. As shown in FIG. 21, in the character appearance effect of character A, the image of character A appears, the movable accessory 33c operates in the first action mode, and the light emission mode of the third lamp 34c changes to light emission pattern (10). Then, an appearance sound of "Pico" is output. In the character appearance effect of the character B, the image of the character B appears, the movable accessory 33c operates in the first action mode, the light emission mode of the third lamp 34c becomes the light emission pattern (10), and a "beep" appears. A sound is output. In the character appearance production of the character C, the image of the character C appears, the movable accessory 33c operates in the first action mode, the light emission mode of the third lamp 34c changes to the light emission pattern (10), and a "beep" appears. A sound is output. In the character appearance effect of the character D, the image of the character D appears, the movable accessory 33c operates in the first action mode, the light emission mode of the third lamp 34c becomes the light emission pattern (11), and "pico pico picone" is produced. A jackpot confirmation sound is output.

As shown in FIG. 22, there is a case where a roulette effect is executed as a specific effect within the effect in accordance with the symbol variation display. The roulette presentation is a presentation suggesting which of a plurality of development destination candidates the game will develop into depending on the outcome of the roulette wheel. The roulette results include "SP", which suggests developing into SP reach production, "help", which suggests going into help mode, "loss", which suggests losing, and short hits. There is an "otsu" that suggests that you will be elected.

In the roulette effect, the image display device 31 displays the effect image of the roulette effect, the effect drive device 330c operates the movable accessory 33c in the operation mode of the roulette effect, and the effect lighting device 340c operates the roulette effect. The third lamp 34c is caused to emit light in a light emission mode, and the sound output device 32 outputs the effect sound of the roulette presentation.

23A and 23B are diagrams showing an effect image, an action mode, a light emission mode, and an effect sound of a character appearance effect. As shown in FIG. 23, in the roulette effect suggesting that the SP ready-to-win effect is performed, an effect image that rotates the roulette and stops at "SP" appears, the movable accessory 33c operates in the first operation mode, and the third The light emission mode of the lamp 34c becomes the light emission pattern (12), and the roulette sound "Rurururururusuton" is output. After this, it develops into SP reach production. In the roulette effect suggesting that the roulette should proceed to the help mode, an effect image appears in which the roulette is rotated and stops at "Help", the movable accessory 33c operates in the first operation mode, and the third lamp 34c lights up. The light emission pattern becomes (12), and a roulette sound "Rurururu Rouston" is output. After that, the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, the right symbol 36R, and the fourth symbol 36Z are stopped in a special failing stop mode, and the game proceeds to the help mode. In the roulette performance suggesting that the player will lose, a performance image appears in which the roulette wheel is rotated and stops at "losing", the movable accessory 33c operates in the first operation mode, and the light emission mode of the third lamp 34c changes to the light emission pattern ( 12) is reached, and a roulette sound of "ru-ru-ru-ru-ru-suton" is output. After that, the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, the right symbol 36R, and the fourth symbol 36Z are stopped in the normal losing stop mode, and the normal losing is confirmed. In the roulette effect suggesting a short win, an effect image appears in which the roulette wheel is rotated and stopped with a "crash", the movable accessory 33c operates in the first operation mode, and the third lamp 34c emits light. Pattern (12) is reached, and a roulette sound "Rurururu Rouston" is output. After that, the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, the right symbol 36R, and the fourth symbol 36Z are stopped in a short winning stop mode, and the short winning is decided.

As shown in FIG. 24, as a specific effect in the effect in accordance with the symbol variation display, there is a case where the SP development fan effect is executed. The SP development inciting production is a production inciting the development to the SP reach production. In the SP development hype effect, the image display device 31 displays the effect image of the SP development hype effect, the driving devices for effect 330c and 330d operate the movable accessories 33c and 33d in the operation mode of the SP development hype effect, The production lighting device 340c lights the third lamp 34c in the light emission mode of the SP development promotion production, and the sound output device 32 outputs the production effect sound of the SP development promotion production.

25A and 25B are diagrams showing an effect image, an operation mode, a light emission mode, and an effect sound of the SP development fan effect. As shown in FIG. 25, in the SP development fanning effect, a sandstorm effect appears, the movable accessories 33c and 33d operate in the second operation mode, and the light emission mode of the third lamp 34c becomes the light emission pattern (13). , a rattling sound is output.

As shown in FIG. 26, there is a case where an SP development fixed effect is executed as a specific effect within the effect in accordance with the symbol variation display. The SP development confirmation effect is an effect for notifying the confirmation of the development to the SP ready-to-win effect. In the SP development fixed effect, the image display device 31 displays the effect image of the SP development fixed effect, the driving devices for effect 330c, 330d operate the movable accessories 33c, 33d in the operation mode of the SP development fixed effect, The production lighting device 340c lights the third lamp 34c in the light emission mode of the SP development finalization production, and the audio output device 32 outputs the production effect sound of the SP development finalization production.

27A and 27B are diagrams showing an effect image, an action mode, a light emission mode, and an effect sound of the SP development fixed effect. As shown in FIG. 27, in the SP development finalization effect, a bubble effect appears, the movable accessories 33c and 33d operate in the second operation mode, and the light emission mode of the third lamp 34c becomes the light emission pattern (14). , a development confirmation sound called "Kuroon" is output.

As shown in FIG. 28, there is a case where a cut-in effect is executed as a specific effect within the effect in accordance with the symbol variation display. The cut-in effect is a effect in which a cut-in image suggesting the possibility of a big win appears superimposed. The cut-in images include a cut-in image with a green background, a cut-in image with a red background, a cut-in image with a zebra pattern background, and a cut-in image with a rainbow background. The reliability of the jackpot for the background of the four types of cut-in images is green<red<zebra pattern<rainbow color. When a cut-in image with a rainbow background appears, the jackpot is confirmed. The rainbow-colored cut-in effect is a rare premium effect.

In the cut-in effect, the image display device 31 displays a cut-in image, the effect driving devices 330c and 330d operate the movable accessories 33c and 33d in the operation mode of the cut-in effect, and the effect lighting device 340c , the third lamp 34c is caused to emit light in the light emission mode of the cut-in effect, and the sound output device 32 outputs the effect sound of the cut-in effect.

FIG. 29 is a diagram showing a cut-in effect image, motion mode, light emission mode, and effect sound. As shown in FIG. 29, in the green background cut-in effect, the green background cut-in image appears, the movable accessories 33c and 33d operate in the second operation mode, and the light emission mode of the third lamp 34c changes to the light emission pattern. (15) is reached, and the sound "Kachin" is output. In the red background cut-in effect, a red background cut-in image appears, the movable accessories 33c and 33d operate in the second operation mode, the light emission mode of the third lamp 34c becomes the light emission pattern (15), and " A "click" sound is output. In the cut-in effect of the zebra pattern background, the cut-in image of the zebra pattern background appears, the movable accessories 33c and 33d operate in the second operation mode, and the light emission mode of the third lamp 34c becomes the light emission pattern (15). , a "kachin" sound is output. In the rainbow background cut-in effect, a rainbow background cut-in image appears, the movable accessories 33c and 33d operate in the second operation mode, and the light emission mode of the third lamp 34c becomes the light emission pattern (16). , a jackpot confirmation sound called "kyurukyurun" is output.

As shown in FIG. 30, there is a case where a fixed accessory actuation effect is executed as a specific effect within the effect in accordance with the symbol variation display. The fixed role operation effect includes a fixed role operation first effect that notifies the confirmation of the 8R probability variable hit or the 8R normal hit by the interlocking actions of the three movable roles 33a, 33c, and 33d, and the four movable roles. 33a, 33b, 33c, and 33d interlocked with each other, there is a confirmed role product operation second effect that informs the confirmation of the 16R probability variable hit. The definite role operation first effect is executed when the left symbol 36L, middle symbol 36C, right symbol 36R, and fourth symbol 36Z are stopped in the 8R variable hit or 8R normal hit stop mode. It is the timing just before the pattern is determined in the fluctuation. The definite role product operation second effect that informs the confirmation of the 16R probability variation hit is executed, the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, the right symbol 36R, and the 4th symbol 36Z stop in the stop mode of the 16R probability variation hit. It is the timing just before the pattern is determined in the variation that is supposed to be.

In the confirmed role actuation effect, the image display device 31 displays the effect image of the confirmed role actuation effect, and the driving devices for effect 330a, 330b, 330c, and 330d display the movable role in the operation mode of the confirmed role actuation effect. 33a, 33b, 33c, and 33d are operated, the lighting devices for production 340a and 340b light up the first lamp 34a and the second lamp 34b in the light emission mode of the fixed role operation production, and the audio output device 32 emits light for the fixed role. Outputs the effect sound of the object action production.

FIG. 31 is a diagram showing a production image, an operation mode, a light emission mode, and a production effect sound of the first fixed role actuation production and the second fixed role actuation production. As shown in FIG. 31, in the fixed role action first production, a yellow lightning effect appears, the movable roles 33a, 33c, and 33d operate in the third action mode, and the first lamp 34a and the second lamp The luminous mode of 34b becomes the luminous pattern (17), and a jackpot confirmation sound "Kurururun" is output. In the final effect of the action of the second action, a golden lightning effect appears, the movable actions 33a, 33b, 33c, and 33d operate in the fourth action mode, and the first lamp 34a and the second lamp 34b light up. The light emission pattern becomes (18), and a jackpot determination sound "kyurunkyurunkyurururun" is output.

In addition, the game machine 1 may execute a look-ahead suspension display change effect when suspension of the variation of the special symbol occurs due to the start winning of the first start port 14 or the second start port 15. - 特許庁The look-ahead pending display change effect is an effect suggesting the possibility of a big win in pending due to a change in the display mode of the pending display image.

As shown in FIGS. 32(a) and 32(b), a rank-up effect may be executed as part of the special game effect during the special game. The rank-up production is a stop mode in which the left pattern 36L, the middle pattern 36C, and the right pattern 36R are "111", "222", "444", "555", "666", "888", or "999". In the special game which is performed with the confirmation as a trigger, at the beginning of execution of the special game, which jackpot was won in the middle of the special game without clearly indicating which one of the 8R variable hit and the 8R normal hit was won. It is a production that clearly shows. The rank-up effect is executed during the period from timing t _SKK to t _RDE after the start timing t _S4R of the fourth round of the special game. In the rank-up performance, the player is urged to hit the performance button 35 repeatedly, and when the number of repeated hits of the performance button 35 reaches a predetermined number (for example, 30 times), it is notified whether or not the 8R probability variation is achieved.

More specifically, in the rank-up effect, at the timing t _SKK , an image of "Charge the gauge and get a probability change" appears in the center of the screen. At the timing t _RDS , a horizontally long rectangular gauge image, an image simulating the effect button 35, an indicator image showing the progress of the operation accepting effective period of the effect button 35, and an operation guidance image (an image of "Continue hitting!") are displayed. Appear. In the gauge image, the left end of the development range in the gauge image is MIN, the right end of the development range of the gauge image is MAX, and the progress amount between MIN and MAX indicates the accuracy of the probability variation hit.

In the rank-up effect, the time marker in the indicator image (the right end of the hatched area in the drawing) advances to the right as the operation acceptance valid period elapses. When the player repeatedly hits the effect button 35 within the valid period of operation reception, the progress amount in the gauge image advances to the right according to the repeated hits. When the number of successive hits of the effect button 35 within the valid period of operation acceptance reaches 30, or when the end timing t _RDE of the valid period of operation acceptance is reached before the number of successive presses reaches 30, the ranking is either successful or unsuccessful. You will be notified if it is done.

As shown in FIG. 32(a), in the production of success in rank-up, the amount of progress of the gauge reaches "MAX", and images of "Success" and "Congratulations on the odds change" are displayed. In the special game, when the effect of rank-up success is executed, the live mode effect (FIG. 11(a)) is performed after the special game is finished.

As shown in FIG. 32(b), in the effect of rank-up failure, the progress of the gauge stops before "MAX" and an image of "failure" is displayed. In the special game, when the performance of rank-up failure is executed, the special training mode performance is performed after the special game is finished.

As shown in FIGS. 31(a) and 31(b), the suspension of the special symbol variation occurs due to the start winning, and the suspension (in the example of FIGS. 31(a) and 31(b), the first special When the look-ahead suspension display change effect with the final variation as the third suspension of the symbol) and the corresponding variation is executed, the timing t _HH immediately after the start of each variation from the start winning to the final variation (Fig. 31 (a) And in the example of FIG. 31(b), the timing t _HH (2) immediately after the start of the fluctuation two before the final fluctuation, the timing t _HH (1) immediately after the start of the fluctuation one before the final fluctuation, the final fluctuation At the timing t _HH (0) immediately after the start of , the display mode of the pending display image corresponding to the final change changes to any of blue, green, and red. In the look-ahead pending display change effect, the reliability of the big hit increases in the order of blue<green<red.

As shown in FIG. 2, the back surface of the game machine 1 includes a main control board 10, an effect control board 120, a payout control board 130, a power board 170, a game information output terminal board 30, a power plug 171, and a power switch (not shown). ), a RAM clear switch (not shown), and the like are provided. When the gaming machine 1 is activated, power is supplied from the power supply board 170 to the main control board 10, the effect control board 120, and the payout control board 130, and these boards are started.

In FIG. 3, the main control board 10 controls the basic operations of the gaming machine 1. As shown in FIG. The main control board 10 has a one-chip microcomputer 110m, an input port (not shown), and an output port (not shown). The one-chip microcomputer 110m of the main control board 10 is composed of a main CPU 110m, a main ROM 110b, and a main RAM 110c.

The input port of the main control board 10 includes a payout control board 130, a general winning opening detection switch 12a, a gate detection switch 13a, a first starting opening detection switch 14a, a second starting opening detection switch 15a, and a first large winning opening detection switch. 16a, the second big winning opening detection switch 17a, the door opening switch 18a, the magnetic detection sensor 18b, and the vibration detection sensor 18c are connected.

The output port of the main control board 10 includes a payout control board 130, a starting opening opening/closing solenoid 15c, a first large winning opening opening/closing solenoid 16c, a second large winning opening opening/closing solenoid 17c, a first special symbol display device 20, a second special A symbol display device 21, a normal symbol display device 22, a first special symbol reservation display device 23, a second special symbol reservation display device 24, a normal symbol reservation display device 25, and a game information output terminal board 30 are connected. The game information output terminal board 30 is for outputting an external output signal generated in the main control board 10 to a hall computer or the like of the game parlor. The game information output terminal board 30 is provided with a connector for connecting with a hall computer or the like of the game parlor.

The main CPU 110m of the main control board 10 reads the program stored in the main ROM 110b based on the input signals from each detection switch and timer and performs arithmetic processing. Further, the main CPU 110m directly controls the display devices 20 to 22 and the display devices 23 to 25, and transmits commands to other boards according to the result of arithmetic processing. When the activation operation is performed, the main CPU 110m executes the initialization process, and after the initialization process is finished and the game becomes ready for play, the jackpot random number (random number range of 0 to 60000), Special symbol random number (random number range of 0 to 99), random number for reach determination (random number range of 0 to 99), random number for special figure fluctuation (random number range of 0 to 99) , While updating various random numbers including normal symbol random numbers (random numbers in the random number range of 0 to 65535) within each random number range, variations in special symbols, variations in normal symbols, and games such as special games Control progress.

The main ROM 110b of the main control board 10 stores data such as game control programs. The main ROM 110b contains a jackpot determination table for the special symbol display device, a win determination table for the normal symbol display device, a symbol determination table, a variation pattern determination table, a preliminary determination table, a special game control table, a large winning opening opening/closing control table, Various tables such as a setting table at the end of a special game are stored. Details of these tables will be described later.

The main RAM 110c of the main control board 10 functions as a data work area during arithmetic processing of the main CPU 110m. The main RAM 110c has a special symbol holding storage area, a special symbol special electric processing data storage area, a stop symbol data storage area, a normal symbol holding storage area, a normal symbol electric processing data storage area, a normal symbol data storage area, the number of rounds (R ) Storage area, number of winning balls (C) storage area, high probability game flag storage area, time saving game flag storage area, first special time saving game flag storage area, second special time saving game flag storage area, game state buffer , 1st special symbol reservation number (U1) counter, 2nd special symbol reservation number (U2) counter, normal symbol reservation number (G) counter, high probability game number (X) counter, time saving number of times (J) counter, first Special time-saving number of times (J1) counter, second special time-saving (J2) counter, fluctuation number of times (K) counter, special design time counter, special game timer counter, normal design time counter, auxiliary game timer counter, transmission data storage area for production , etc. are provided. Here, when the power is cut off, the data in the used area of the main RAM 110c is backed up by the backup power supply after adding a checksum, and when the power is restored, the data backed up by the backup power supply is restored after the data check by the checksum. It is designed to be obtained.

The power supply board 170 supplies a power supply voltage to the game machine 1 and supplies a disconnection detection signal to the main control board 10 and the performance control board 120 to indicate whether or not the power supply voltage has become equal to or less than a predetermined value. The power supply board 170 has a backup power supply consisting of a capacitor. The power supply substrate 170 sets the power failure detection signal to high level while the power supply voltage exceeds a predetermined value, and sets the power failure detection signal to low level when the power supply voltage is equal to or lower than the predetermined value.

The production control board 120 is a sub-control board that controls production based on reception of production commands from the main control board 10 . The effect control board 120 is connected to the main control board 10 so as to be able to communicate in one direction from the main control board 10 to the effect control board 120 . The performance control board 120 includes an integrated control section 141, a display/sound control section 140, a lamp/driving control section 150, an input port and an output port for control of performance, and the like. The input port of the effect control board 120 is connected to the effect button detection switch 35a, key detection switches 39a, 39b, 39c, 39d, and the like.

The performance control board 120 receives a performance command from the main control board 10, and based on the received command, the image display device 31, the audio output device 32, the performance drive devices 330a, 330b, 330c, 330d, and the performance It plays a role as an effect control means for instructing the content of the effect by the lighting devices 340a, 340b, 340c, and 340d. The performance control board 120 includes a performance control section 120m, a display/sound control section 140, and a lamp/driving control section 150.

The effect control unit 120m includes a sub CPU 120a, a sub ROM 120b, a sub RAM 120c, and an RTC 120d. The RTC 120d outputs a time signal indicating the current date and time to the sub CPU 120a. The RTC 120d operates by the supplied power when power is supplied to the game machine 1, and operates by the power of the backup power supply mounted on the power supply board 170 when the power of the game machine 1 is turned off.

The sub CPU 120a reads the program stored in the sub ROM 120b based on the command transmitted from the main control board 10 and the input signal from the timer, receives the operation clock from the crystal oscillator, and performs arithmetic processing using the sub RAM 120c as a work area. and transmits the command generated in the process to the general control unit 141 and the lamp/driving control unit 150 . When the activation operation is performed, the sub CPU 120a performs initialization processing. While updating various random numbers including six kinds of random numbers with ) within each random number range, the performance according to the progress of the game is controlled. Here, the random numbers 1 to 6 for effect are designed so that the same random number is not obtained at the same time.

The sub ROM 120b of the effect control section 120m stores data such as a program for effect control. In the sub-ROM 120b, there are a variable effect pattern determination table, a look-ahead pending display change effect execution determination table, a final stage pending display mode determination table, a look-ahead pending display change effect scenario determination table, a stage change execution determination table, a new stage determination table, etc. Various tables are stored. Details of these tables will be described later. The sub-RAM 120c of the effect control section 120m functions as a data work area during the arithmetic processing of the sub-CPU 120a. The sub-RAM 120c includes a production information storage area, a production pattern storage area, a pattern variation production pattern storage area, a game state storage area, an production pattern storage area, a ready-to-win establishment waiting flag storage area, an SP ready-to-win waiting flag storage area, and a stage change waiting flag. Various storage areas such as a storage area, a rank-up effect success waiting flag storage area, a reach establishment waiting timer counter, an SP reach waiting timer counter, an operation reception effective period start timer counter, an operation reception effective period end timer counter, etc. are provided.

The display/sound control unit 140 serves as image control means for controlling the image display device 31 and as sound control means for controlling the sound output device 32 . The display/audio control unit 140 includes an integrated control unit 141, a CGROM 146, an audio processor 144, an audio ROM 148, an input/output port, and the like. An image display device 31 and an audio output device 32 are connected to input/output ports of the display/audio control unit 140 .

The overall control unit 141 includes an overall CPU 141a, an overall ROM 141c, and an overall RAM 141b. The supervising CPU 141a receives an operation clock from the crystal oscillator, reads the program stored in the supervising ROM 141c, performs arithmetic processing while using the supervising RAM 141b as a work area, and controls the VDP 145 and the audio processor 144 based on the processing. do.

The overall ROM 141c contains an image/sound control program for image display and sound control, a display list generation program for generating a display list composed of a group of drawing control commands, and an animation pattern for displaying an animation of a production pattern. , anime scene information, a sound list generation program for generating a sound list composed of a group of sound control commands, a performance image control mode determination table, a performance effect sound control mode determination table, and the like are stored.

The animation pattern associates the display order of animation scenes with animation scene information. Animation scene information includes weight frames, target data (sprite identification information, etc.), parameters for drawing (sprite display position, display magnification, transparency, etc.), drawing methods (display, non-display, enlargement, translucent display, etc.) and various information such as the duty ratio, which is a parameter of the brightness of the image display device 31 . For example, as shown in FIG. 34(A), the animation pattern for the stage production of the marine stage includes, as target data, identification information of the Little Mermaid and dolphins that form the background image of the marine stage, and their drawing positions as parameters. . As shown in FIG. 34B, the step-up effect animation pattern includes, as target data, identification information of a photo to appear in the step-up effect, and its display position as a parameter. As shown in FIG. 34C, the cut-in effect animation pattern includes, as target data, identification information of the cut-in to appear in the cut-in effect, and its display position as a parameter. As shown in FIG. 34(D), the animation pattern for the normal variation display of the production design includes identification information of the left design, the right design, the middle design, and the fourth design as target data, and their drawing positions as parameters. include.

VDP145 is connected with CGROM146. The CGROM 146 stores compressed image data and uncompressed palette data. The image data is specified for images displayed as sprites or movie frames on the image display device 31 (for example, individual images such as effect pattern images, background images constituting the background of the effect patterns, character images, and dialogue images). This is material data that summarizes pixel information of pixels within a range (for example, 32×32 pixels). The pixel information of the image data consists of color number information specifying a color number for each pixel and an α value indicating the transparency of the image. Palette data is data in which color number information specifying a color number is associated with display color information indicating the actual display color of a pixel.

A VRAM 147 is provided in the VDP 145 . The VRAM 147 has a display list storage area, a development storage area, a first frame buffer area, a second frame buffer area, and the like. The display list storage area is an area for temporarily storing the display list output from the overall control unit 141 (the overall CPU 141a). The expansion storage area is an area for temporarily storing image data obtained by decompressing the compressed image data in the CGMOM.

The first frame buffer area and the second frame buffer area are areas for drawing and displaying images. The first frame buffer area and the second frame buffer area are alternately switched between drawing and display each time drawing is started.

The VDP 145 stores the display list transmitted from the overall control unit 141 in the display list storage area of the VRAM 147, reads out the image data indicated by the display list in the CGROM 146, and stores the image data in the drawing frame buffer of the VRAM 147 based on this image data. A frame of drawing data is drawn, and one frame of drawing data in the display frame buffer of the VRAM 147 is output to the image display device 31 as a video signal (RGB signal or the like).

The VDP 145 is supplied with an operating clock from a crystal oscillator, and by dividing this operating clock, a synchronous signal (horizontal synchronous signal/vertical synchronous signal) for synchronizing with the image display device 31 is generated. and output to the image display device 31 . In this embodiment, the frame rate of the image control unit 155 is 30 fps (1/30 second=about 33 ms) so that drawing (image display) is performed 30 times per second. It may be set to 60 fps (1/60 second=approximately 16.6 ms) so that drawing (image display) is performed once.

Audio processor 144 is connected to audio ROM 148 . The audio ROM 148 stores compressed audio data. The audio processor 144 reads from the audio ROM 148 the audio data indicated by the sound list transmitted from the general control unit 141, decodes the audio data, applies audio processing to the signal obtained by decoding, and obtains the audio-processed signal. is output to the audio output device 32 as a sound signal of the effect sound.

The lamp/driving control unit 150 serves as lamp control means for controlling the production lighting devices 340a, 340b, 340c, and 340d, and as character control means for controlling the production drive devices 330a, 330b, 330c, and 330d. It fulfills its role. The lamp/driving control unit 150 includes a lamp CPU 150a, a lamp RAM 150b, a lamp ROM 150c, an input/output port, and the like. The input/output ports of the lamp/driving control unit 150 are connected to lighting devices for presentation 340a, 340b, 340c and 340d and driving devices for presentation 330a, 330b, 330c and 330d.

The lamp CPU 150a receives the operation clock from the crystal oscillator, reads out the program stored in the lamp ROM 150c, performs arithmetic processing while using the lamp RAM 150b as a work area, and based on the processing, the lighting devices 340a and 340b for performance. , 340c, 340d and the performance driving devices 330a, 330b, 330c, 330d.

The lamp ROM 150c determines and sets the lamp/driving control program for lighting the lamps and driving the accessories, and the lamp light emission information of the lighting devices 340a, 340b, 340c, and 340d for performance, and performs lighting for performance according to this setting. A lighting mode determination program for causing the devices 340a, 340b, 340c, and 340d to emit light, and character product driving information for the performance driving devices 330a, 330b, 330c, and 330d are determined and set, and according to this setting, the performance driving devices 330a, It stores an operation mode determination program for operating 330b, 330c, and 330d, a performance lamp control mode determination table, a performance accessory control mode determination table, and the like.

The payout control board 130 controls the payout of game balls. The payout control board 130 is connected to the main control board 10 so as to be able to communicate bidirectionally. The payout control board 130 includes a one-chip microcomputer 110m composed of a payout CPU, a payout ROM, and a payout RAM (not shown). The payout CPU reads the program stored in the payout ROM based on input signals from the payout ball counting switch 132 and the timer, performs arithmetic processing while using the payout RAM as a work area, and based on the processing, responds A command to do is sent to the main control board 10 . An output side of the payout control board 130 is connected with a payout motor 131 of a payout device for paying out a predetermined number of game balls from the game ball storage portion. Based on commands transmitted from the main control board 10, the payout CPU reads out a predetermined program from the payout ROM, performs arithmetic processing, and controls the payout motor 131 of the payout device to pay out predetermined game balls. At this time, the payout RAM functions as a data work area during the arithmetic processing of the payout CPU.

Next, the operation of the gaming machine 1 according to this embodiment will be described. FIG. 35 is a flow chart showing main processing of the main control board 10 of the game machine 1 . The main process is started when power is supplied from the power supply board 170 to the main control board 10 by a startup operation and a system reset occurs in the main CPU 110m of the main control board 10 .

In FIG. 35, the main CPU 110m performs initialization processing (S10). In the initialization process, the main CPU 110m reads and executes a game control program from the main ROM 110b when the power is turned on. In the initialization process, the main CPU 110m turns on/off the RAM clear switch (not shown) on the back of the game machine 1 when the power is turned on, and saves data in the main RAM 110c in the power interruption monitoring process (S20) at the time of the previous power interruption. Based on the contents of the power failure occurrence information and the checksum backed up as a backup, it is determined whether or not data recovery is necessary. If so, restore the data in the main RAM 110c.

Next, the main CPU 110m performs power shutdown monitoring processing (S20). In the power-off monitoring process, the main CPU 110m monitors whether or not power-off of the gaming machine 1 has occurred. and stopping the shooting of game balls by the ball feeding solenoid 4b), clearing the output port, stopping the payout of game balls by the payout device, creating and saving checksums in each storage area of the main RAM 110c, and information on the occurrence of power failure. After performing a series of processing for setting , access to the main RAM 110c is set to be prohibited to prepare for a power outage.

Next, the main CPU 110m performs game random number update processing (S30). In the game random number update process, the main CPU 110m updates the reach determination random number and the special figure fluctuation random number. Next, the main CPU 110m performs initial random number update processing (S40). In the initial random number update process, the main CPU 110m updates the jackpot initial random number, normal symbol initial random number, and special symbol initial random number.

Thereafter, the main CPU 110m repeats the loop processing of steps S20 to S40. In addition to this loop processing, the main CPU 110m executes timer interrupt processing each time the reset clock pulse signal is generated by the reset clock pulse generation circuit.

FIG. 36 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing of the main control board 10. As shown in FIG. The main CPU 110m of the main control board 10 executes timer interrupt processing every 4 milliseconds, which is the generation period of the reset clock pulse signal in the reset clock pulse generation circuit in the main control board 10. FIG.

In FIG. 36, when the reset clock pulse signal is generated, the main CPU 110m saves the information in the register of the main CPU 110m at that point in the stack area (S100). Next, the main CPU 110m performs time control processing (S110). The time control process is a process of updating counters used for measuring various times in the main RAM 110c. In the time control process, the main CPU 110m subtracts one from the special symbol time counter, special game timer counter, normal symbol time counter, and auxiliary game timer counter in the main RAM 110c.

Next, the main CPU 110m performs random number update processing (S120). In the random number update process, the main CPU 110m updates the jackpot random number value, the normal symbol random number value, and the special symbol random number value. More specifically, the main CPU 110m updates each random number counter by +1. When the added random number counter exceeds the maximum value of the random number range (when the random number counter completes one cycle), the random number counter is reset to 0, and each random number is newly updated from the initial random number at that time. .

After executing step S120, the main CPU 110m performs an initial random number update process (S130). In the initial random number update process, the main CPU 110m updates the jackpot initial random number, normal symbol initial random number, and special symbol initial random number.

Next, the main CPU 110m performs input control processing (S200). In the input control process, the main CPU 110m controls the general winning opening detection switch 12a, the first big winning opening detection switch 16a, the second big winning opening detection switch 17a, the first start opening detection switch 14a, the second start opening detection switch 15a, It is determined whether or not there is an input to the various switches of the gate detection switch 13a, and if there is an input, predetermined data is set. Details of the procedure of the input control process will be described later.

After executing step S200, the main CPU 110m performs special figure special electric control processing (S300). In the special figure special electric control process, the main CPU 110m updates the value of the special figure special electric process data provided in the main RAM 110c according to the progress of the game in the gaming machine 1, and performs the special symbol storage determination process (special figure special electric process). Data = processing when 0), special symbol variation processing (processing when special symbol special electric processing data = 1), special symbol stop processing (processing when special symbol special electric processing data = 2), jackpot game processing (special One of the five processes of the processing when the figure special electric processing data = 3) and the jackpot game end processing (the processing when the special figure special electric processing data = 4) is selected and executed. The details of the procedure of the special figure special train control process will be described later.

After execution of step S300, the main CPU 110m performs a normal/normal power control process (S400). In the normal pattern general electric control process, the main CPU 110m updates the value of the general pattern general electric process data provided in the main RAM 110c according to the progress of the game in the gaming machine 1, and performs the normal symbol storage determination process (normal pattern Processing when general electric processing data = 0), normal design fluctuation processing (processing when general electric processing data = 1), normal design stop processing (processing when general electric processing data = 2), And one of the four processes of the auxiliary game process (process when the general pattern general electrical process data = 3) is selected and executed. The details of the procedure of the general map and general electric control processing will be described later.

After executing step S400, the main CPU 110m performs payout control processing (S500). In the payout control process, the main CPU 110m refers to the general winning prize ball counter, the first start prize ball counter, and the second start prize ball counter in the main RAM 110c, and pays out the number of game balls indicated by each counter. is generated, and this command is transmitted to the payout control board 130. When the payout control board 130 receives the payout quantity designation command, it controls the payout motor 131 of the payout device to pay out game balls.

After executing step S500, the main CPU 110m performs data generation processing (S600). In the data generation process, the main CPU 110m generates data for external output, starting opening/closing solenoid data, first large winning opening opening/closing solenoid data, second large winning opening opening/closing solenoid data, special symbol display device data, and normal symbol display device data. Generate.

After executing step S600, the main CPU 110m performs output control processing (S700). In the output control process, the main CPU 110m outputs signals for the external output data created in the data generation process of step S600, the starting opening opening/closing solenoid data, the first big winning opening opening/closing solenoid data, and the second big winning opening opening/closing solenoid data. Performs port output processing to In addition, in order to light up the LEDs of the first special symbol display device 20, the second special symbol display device 21, and the normal symbol display device 22, the special symbol display device data created in the data generation process of S600 and the normal symbol Display device output processing for outputting display device data is performed. Further, a command transmission process for transmitting a command set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c to the effect control section 120m is also performed.

After executing step S700, the main CPU 110m restores the information saved in the stack area in step S100 to the register of the main CPU 110m (S800).

FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing details of the input control process. In FIG. 37, the main CPU 110m performs the input processing of the general winning hole detection switch 12a (S210). In the general winning hole detection switch 12a input process, the main CPU 110m determines whether or not a detection signal has been input from the general winning hole detection switch 12a. If the detection signal is not input, the process proceeds directly to step S220. When the detection signal is input, a predetermined number (for example, 10) is added to the general winning hole prize ball counter in the main RAM 110c and updated.

After executing step S210, the main CPU 110m performs a big winning opening detection switch input process (S220). In the big winning hole detecting switch input process, the main CPU 110m determines whether or not a detection signal has been input from the first big winning hole detecting switch 16a or the second big winning hole detecting switch 17a. The main CPU 110m directly proceeds to step S230 when there is no detection signal input from either the first big winning hole detection switch 16a or the second big winning hole detection switch 17a. When a detection signal is input from the first big winning hole detection switch 16a or the second big winning hole detection switch 17a, a predetermined number (for example, 15) is added to the big winning hole prize ball counter in the main RAM 110c. , and the number of balls entering the big prize (C) in the number of balls entering the big prize (C) storage area in the main RAM 110c is incremented by 1 and updated.

After executing step S220, the main CPU 110m performs a first starting port detection switch input process (S230). In the first starting port detection switch input process, the main CPU 110m determines whether or not a detection signal has been input from the first starting port detection switch 14a. The main CPU 110m directly proceeds to step S240 when the detection signal is not input from the first start opening detection switch 14a. When there is an input of a detection signal from the first starting port detection switch 14a, updating of the prize ball counter, determination of whether the number of first special symbol reservations (U1) is less than 4, and first special symbol reservation Updating the first special symbol reservation number (U1) when the number (U1) is less than 4, storing a random number in the special symbol reservation storage area, prior determination of the jackpot lottery and start prize designation according to the determination result A series of processing such as setting of commands, setting of special symbol reserved number designation commands according to the first special symbol reserved number (U1), and the like are performed. The details of the procedure for inputting the first starting port detection switch will be described later.

After executing step S230, the main CPU 110m performs a second start opening detection switch input process (S240). In the second starting port detection switch input process, the main CPU 110m determines whether or not a detection signal has been input from the second starting port detection switch 15a. The main CPU 110m directly proceeds to step S250 when the detection signal is not input from the second start opening detection switch 15a. When there is an input of a detection signal from the second starting port detection switch 15a, updating of the prize ball counter, determination of whether the second special symbol reservation number (U2) is less than 4, second special symbol reservation Updating the second special symbol reservation number (U2) when the number (U2) is less than 4, storing a random number in the special symbol reservation storage area, prior determination of the jackpot lottery and start prize designation according to the determination result A series of processing such as command setting, setting of special symbol reservation number designation command according to the reservation number (U2) in the second special symbol reservation number (U2), etc. is performed. The procedure of the second starting opening detection switch input process and the procedure of the first starting opening detection switch input process are the same except for the difference in the data write destination.

Next, the main CPU 110m performs gate detection switch input processing (S250). In the gate detection switch input process, the main CPU 110m determines whether or not a detection signal has been input from the gate detection switch 13a. The main CPU 110m ends the current input control process as it is when there is no input of the detection signal from the gate detection switch 13a. When a detection signal is input from the gate detection switch 13a, the main CPU 110m generates a gate passage designation command, and sets the generated gate passage designation command in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. Also, in this case, the main CPU 110m determines whether or not the count value (G) of the normal symbol reserved number counter that counts the normal symbol reserved number (G) is less than four. Then, when the count value (G) of the normal design holding number counter is less than 4, the count value (G) is updated by +1, the normal design random number value is acquired, and the normal design random value value obtained is normal. It is stored in the design reservation storage area.

FIG. 38 is a flow chart showing the details of the first starting port detection switch input process. In FIG. 38, the main CPU 110m advances to step S230-2 when a detection signal is input from the first starting port detection switch 14a (S230-1: Yes). If there is no detection signal input from the first starting port detection switch 14a (S230-1: No), the current first starting port detection switch input processing is terminated.

In step S230-2, the main CPU 110m adds a predetermined number (for example, three) to the starting ball counter and updates it (S230-2). After that, the main CPU 110m determines whether or not the count value (U1) of the first special symbol reserved number counter that counts the first special symbol reserved number (U1) is less than 4 (S230-3).

When the count value (U1) of the first special symbol reserved number counter is not less than 4 (S230-3: No), the main CPU 110m terminates the current first starting opening detection switch input process. Also, when the count value (U1) of the first special symbol reserved number counter is less than 4 (S230-3: Yes), the count value (U1) is incremented by 1 and updated (S230-4).

After step S230-4 is executed, the main CPU 110m acquires the jackpot random number value, and also stores the data in the first to fourth storage sections of the first special symbol reservation storage area of the special symbol reservation storage area, and the number is the highest. A small storage unit is used as a data storage destination, and the obtained jackpot random number value is stored in the data storage destination storage unit (S230-5).

FIG. 39(a) is a diagram showing a special symbol reservation storage area. As shown in FIG. 39(a), the special symbol reservation storage area includes the 0th storage unit corresponding to the variation, the first special symbol reservation storage area corresponding to the reservation of the first special symbol, and the second special symbol. It has a second special symbol reservation storage area corresponding to reservation. Each of the first special symbol reservation storage area and the second special symbol reservation storage area includes a first storage section corresponding to the first reservation, a second storage section corresponding to the second reservation, and a third storage corresponding to the third reservation. and a fourth storage corresponding to the fourth reserve. As shown in FIG. 39(b), each storage unit in the special symbol holding storage unit stores a set of a jackpot random number, a special symbol random number, a reach determination random number, and a special figure fluctuation random number. It has become.

After executing step S230-5, the main CPU 110m acquires the special symbol random number value, and stores the acquired special symbol random number value in the storage section of the data storage destination in the first special symbol reservation storage area (S230-6). .

After executing step S230-6, the main CPU 110m acquires the random number for special figure fluctuation and the random number for reach determination, and stores the acquired random number for special figure fluctuation and the random number for reach judgment as the first special symbol reservation storage area. (S230-7).

After executing step S230-7, the main CPU 110m performs preliminary determination processing (S230-8). In this pre-determination process, the main CPU 110m refers to the pre-determination table of the main ROM 110b. 1 special time-saving game flag storage area, and whether or not the flag of the second special time-saving game flag storage area is set, and the jackpot random value stored in the storage unit of the first special symbol holding storage area in steps S230-5 to S230-7 , special symbol random number, reach determination random number, and special symbol variation random number, winning information of a jackpot lottery triggered by establishment of the starting condition of the first special symbol is determined.

FIG. 40 is a diagram showing a pre-determination table for pre-determining the result of the jackpot lottery. The pre-judgment table includes a jackpot random number value, a special symbol random number value, a game state (time-saving game state, non-time-saving game state, first special time-saving game state, or second special time-saving game state), random value for reach determination, A set of special figure fluctuation random number, winning information, and start winning designation command refers to when the starting condition of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 20 is satisfied and the second special symbol display device 21 It is stored separately from one to be referred to when the starting condition of the second special symbol in is satisfied.

After executing step S230-8, the main CPU 110m generates a starting winning designation command corresponding to the winning information determined in the preliminary determination processing of step S230-8, and sets this starting winning designation command in the effect transmission data storage area. (S230-9). Thereafter, the main CPU 110m refers to the count value (U1) of the first special symbol reserved number counter, generates a special symbol reserved number designation command indicating the first special symbol reserved number (U1), and designates this special symbol reserved number. A command is set in the effect transmission data storage area (S230-10).

The start winning designation command and the special symbol reservation number designation command set in the performance transmission data storage area are transmitted to the performance control section 120m in the output control processing (S700) of the timer interrupt processing.

Here, the procedure of the second starting port detection switch input process (S240) is that the reference destination of the number of reservations in steps S230-3 and S230-4 is the second special design reservation number counter, steps S230-5 to S230 The storage destination of the random number in -7 is the second special symbol reservation storage area, the reference destination of the random number in step S230-8 is the second special symbol reservation storage area, and the number of reservations in step S230-10 is the same as that of the first starting opening detection switch input process (S230) except that the reference destination of is the second special symbol reservation number counter.

FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing details of the special figure special electric control process. In FIG. 41, the main CPU 110m loads the special figure special electric processing data (S301). In the next step S302, the main CPU 110m refers to the branch address from the loaded special-symbol processing data, and if the special-symbol processing data = 0, the processing is shifted to the special symbol storage determination processing (step S310), If the figure special electric processing data = 1, the process is moved to the special symbol variation processing (step S320), and if the special figure special electric processing data = 2, the processing is moved to the special symbol stop processing (step S330), and the special symbol special electric processing data If =3, the process is shifted to the jackpot game process (step S340), and if the special figure special electric process data=4, the process is shifted to the jackpot game end process (step S350).

FIG. 42 is a flow chart showing the details of the special symbol memory determination process. In FIG. 42, the main CPU 110m determines whether or not the special symbols are being variably displayed (S310-1). More specifically, the main CPU 110m refers to the special symbol time counter in the main RAM 110c, and if the special symbol time counter is not 0, it determines that the special symbol is being variably displayed, and the special symbol time counter is 0. If so, it is determined that the special symbols are not displayed in a variable manner. The main CPU 110m terminates the current special symbol memory determination process when the special symbol is being variably displayed (S310-1: Yes). Also, if the special symbols are not displayed in a variable manner (S310-1: No), the process proceeds to step S310-2.

In step S310-2, the main CPU 110m refers to the count value (U2) of the second special symbol reserved number counter of the main RAM 110c, and determines whether the second special symbol reserved number (U2) is greater than zero. When the second special symbol reserved number (U2) is greater than 0 (S310-2: Yes), the main CPU 110m updates the count value (U2) of the second special symbol reserved number counter by -1 (S310-3 ). Here, the gaming machine 1 is a model that preferentially digests the holding of the variation of the second special symbol over the holding of the variation of the first special symbol. In the gaming machine 1 of such a model, during the time saving game state, even if the start condition of the first special symbol is satisfied, the prior determination is not performed.

When the count value (U2) of the second special symbol reserved number counter is not 1 or more (S310-2: No), the main CPU 110m refers to the count value (U1) of the first special symbol reserved number counter and It is determined whether the number of reserved symbols (U1) is greater than 0 (S310-4).

When the first special symbol reserved number (U1) is not equal to or greater than 1 (S310-4: No), the main CPU 110m terminates the current special symbol storage determination process.

When the first special symbol reserved number (U1) is greater than 0 (S310-4: Yes), the main CPU 110m updates the count value (U1) of the first special symbol reserved number counter by -1 (S310-6 ). After executing step S310-3 or S310-6, the main CPU 110m performs storage area shift processing (S310-7). In this storage area shift process, the main CPU 110m selects the one of the first special symbol reservation storage area and the second special symbol reservation storage area that corresponds to the symbol from which the number of reservations is subtracted in step S310-3 or S310-6. The following processing is performed as a processing target.

When the count value (U2) of the second special symbol reserved number counter is subtracted in step S310-3, the main CPU 110m changes the data in the second to fourth storage units of the second special symbol reserved storage area to 1 each. Then, the data in the first storage section of the second special symbol reservation storage area is written in the 0th storage section which is the determination storage area. By writing data to the 0th storage unit, the random numbers stored in the 0th storage unit until then (random numbers for big hits, random numbers for special patterns, random numbers for reach determination, random numbers for special figure fluctuations) are erased. be done.

In addition, when the main CPU 110m subtracts the count value (U1) of the first special symbol reserved number counter in step S310-6, the data in the second to fourth storage units of the first special symbol reserved storage area are , and the data in the first storage section of the first special symbol reservation storage area is written in the 0th storage section. By writing data to the 0th storage unit, the random numbers stored in the 0th storage unit until then (random numbers for big hits, random numbers for special patterns, random numbers for reach determination, random numbers for special figure fluctuations) are erased. be done.

After executing step S310-7, the main CPU 110m generates a special symbol reserved number specification command for notifying the effect control unit 120m of the first special symbol reserved number (U1) and the second special symbol reserved number (U2). , this special symbol reserved number designation command is set in the effect transmission data storage area (S310-8).

After executing step S310-8, the main CPU 110m performs a jackpot determination process (S311). In this jackpot determination process, the main CPU 110m determines the lottery result (jackpot or lose) of the jackpot lottery triggered by the establishment of the current starting condition, determines the type of jackpot if the jackpot is a jackpot, and determines the jackpot that has been decided. A pattern designation command for a jackpot corresponding to the type of the game is generated and set in a performance transmission data storage area. In the case of a loss, a design designation command for loss is generated and set in the effect transmission data storage area.

More specifically, in this big win determination process, the main CPU 110m determines whether the result of the big win lottery triggered by the establishment of the current start condition is a big win, as shown in FIG. (S311-1). Specifically, the main CPU 110m refers to the big hit lottery determination table of the main ROM 110b, and determines whether or not the flag in the high-probability game flag storage area is set at the time of execution of this step S311-1. A lottery result is determined based on the combination with the jackpot random number value stored in the part.

FIG. 43(a) is a diagram showing a jackpot lottery determination table for the first special symbol display device. FIG.43(b) is a figure which shows the jackpot lottery determination table for 2nd special design display devices. In the jackpot lottery judgment table, the combination of the jackpot random number and the lottery result of the jackpot lottery (jackpot, special loss, or normal loss) is referred to in the low-probability game state and in the high-probability game state. stored separately.

The number of the jackpot random numbers that cause a jackpot in a low-probability game state and the jackpot random numbers that cause a jackpot in a high-probability game state in a jackpot lottery determination table for a first special pattern display device and a jackpot lottery determination table for a second special pattern display device. Comparing the number of numerical values, the jackpot random numbers are 100-299 in the low probability game state, while the jackpot random numbers are 100-1099 in the high probability game state. The random number range of the jackpot random number is 0-60,000. Therefore, the probability of winning the jackpot in the low-probability game state is 1/300, and the probability of winning the jackpot in the high-probability game state is increased five times to 1/60.

In addition, in the jackpot lottery determination table for the first special symbol display device, the jackpot random number value for the special loss in the low probability game state is 2000 to 2099, and the jackpot random value for the special loss in the high probability game state is not even one. None. In the jackpot lottery determination table for the second special symbol display device, there is no jackpot random value for special loss in both the low-probability game state and the high-probability game state. Therefore, during the low-probability game state, the special loss is won with a probability lower than the winning probability of the jackpot, but the special loss is not won during the high-probability game state.

If the determination result of step S311-1 is a big hit (S311-1: Yes), the main CPU 110m proceeds to step S311-2. S311-1: No), proceed to step S311-5.

In step S311-2, the main CPU 110m performs a jackpot symbol determination process. In this jackpot symbol determination process, the main CPU 110m refers to the jackpot symbol determination table of the main ROM 110b, and stops the variable stop symbol based on the special symbol random number value stored in the 0th storage unit in step S310-8. The symbol data is determined, and the determined stop symbol data is stored in the stop symbol data storage area in the main RAM 110c. Here, the stop symbol data indicates a two-digit number corresponding to the type of the special symbol to be stopped and displayed through variation.

FIG. 45(a) is a diagram showing a jackpot symbol determination table. In the jackpot symbol determination table, a combination of a special symbol random number value, a special symbol type (a jackpot type), stop symbol data, and a symbol designation command is a starting condition for the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 20. are stored separately into those to be referred to when is established and those to be referred to when the starting condition of the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 21 is established.

The effect symbol designation command is a command for notifying the effect control unit 120m of the type of special symbol to be stopped and displayed through variation.

The stop symbol data stored in the stop symbol data storage area in this step S311-2 is used when judging the jackpot symbol in the special symbol stop process, when determining the operation mode of the big winning opening in the jackpot game process, and in the jackpot game end process. It is referred to when determining the game state. Details will be described later.

Next, the main CPU 110m generates a symbol designating command for a big win corresponding to the stop symbol data determined in step S311-2, and sets this design designating command in the effect transmission data storage area (S311-3).

Next, the main CPU 110m presents (jackpot The game state at the time of lottery) is obtained, and the game state information indicating the obtained game state is stored in the game state buffer (S311-4).

In step S311-5, the main CPU 110m performs a losing symbol determination process. In this losing symbol determination process, the main CPU 110m refers to the losing symbol determination table of the main ROM 110b to determine stop symbol data of a losing stop symbol, and stores the determined stop symbol data in the stop symbol data storage area.

FIG. 45(b) is a diagram showing a special losing symbol determination table. FIG. 45(c) is a diagram showing a normal losing symbol determination table. In the special losing symbol determination table and the normal losing symbol determination table, sets of special symbol types, stop symbol data, and symbol designation commands are stored.

Next, the main CPU 110m generates a losing symbol designation command corresponding to the stop symbol data determined in step S311-5, and sets this symbol designation command in the effect transmission data storage area (S311-6).

Returning to the description of FIG. After executing the big hit determination process (S311), the main CPU 110m performs a variation pattern determination process (S312). In the variation pattern determination process, the main CPU 110m refers to the variation pattern determination table of the main ROM 110b, the lottery result of the jackpot lottery in step S311-1 (big hit or lose), the time saving game flag storage area at the time of execution of this step S312 Presence or absence of flag set, step S310-3 or step S310-6 after update pending number (U2) or (U1), step S310-7 jackpot random value stored in the 0th storage unit, random value for reach determination , and based on the combination of random numbers for special figure fluctuation, the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation is determined.

There are two types of variation pattern determination tables, one to be referred to when the first special symbol is varied and the other to be referred to when the second special symbol is varied. FIG. 46 is a diagram showing a variation pattern determination table referred to when the first special symbol is varied. FIG. 47 is a diagram showing a variation pattern determination table referred to when the second special symbol is varied.

The special symbol variation pattern determination table includes the type of special symbol (type of jackpot), game state (time saving game state or non-time saving game state, first special time saving game state, second special time saving game state), hold Number, random number for reach determination, random number for special figure variation, type of variation pattern of special symbol, variation time, and a set of variation start command are stored. The variation start command is a command for notifying the effect control section 120m of the type of variation pattern.

In the special symbol variation pattern determination table, when the result of the jackpot lottery is a big win, a variation pattern with a long variation time is likely to be selected. Conversely, in the special symbol variation pattern determination table, when the result of the big winning lottery is a loss, a variation pattern with a short variation time is likely to be selected.

For example, variation patterns 12, 13, 14, and 15 are available as variation pattern options corresponding to the special symbol 01 (per 16R probability variation) in the first special symbol variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. The variation time of variation pattern 12 is T12 (for example, T12=20000 ms). The variation time of variation pattern 13 is T13 (T13=30000 ms). The variation time of variation pattern 14 is T14 (T14=40000 ms). The variation time of variation pattern 15 is T15 (T15=60000 ms). The magnitude relation of the selectivity of the variation patterns 12, 13, 14, and 15 is: variation pattern 12<variation pattern 13<variation pattern 14<variation pattern 15.

Variation patterns 22, 23, 24, and 25 are available as variation pattern options corresponding to the special symbol 02 (per 8R probability variation) in the first special symbol variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. The variation time of variation pattern 22 is T12 (20000 ms). The variation time of variation pattern 23 is T13 (30000 ms). The variation time of variation pattern 24 is T14 (40000 ms). The variation time of variation pattern 25 is T15 (60000 ms). The magnitude relation of the selectivity of the variation patterns 22, 23, 24, and 25 is: variation pattern 22<variation pattern 23<variation pattern 24<variation pattern 25. FIG.

Variation patterns 32, 33, 34, and 35 are available as variation pattern options corresponding to the special symbol 03 (8R normal win) in the first special symbol variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. The variation time of variation pattern 32 is T12 (20000 ms). The variation time of variation pattern 33 is T13 (30000 ms). The variation time of variation pattern 34 is T14 (40000 ms). The variation time of variation pattern 35 is T15 (60000 ms). The magnitude relation of the selectivity of the variation patterns 32, 33, 34, and 35 is: variation pattern 32<variation pattern 33<variation pattern 34<variation pattern 35. FIG.

There is a variation pattern 11 as a variation pattern option corresponding to the special symbol 04 (per 2R probability variation) in the variation pattern determination table of the first special symbol shown in FIG. The variation time of variation pattern 11 is T11 (for example, T11=18000 ms).

There is a variation pattern 91 in the option of the variation pattern corresponding to the special symbol 20 (special loss) in the variation pattern determination table of the first special symbol shown in FIG. The variation time of variation pattern 91 is the same length T11 (18000 ms) as that of variation pattern 11. FIG.

In the variation pattern determination table of the first special symbol shown in FIG. 46, special symbol 00 (normal loss), non-time-saving gaming state, number of reservations 0 to 2, no reach (random value for reach determination is "0 to 69") There is a variation pattern 59 as a variation pattern option corresponding to the combination. The variation time of the variation pattern 59 is T9 (for example, T9=6000 ms).

In the variation pattern determination table of the first special symbol shown in FIG. 47, special symbol 00 (normal loss), non-time-saving gaming state, number of reservations 0 to 2, reach (random value for reach determination is "70 to 99") Variation patterns 60 , 61 , 62 , 63 , 64 , and 65 are among the variation pattern options corresponding to combinations. The variation time of the variation pattern 60 is T10 (for example, T10=10000ms). The variation time of variation pattern 61 is the same length T11 (18000 ms) as that of variation pattern 11. FIG. The variation time of variation pattern 62 is the same length T12 (20000 ms) as that of variation pattern 12. FIG. The variation time of variation pattern 63 is the same length T13 (30000 ms) as that of variation pattern 13 . The variation time of variation pattern 64 is the same length T14 (40000 ms) as that of variation pattern 14 . The variation time of variation pattern 65 is the same length T15 (60000 ms) as that of variation pattern 15 . The magnitude relation of the selectivity of the variation patterns 60, 61, 62, 63, 64, and 65 is: variation pattern 60>variation pattern 61>variation pattern 62>variation pattern 63>variation pattern 64>variation pattern 65.

In the variation pattern determination table of the first special symbol shown in FIG. 47, special symbol 00 (normal loss), non-time-saving gaming state, number of reservations 3-4, no reach (random value for reach determination is "0-89") There is a variation pattern 58 as a variation pattern option corresponding to the combination. The variation time of variation pattern 58 is T8 (for example, T8=3000 ms) shorter than that of variation pattern 59. FIG.

In the first special symbol variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 47, a combination of special symbol 00 (normal loss), time-saving gaming state, number of reservations 0 to 2, reach (random value for reach determination is "70 to 99") There are variation patterns 60 , 61 , 62 , 63 , 64 , and 65 as variation pattern options corresponding to . The magnitude relation of the selectivity of the variation patterns 60, 61, 62, 63, 64, and 65 is: variation pattern 60>variation pattern 61>variation pattern 62>variation pattern 63>variation pattern 64>variation pattern 65.

Here, when comparing the special symbol variation pattern determination table of FIGS. 46 and 47 with the previously shown pre-determination table (FIG. 40), the pre-determination table shows that the number of pending changes in the first special symbol (U1 ) or the number of pending changes in the second special symbol (U2), the pertinent data in the table can be searched. On the other hand, in the variation pattern determination table, when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is a loss, the number of suspensions of variation of the first special symbol (U1) and the number of suspensions of variation of the second special symbol (U2) are not referred to. It is designed so that the corresponding data in the table cannot be searched for as long as possible. Therefore, in the preliminary determination table, although it is possible to determine the type of production to be developed after the ready-to-win production, it is not possible to distinguish between "normal fluctuation" and "shortening fluctuation".

In FIG. 42, the main CPU 110m generates a variation start command corresponding to the variation pattern determined in step S312, and sets this variation start command in the performance transmission data storage area (S313).

Next, the main CPU 110m is the current game based on whether or not the flag is set in the high probability game flag storage area, the time saving game flag storage area, the first special time saving game flag storage area, and the second special time saving game flag storage area. A state is obtained, a game state designation command corresponding to the obtained game state is generated, and this game state designation command is set in the performance transmission data storage area (S314).

Next, the main CPU 110m performs processing for starting variable display of special symbols (S315). Specifically, the main CPU 110m stores variable display data for causing the first special symbol display device 20 or the second special symbol display device 21 to perform variable display (blinking of LEDs) of special symbols in a predetermined processing area. set. When the variable display data is set in the predetermined processing area, the data for turning on or off the LED is created in step S600, and the created data is output in the output control process in step S700, whereby the first special The variable display of the symbol display device 20 or the second special symbol display device 21 is performed.

Next, the main CPU 110m sets the variation time based on the variation pattern determined in step S312 to the special symbol time counter (S316). The special symbol time counter is decremented every 4 milliseconds in step S110.

Next, the main CPU 110m sets the special symbol special electric processing data=1 (S317), and terminates the current special symbol storage determination processing. In the subsequent special figure special electric control process, the process moves to the special symbol variation process in step S302, and the special symbol variation process is performed.

FIG. 48 is a flow chart showing the details of the special symbol variation process. In FIG. 48, the main CPU 110m determines whether or not the special symbol variation time has elapsed (S320-1). Specifically, the main CPU 110m refers to the special symbol time counter set in step S316, and if the special symbol time counter is 0, it determines that the special symbol fluctuation time has passed, and if the special symbol time counter is 0, If not, it is determined that the special symbol variation time has not yet passed. If the main CPU 110m determines that the special symbol variation time has elapsed (S320-1: Yes), it proceeds to step S320-2, and if it determines that the special symbol variation time has not elapsed (S320-1: No), end the special symbol variation process this time, and execute the next subroutine.

In step S320-2, the main CPU 110m performs processing for stopping the variable display of the special symbols. Specifically, the main CPU 110m clears the variable display data set in step S315, and displays the special symbols set in step S311-2 or S311-5 on the first special symbol display device 20 or the first special symbol display device 20. 2 Stop design data for stop display on the special design display device 21 is set in a predetermined processing area (S320-2). As a result, the special symbols are stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 20 or the second special symbol display device 21 .

Next, the main CPU 110m sets a pattern confirmation command in the effect transmission data storage area (S320-3).

Next, the main CPU 110m sets the symbol stop time (0.5 seconds=125 counters) in the special symbol time counter (S320-4). The special symbol time counter is subtracted every 4 milliseconds in step S110.

Next, the main CPU 110m sets the special symbol special electric processing data to 2 (S320-5), and terminates the current special symbol variation processing. In the special symbol special electric control process after this, the process moves to the special symbol stop process in step S302, and the special symbol stop process is performed.

FIG. 49 is a flow chart showing details of the special symbol stop processing. In FIG. 49, the main CPU 110m determines whether or not the special symbol stop time has elapsed (S330-1). Specifically, the main CPU 110m refers to the special symbol time counter set in step S320-4, and determines that the special symbol stop time has passed if the special symbol time counter is 0, and the special symbol time counter If it is not 0, it is determined that the special symbol stop time has not yet passed. If the main CPU 110m determines that the special symbol stop time has passed (S330-1: Yes), it proceeds to step S330-2, and if it determines that the special symbol stop time has not passed (S330-1: No), go to step S330-24.

In step S330-2, the main CPU 110m confirms whether a high probability game flag is set in the high probability game flag storage area. If the high-probability game flag is not set (S330-2: No), the main CPU 110m proceeds to step S330-3, and if the high-probability game flag is set (S330-2: Yes), step S330- Proceed to 4.

In step S330-3, the main CPU 110m updates the change count (K) in the change count (K) storage area by +1, and proceeds to step S330-4. In step S330-4, the main CPU 110m confirms whether the time saving game flag is set in the time saving game flag storage area. When the time saving game flag is set (S330-4: No), the main CPU 110m proceeds to step S330-5. When the time saving game flag is not set (S330-4: No), it advances to step S330-8.

In step S330-5, the main CPU 110m updates the non-zero times (J), the first special times (J1), and the second special times (J2) by -1. In the next step S350-6, the main CPU 110m confirms whether any of the number of times of reduced working hours (J), the first number of reduced hours of work (J1), and the second number of reduced hours of working hours (J2) has become 0. The main CPU 110m proceeds to step S330-7 if there is a time saving count that has reached 0 (S350-6: Yes), and if there is no time saving count that has reached 0 (S350-6: No), proceeds to step S330-8. move on.

In step S330-7, the main CPU 110m clears the flag corresponding to the number of times of time reduction that has become 0. Specifically, the main CPU 110m clears the time-saving game flag in the time-saving game flag storage area if the time-saving number of times (J) has become 0, and the first special time-saving number of times (J1) has become 0. If there is, clear the first special time-saving game flag of the first special time-saving game flag storage area, and if the second special time-saving number of times (J2) becomes 0, the second special time-saving game flag storage area Clear the special time-saving game flag.

In step S330-8, the main CPU 110m determines whether or not the stop symbol data in the stop symbol data storage area is a jackpot. If the stop symbol data in the stop symbol data storage area is a jackpot (S330-8: Yes), proceed to step S330-9, and if not (S330-8: No), proceed to step S330-16. move on.

In step S330-9, the main CPU 110m clears the flags of the high probability game flag storage area, the time saving game flag storage area, the first special time saving game flag storage area, and the second special time saving game flag storage area.

In step S330-10, the main CPU 110m resets the high probability game count (X), the time saving count (J), the first special time saving count (J1), and the second special time saving count (J2). In the next step S330-11, the main CPU 110m resets the variation number (K) counter.

In step S330-12, the main CPU 110m performs a jackpot start preparation setting process. In the jackpot start preparation setting process, the main CPU 110m refers to the special game control table of the main ROM 110b, and based on the stop symbol data in the stop symbol data storage area, the large winning opening opening/closing control table for 16R wins and the big win opening/closing control table for 8R wins. A reference destination of the winning opening opening/closing control table and the big winning opening opening/closing control table for 2R win is determined.

Figure 50 is a diagram showing a special game control table. FIG. 51(a) is a diagram showing a large winning opening opening/closing control table for 16R. FIG. 51(b) is a diagram showing a big winning opening opening/closing control table for 8R winning. FIG. 51(c) is a diagram showing a large winning opening opening/closing control table for 2R winning.

The special game control table stores a set of stop symbol data, opening time, table number of the large winning opening opening/closing control table to be referred to, and ending time for each type of jackpot. Here, the table number of the big winning opening opening/closing control table for the 16R win is 01, the table number of the big winning opening opening/closing control table for the 8R win is 02, and the table number of the big winning opening opening/closing control table for the 2R win is 03.

The 16R winning big winning opening/closing control table stores data indicating the opening time and closing time of the 1st to 16th rounds of the 16R and the type of the big winning opening to be opened. The 8R winning big winning opening opening/closing control table stores data indicating the opening time and closing time of the 1st to 8th rounds for 8R and the type of the big winning opening to be opened. The 2R winning big winning opening/closing control table stores data indicating opening times and closing times of the first and second rounds for each 2R, and types of big winning openings to be opened.

The main CPU 110m determines the type of the jackpot based on the big winning opening opening/closing control table determined in step S330-12, generates an opening designation command according to the type of the jackpot, and converts the opening designation command into the effect transmission data. It is set in the storage area (S330-13).

Next, the main CPU 110m determines the start interval time according to the type of the jackpot based on the big winning opening opening/closing control table determined in step S330-12, and sets the start interval time in the special symbol time counter ( S330-14), and proceeds to step S330-15.

In step S330-15, the main CPU 110m sets the special figure special electric processing data to 3, and proceeds to step S330-24.

In step S330-16, the main CPU 110m determines whether or not the stop symbol data in the stop symbol data storage area is special losing. The main CPU 110m proceeds to step S330-17 if the stop symbol data in the stop symbol data storage area is a special losing one (S330-16: Yes), and if it is a normal losing one (S330-16: No). ) and proceed to step S330-19.

In step S330-17, the main CPU 110m sets the first special time saving flag in the first special time saving game flag storage area. In step S330-18, the main CPU 110m sets 200 times to the first special time reduction frequency (J1).

In step S330-19, the main CPU 110m determines whether or not the number of times of variation (K) has reached 800 times, which is the specified number of times. If the number of fluctuations (K) has reached the specified number (S330-19: Yes), the main CPU 110m proceeds to step S330-20; ) and proceed to step S330-22.

In step S330-20, the main CPU 110m sets the second special time saving flag in the second special time saving game flag storage area. In step S330-21, the main CPU 110m sets 600 times to the second special time saving frequency (J2).

In step S330-19, the main CPU 110m generates a time saving number designation command indicating the number of times of working hours (J), the first special number of times of working hours (J1), and the second special number of times of working hours (J2), and issues this time saving number of times designation command. Set in the performance transmission data storage area. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S330-24.

In step S330-24, the main CPU 110m is based on whether or not flags are set in the high probability game flag storage area, the time saving game flag storage area, the first special time saving game flag storage area, and the second special time saving game flag storage area. A current game state is obtained, a game state designation command corresponding to the obtained game state is generated, this game state designation command is set in a performance transmission data storage area, and the current special symbol stop processing is terminated. When 3 is set to special figure special electric processing data, in special figure special electric control processing after this, processing moves to special design memory decision processing in step S302, special design memory decision processing is done. When 0 is set in the special symbol electric processing data, in the subsequent special symbol electric control processing, the processing shifts to the special symbol storage determination processing in step S302, and the special symbol storage determination processing is performed.

FIG. 52 is a flow chart showing details of the jackpot game process. In FIG. 52, the main CPU 110m determines whether or not it is currently opening (S340-1). Specifically, the main CPU 110m refers to the number of rounds (R) in the number of rounds (R) storage area. is not 0, it is determined that the opening is not in progress. The main CPU 110m proceeds to step S340-2 when opening (S340-1: Yes), and proceeds to step S340-6 when not opening (S340-1: No).

In step S340-2, the main CPU 110m determines whether or not the start interval time has elapsed. Specifically, the main CPU 110m refers to the special symbol time counter set in step S330-14 of the special symbol stop processing, and if the special symbol time counter is 0, determines that the start interval time has elapsed, and determines that the special symbol time counter has passed. If the pattern time counter is not 0, it is determined that the start interval time has not yet passed. If the main CPU 110m determines that the start interval time has elapsed (S340-2: Yes), it proceeds to step S340-3, and if it determines that the start interval time has not yet elapsed (S340-2: No), The jackpot game processing of this time is terminated.

In step S340-3, the main CPU 110m performs a jackpot start setting process. In the jackpot start setting process, the main CPU 110m updates the number of rounds (R) in the number of rounds (R) storage area by +1. Here, when the start interval time has elapsed, no action has been performed yet, and the number of rounds (R) in the number of rounds (R) storage area is zero. Therefore, the number of rounds (R) after updating in step S340-3 is one.

After executing step S340-3, the main CPU 110m performs a special winning opening opening process (S340-4). In this big winning opening opening process, in order to open the first big winning opening opening/closing door 16b or the second big winning opening opening/closing door 17b, the first big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 16c or the second big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 17c is energized. Set the energization data to be used. Further, the main CPU 110m refers to the large winning opening/closing control table determined in step S330-12, and obtains the opening time of the first large winning opening 16 or the second large winning opening 17 in the current number of rounds (R). , This opening time is set in the special game timer counter.

After executing step S340-4, the main CPU 110m performs round start command transmission determination processing (S340-5). In the round start command transmission determination process, the main CPU 110m generates a round start command corresponding to the number of rounds (R) in the number of rounds (R) storage area, and sets this round start command in the effect transmission data storage area. , ends the jackpot game processing of this time.

In step S340-6, the main CPU 110m determines whether or not the game is currently ending. If the main CPU 110m determines that the ending is not in progress (S340-6: No), it proceeds to step S340-7, and if it determines that the ending is in progress (S340-6: Yes), it proceeds to step S340-18.

In step S340-7, the main CPU 110m determines whether or not the big winning opening is closed. Specifically, the main CPU 110m, if the power supply data (the power supply data for energizing the first big winning opening/closing solenoid 16c or the second big winning opening/closing solenoid 17c) is not set in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c, If it is determined that the winning opening is closed, and if the energization data is set in the predetermined area of the main RAM 110c, it is determined that the big winning opening is not closed. If the main CPU 110m is closed (S340-7: Yes), it proceeds to step S340-8, and if it is not closed (S340-7: No), it proceeds to step S340-9. .

In step S340-8, the main CPU 110m determines whether or not the closing time has elapsed. Here, the closing time is set to a special game timer counter in step S340-10, which will be described later. When the main CPU 110m determines that the closing time has passed (S340-8: Yes), it proceeds to the big winning gate opening process in step S340-4, and the big winning gate opening process and the subsequent round start command transmission determination process (S340 -5) is performed, and the current jackpot game processing is terminated. When the main CPU 110m determines that the closing time has not passed (S340-8: No), it terminates the big win game process of this time.

In step S340-9, the main CPU 110m determines whether or not a condition for ending the opening of the big winning opening is satisfied. Specifically, the main CPU 110m opens when the number of balls (C) entered into the big prize gate in the number of balls (C) stored in the big prize gate reaches a specified number (9) or when the opening time has passed. It is determined that the end condition is met. In addition, the main CPU 110m has determined that the number of balls (C) entered into the big prize gate in the number of balls (C) stored in the big prize gate has not reached the specified number (9) and the opening time has not passed. If so, it is determined that the opening end condition is not met. If the main CPU 110m determines that the opening end condition is satisfied (S340-9: Yes), it proceeds to step S340-10, and if it determines that the opening end condition is not satisfied (S340-9: No), this time end the jackpot game processing.

At step S340-10, the main CPU 110m performs a big winning opening closing process. In the big winning gate closing process, the main CPU 110m controls the first big winning gate opening/closing solenoid 16c or the second big winning gate opening/closing solenoid to close the first big winning gate opening/closing door 16b or the second big winning gate opening/closing door 17b. Stop the energization data for energizing 17c. Also, the main CPU 110m refers to the big winning hole opening/closing control table determined in step S330-12, and selects the first big winning hole 16 or the second big winning hole 17 based on the current number of rounds (R). Set the closing time in the special game timer counter. As a result, the big winning opening is closed.

After executing step S340-10, the main CPU 110m determines whether or not one round game has ended (S340-11). Specifically, the main CPU 110m starts one round game when the number of balls (C) entered into the big prize gate in the number of balls (C) stored in the big prize gate reaches a specified number (9). Determine that it is finished. In addition, the main CPU 110m terminates one round game when the number of balls (C) entered into the big prize gate in the number of balls (C) stored in the big prize gate does not reach the specified number (9). determine that it is not. If the main CPU 110m determines that one round game has ended (S340-11: Yes), it proceeds to step S340-12, and if it determines that one round game has not ended (S340-11: No), end the current jackpot game process.

In step S340-12, the main CPU 110m performs round data initialization processing. In the round data initialization process, the main CPU 110m resets the number of balls (C) entering the big winning opening in the storage area for the number of winning balls (C) to zero.

After executing step S340-12, the main CPU 110m determines that the number of rounds (R) in the number of rounds (R) storage area is the maximum value (specifically, number of rounds) is reached (S340-13).

When determining that the number of rounds (R) does not reach the maximum value (S340-13: No), the main CPU 110m updates the number of rounds (R) in the number of rounds (R) storage area by +1 (S340 -14), end the current jackpot game process.

If it is determined that the number of rounds (R) has reached the maximum value (S340-13: Yes), the main CPU 110m resets the number of rounds (R) in the number of rounds (R) storage area to 0 (S340- 15).

After executing step S340-15, the main CPU 110m determines the type of the jackpot based on the big winning gate opening/closing control table determined in step S330-12, generates an ending designation command corresponding to the type of jackpot, This ending designation command is set in the effect transmission data storage area (S340-16).

After executing step S340-16, the main CPU 110m determines the end interval time (for example, 2 seconds) according to the type of jackpot, and sets this end interval time to the special game timer counter (S340-17).

After executing step S340-17, or when it is determined that the ending is in progress in step S340-6 (S340-6: Yes), the main CPU 110m determines whether or not the end interval time has passed (S340- 18). Specifically, the main CPU 110m refers to the special game timer counter set in step S340-17, and determines that the end interval time has passed if the special game timer counter is 0, and if the special game timer counter is 0 If not, it is determined that the end interval time has not yet passed. When the main CPU 110m determines that the end interval time has not passed yet (S340-18: No), the main CPU 110m ends the big win game process.

When the main CPU 110m determines that the end interval time has elapsed (S340-18: Yes), it sets the special figure special electric processing data to 4 (S340-19), and terminates the current jackpot game processing. In the subsequent special figure special electric control process, the process shifts to the jackpot game end process in step S302, and the jackpot game end process is performed.

FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing the details of the jackpot game ending process. In FIG. 53, the main CPU 110m loads the stop symbol data set in the stop symbol data storage area in step S311-2 and the game information set in the game state buffer in step S311-4 (S350-1).

After executing step S350-1, the main CPU 110m performs high probability game flag setting processing (S350-2). In the high-probability game flag setting process, the main CPU 110m refers to the setting table at the end of the special game in the main ROM 110b, and based on the stop symbol data and the game information loaded in step S350-1, the high probability at the end of the special game. Determines whether or not to set the game flag.

FIG. 54 is a diagram showing a special game end time setting table. In the special game end setting table, stop pattern data, data indicating the necessity of the time saving game state, data indicating the number of time saving games, data indicating the necessity of the high probability game state, and data indicating the number of high probability games pairs are stored.

Specifically, in step S350-1, when the stop symbol data loaded in step S350-1 is "01-02, 04-06", a high probability game flag is set in the high probability game flag storage area. , If it is other "03, 07", the high probability game flag is not set in the high probability game flag storage area.

After executing step S350-2, the main CPU 110m performs a high-probability number-of-games setting process (S350-3). In the high-probability game state setting process, the main CPU 110m refers to the special game end setting table in the main ROM 110b, and based on the stop symbol data and game information loaded in step S350-1, the number of games ( X) Determine the number of remaining fluctuations (X) to be stored in the storage area.

Specifically, in step S350-2, if the stop symbol data loaded in step S350-1 is "01-02, 04-06", 10000 times is set in the number of games (X) storage area, Otherwise, if it is "03, 07", 0 is set in the number-of-games (X) storage area.

After executing step S350-3, the main CPU 110m performs a time saving game flag setting process (S350-4). In the time saving game flag setting process, the main CPU 110m refers to the special game end setting table in the main ROM 110b, and sets the time saving game flag at the end of the special game based on the stop symbol data and game information loaded in step S350-1. Decide whether or not to set

Specifically, in step S350-3, when the stop symbol data loaded in step S350-1 is "01 to 07", the time saving game flag is set in the time saving game flag storage area.

After executing step S350-4, the main CPU 110m performs a time reduction number setting process (S350-5). In the time saving number setting process, the main CPU 110m refers to the special game end setting table in the main ROM 110b, and based on the stop symbol data and game information loaded in step S350-1, the number of games (J) at the end of the special game. Determine the number of remaining fluctuations (J) to be stored in the storage area.

Specifically, in this step S350-4, when the stop symbol data loaded in step S350-1 is "01-02, 04-06", 10000 times is set in the number of games (J) storage area. , otherwise "03, 07", 100 times is set in the number of games (J) storage area.

After executing step S350-5, the main CPU 110m determines whether or not the flag is set in the high probability game flag storage area, the time saving game flag storage area, the first special time saving game flag storage area, and the second special time saving game flag storage area. Based on this, the current game state is obtained, a game state designation command corresponding to the current game state is generated, and this game state designation command is set in the performance transmission data storage area (S350-6).

After executing step S350-6, the main CPU 110m sets the special figure special electric processing data to 0 (S350-7), and ends the jackpot game end processing. In the subsequent special figure special electric control process, the process moves to the special symbol storage determination process in step S302, and the special symbol storage determination process is performed.

FIG. 55 is a flow chart showing the details of the normal/universal power control process. In FIG. 55, the main CPU 110m loads general/universal electric power processing data (S401). In the next step S402, the main CPU 110m refers to the branch address from the loaded special pattern special electric processing data. If the processing data = 1, the process is transferred to the normal pattern variation process, if the normal pattern normal electric process data = 2, the process is normally transferred to the pattern stop process, and if the normal pattern normal electric process data = 3, the auxiliary game process to process.

The outlines of the normal symbol storage determination process, normal symbol fluctuation process, normal symbol stop process, and auxiliary game process are as follows. In the normal symbol storage determination process (process of normal symbol general electrical processing data=0), the main CPU 110m determines whether or not the count value (G) of the normal symbol reservation number counter is greater than zero. When the count value (G) of the normal symbol reserved number counter is 0, the current normal symbol storage determination process is terminated. When the count value (G) of the normal design reservation number counter is greater than 0, after updating the count value (G) of the normal design reservation number counter by -1, the 2nd to 4th in the normal design reservation storage area The data in the storage unit is shifted to the previous storage unit, and the data in the first storage unit is written in the 0th storage unit. At this time, the normal symbol random number value already written in the 0th storage part of the normal symbol reservation storage area is erased. After that, the main CPU 110m refers to the normal symbol lottery determination table in the main ROM 110b, and based on the combination of whether or not the flag is set in the time saving game flag storage area and the normal symbol random number value in the 0th storage section of the normal symbol reservation storage area. Then, the lottery result (hit or lose) of the normal pattern lottery is determined, and the normal pattern fluctuation time (29 seconds in the non-time-saving game state, 0.2 seconds in the time-saving game state) according to the lottery result. decide.

FIG. 44(c) is a diagram showing a normal symbol lottery determination table. The normal symbol lottery determination table is stored in the main ROM 110 b of the main control board 10 . In the normal symbol lottery determination table, the combination of the normal symbol random number and the normal symbol lottery lottery result (hit or lose) refers to what is referred to when the non-time-saving game state and what is referred to when the time-saving game state. stored separately.

Comparing the number of normal symbol determination random numbers that will be hit in the non-time-saving game state in this normal symbol lottery determination table and the number of normal symbol determination random numbers that will be hit in the time-saving game state, the number of hits in the non-time-saving game state The random number for normal symbol determination and the random number for normal symbol determination in the time-saving game state are 65535 (0 to 65534) in common. The random number range of the normal symbol determination random number is 0-65535. Therefore, the winning probability in the non-time-saving gaming state and the winning probability in the time-saving gaming state are 65535/65536=1/1.00002.

After the lottery result of the normal symbol lottery is determined, the main CPU 110m sets the normal symbol variation time in the normal symbol time counter, starts the variation of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display device 22, and sets the normal symbol lottery processing data to 1. to set.

In the normal design variation processing (processing when the normal design general electrical processing data = 1), the main CPU 110m determines whether the normal design variation time has elapsed (whether the normal design time counter has reached 0), and determines whether the normal design variation When it is determined that the time has not passed, the normal symbol variation processing of this time is terminated. When it is determined that the normal symbol fluctuation time has elapsed, the normal symbol of the normal symbol display device 22 is stopped and displayed in a symbol corresponding to the result of the normal symbol lottery, and a predetermined normal symbol stop time is set in the normal symbol time counter, 2 is set in the figure general electricity processing data.

In the normal design stop processing (processing when the normal design general electric processing data = 2), the main CPU 110m determines whether the normal design stop time has elapsed (whether the normal design time counter has reached 0), and stops the normal design. If it is determined that the time has not passed, the current normal symbol stop processing is terminated. When it is determined that the normal design stop time has passed, it is determined whether or not the stopped design of the normal design display device 22 was a winning design. When the stop pattern of the normal pattern display device 22 is not a winning pattern, 0 is set to the normal pattern general electric processing data, and when the stop pattern of the normal pattern display device 22 is a winning pattern, the normal pattern 3 is set in the normal electric processing data.

In the auxiliary game process (process when normal figure/general power processing data = 3), the main CPU 110m determines the opening time of the second start port 15 (0.2 seconds if it is a non-time-saving game state, if it is a time-saving game state 3.5 seconds) is determined, the second starting port 15 is opened over this opening time, and then the second starting port 15 is closed, and 0 is set to the normal/normal power processing data.

FIG. 56 is a flow chart showing the main processing of the effect control section 120m of the gaming machine 1. As shown in FIG. The main process is started when a system reset is generated from the power board 170 to the sub CPU 120a of the effect control section 120m by the activation operation.

In FIG. 56, the sub CPU 120a performs initialization processing (S1000). In the initialization process, the sub CPU 120a reads the startup program from the sub ROM 120b and initializes various flags in the sub RAM 120c when the power is turned on. After completing the initialization process, the sub CPU 120a repeats the process (S1100) for updating the random number values 1 to 6 for effect. In addition to this random number updating process, the sub CPU 120a executes timer interrupt processing each time the reset clock pulse signal is generated by the reset clock pulse generation circuit.

FIG. 57 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing of the effect control section 120m. The sub CPU 120a of the effect control unit 120m performs a reset every 2 milliseconds, which is the generation cycle of the reset clock pulse generator in the effect control unit 120m, after the initialization process is finished and the game becomes possible. Execute a series of operations.

In FIG. 57, the sub CPU 120a saves the information in the register of the sub CPU 120a to the stack area (S1400).

Next, the sub CPU 120a performs timer update processing (S1500). In the timer update process, the sub CPU 120a decrements various timer counters by 1 and updates them based on the time signal input from the RTC 120d. Details of the timer update process will be described later.

Next, the sub CPU 120a performs command analysis processing (S1600). In the command analysis process, the sub CPU 120a analyzes the commands in the reception buffer, and based on the analysis results, the image display device 31, the audio output device 32, the performance driving devices 330a, 330b, 330c, and 330d, and the performance The contents of the effects by the lighting devices 340a, 340b, 340c, and 340d are determined, and a command indicating the determined contents of the effects is set in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 120c. Details of the command analysis processing will be described later.

Next, the sub CPU 120a performs effect input control processing (S1700). In the effect input control process, the sub CPU 120a performs processing according to the input signals of the effect button 35, the cross key 39 and the detection switches 35a, 39a, 39b, 39c, 39d and 39e of the center key 39E. Details of the effect input control process will be described later.

Next, the sub CPU 120a performs data output processing (S1800). In the data output process, the sub CPU 120a transmits the command stored in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 120c in the command analysis process of step S1600 and the effect input control process of step S1700 to the general control section 141 and the lamp/driving control section 150.

Next, the sub CPU 120a restores the information saved in the stack area in step S1400 to the register of the sub CPU 120a (S1900).

58, 59, and 60 are flowcharts showing details of the command analysis processing. In FIG. 58, the sub CPU 120a confirms whether or not there is a command received from the main control board 10 in the reception buffer (S1601). If there is a command in the reception buffer (S1601: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1610, and if there is no command in the reception buffer (S1601: No), the current command analysis process ends.

In step S1610, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the command in the reception buffer is a special symbol pending number designation command. If the command in the reception buffer is a special symbol reservation number designation command (S1610: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1611, and if the command in the reception buffer is not a special symbol reservation number designation command (S1610: No), Proceed to step 1620 .

In step S1611, the sub CPU 120a performs special symbol reservation number update processing. In the special symbol reserved number update process, the sub CPU 120a analyzes the special symbol reserved number designation command, determines the number of reserved display images to be displayed on the image display device 31, and corresponds to the number of displayed reserved display images. Set the special figure display number specification command in the transmission buffer.

The command set in the transmission buffer in the special symbol reserved number update process is transmitted to the general control section 141 and the lamp/drive control section 150 in the data output process of step S1800. Upon receiving this command, the overall control unit 141 and the lamp/drive control unit 150 control the image display device 31, the audio output device 32, and the lighting for effect to produce effects related to the appearance or disappearance of the hold display image in the image display device 31. Let the devices 340a, 340b, 340c, 340d execute.

In step S1620, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the command in the reception buffer is the start winning designation command. If the command in the reception buffer is the starting winning designation command (S1620: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1621, and if the command in the receiving buffer is not the starting winning designation command (S1620: No), proceeds to step S1630. .

In step S1621, the sub CPU 120a performs start winning designation command storage processing. In the start winning designation command storage process, the sub CPU 120a selects one of the first effect information storage area and the second effect information storage area of the effect information storage area of the sub RAM 120c that corresponds to the start winning designation command in the reception buffer. , the memory portion having the smallest number in which data is not stored in the first to fourth memory portions of the selected effect information memory area is set as the data storage destination, and the start winning designation command in the reception buffer is set as the data storage destination memory portion. memorize to

FIG. 39(c) is a diagram showing an effect information storage area. As shown in FIG. 39(c), the effect information storage area includes the 0th storage unit corresponding to the variation, the first effect information storage area corresponding to the suspension of the first special symbol, and the suspension of the second special symbol. It has a corresponding second effect information storage area. Each of the first performance information storage area and the second performance information storage area includes a first storage section corresponding to the first suspension, a second storage section corresponding to the second suspension, a third storage section corresponding to the third suspension, and a fourth storage corresponding to the fourth reservation. As shown in FIG. 39(d), each storage section in the effect information storage area can store a start winning designation command and look-ahead pending display change effect scenario data.

In FIG. 58, after executing step S1621, the sub CPU 120a performs a look-ahead pending display change effect selection process (S1622). In the look-ahead pending display change effect selection process, the sub CPU 120a performs a look-ahead pending display change effect with the start winning designation command stored in the effect information storage area in step S1621 as the final change in the pattern corresponding to this starting winning prize designation command. , determines the scenario of the pending display change effect up to the final change when executing the prefetching pending display change effect, and sets the prefetching pending display change effect scenario data indicating this scenario to the effect information Store in the corresponding storage unit in the storage area. The details of the look-ahead pending display change effect selection process will be described later.

In step S1630, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the command in the reception buffer is a design designation command. If the command in the reception buffer is the design designation command (S1630: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1631. If the command in the reception buffer is not the design designation command (S1630: No), the process proceeds to step S1640.

In step S1631, the sub CPU 120a performs effect symbol determination processing. In the performance symbol determination process, the sub CPU 120a analyzes the symbol designation command, determines the stop symbol numbers of the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, the right symbol 36R, and the fourth symbol 36Z, and sub-selects the determined stop symbol numbers. Store in the performance symbol storage area in the RAM 120c, generate a stop symbol designation command for notifying the stop symbol number to the general control unit 141 and the lamp/drive control unit 150, and set the generated stop symbol designation command in the transmission buffer. do.

The command set in the transmission buffer in the effect symbol determination process is transmitted to the general control section 141 and the lamp/driving control section 150 in the data output process of step S1800. Upon receiving this command, the integrated control unit 141 and the lamp/drive control unit 150 determine the symbol combination at the time of stopping the variation in the variation.

In step S1640, sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the command in the reception buffer is the change start command. If the command in the receive buffer is the change start command (S1640: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1641, and if the command in the receive buffer is not the change start command (S1640: No), proceeds to step S1670.

In step S1641, the sub CPU 120a performs storage area shift processing. In the storage area shift process, when data is stored in one or more of the first to fourth storage units of the second effect information storage area, the sub CPU 120a shifts the data to the second to fourth storage areas of the second effect information storage area. The data in the section is shifted to the previous storage section, and the data in the first storage section of the second effect information storage area is written in the 0th storage section. By writing the data to the 0th storage section, the data (starting winning designation command, look-ahead pending display change effect scenario data) stored in the 0th storage section are erased. If data is not stored in the second effect information storage area and data is stored in one or more of the first to fourth storage units of the first effect information storage area, the first effect information storage area The data in the 2nd to 4th storage units are shifted to the previous storage unit, and the data in the 1st storage unit of the 1st effect information storage area are written in the 0th storage unit. By writing data to the 0th storage unit, the data stored in the 0th storage unit is erased.

Next, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not prefetch pending display change effect scenario data is stored in the effect information storage area (S1642). The sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1643 when the look-ahead pending display change effect scenario data is stored (S1642: Yes). If the look-ahead pending display change effect scenario data is not stored (S1642: No), the process proceeds to step S1644.

In step S1643, the sub CPU 120a performs prefetch effect control processing. In the prefetch effect control process, the sub CPU 120a refers to the prefetch pending display change effect scenario data in the effect information storage area, determines whether or not there is a change in the display mode of the pending display image in the change, In the case of changing the display mode of (1), an effect pattern designation command for instructing a change in the display mode of the pending display image is generated, and the generated effect pattern designation command is set in the transmission buffer.

The command set in the transmission buffer in the look-ahead effect control process is transmitted to the general control section 141 and the lamp/drive control section 150 in the data output process of step S1800. Upon receiving an effect pattern specifying command instructing a change in the display mode of the pending display image, the overall control unit 141 and the lamp/drive control unit 150 output an effect to change the display mode of the pending display image to the image display device 31 and sound. The device 32 and the production lighting devices 340a, 340b, 340c, and 340d are caused to execute.

In step S1644, the sub CPU 120a performs a variation effect pattern determination process. The variation effect pattern determination process is a process of determining a pattern variation effect pattern, which is the flow of effects in the variation. In the variation effect pattern determination process, the sub CPU 120a acquires the effect random number value 1 updated in step S1100, refers to the variation effect pattern determination table in the sub ROM 120b, and determines the variation start command and the effect random value value in the reception buffer. Based on the combination with 1, the symbol variation performance pattern is determined, and information of the determined symbol variation performance pattern is stored in the symbol variation performance pattern storage area in the sub-RAM 120c. Further, the sub CPU 120a generates an effect pattern designation command for starting the variation of the determined symbol variation effect pattern, and sets the generated effect pattern designation command in the transmission buffer.

FIG. 61 is a diagram showing a variable effect pattern determination table. In the variable performance pattern determination table, a combination of a random number value 1 for performance, a pattern variable performance pattern, and a performance pattern designation command is stored for each command corresponding to a variation start command.

Here, there are various types of symbol variation effect patterns that combine the effects shown in FIGS. 14 to 29 .

For example, MODE data is "E6H" and DATA data is "12H" The variation start command (per 16R probability variation, variation time 20000 ms) and the corresponding symbol variation performance pattern options include symbol variation performance pattern 1C1, symbol variation performance pattern 1C2, pattern variation production pattern 1C5, pattern variation production pattern 1C7, pattern variation production pattern 1C9, and the like. The flow of the design variation production pattern 1C1 is as follows: normal fluctuation production → step-up production (step number 1) → normal reach production → character appearance production (character C) → development incitement production → development fixed production → SP reach production → cut-in production (Red background) → Confirmed accessory activation second effect → Design confirmed (16R probability variable hit).

Also, the symbol variation effect pattern 1C7 and the symbol variation effect pattern 1C9 include a premium effect. The flow of the design variation production pattern 1C7 is normal fluctuation production → normal reach production → character appearance production (premium character) → fixed development production → SP reach production → cut-in production (zebra background) → fixed role activation second production → The design is confirmed (per 16R probability variation). The flow of the production of pattern variation production pattern 1C9 is normal fluctuation production → normal reach production → character appearance production (character C) → fixed development production → SP reach production → cut-in production (rainbow color background) → fixed role activation second production → The pattern is confirmed (per 16R probability variation).

MODE data is "E6H" and DATA data is "11H" The variation start command (per 2R probability variation, variation time 18000 ms) and the corresponding design variation production pattern options include design variation production pattern 1D1, design variation production pattern 1D2, etc. There is The flow of the performance of the symbol variation performance pattern 1D1 is normal variation performance → step-up performance (step number 1) → normal ready-to-win performance → roulette performance (rolling out) → pattern determination (2R probability variable win). The flow of the performance of the symbol variation performance pattern 1D2 is normal variation performance→normal ready-to-win performance→roulette performance (rolling out)→design decision (2R probability variable win).

MODE data is "E6H" and DATA data is "E0H" The variation start command (special loss, variation time 18000 ms) and corresponding pattern variation production pattern options include pattern variation production pattern 1E1, pattern variation production pattern 1E2, etc. be. The flow of the performance of the symbol variation performance pattern 1E1 is normal variation performance→step-up performance (step number 1)→normal ready-to-win performance→roulette performance (helping the winning number)→symbol determination (special loss). The flow of the performance of the pattern variation performance pattern 1E2 is normal variation performance→normal ready-to-win performance→roulette performance (helping the winning number)→design determination (special loss).

MODE data is "E6H" and DATA data is "59H" The variation start command (normal loss, variation time T9 = 6000 ms) and the corresponding symbol variation performance pattern options include symbol variation performance pattern 1F1 and symbol variation performance pattern 1F2. and so on. The flow of the performance of the symbol variation performance pattern 1F1 is normal variation performance→step-up performance (step number 1)→symbol determination (normal loss). The flow of the effect of the symbol variation effect pattern 1F2 is normal variation effect→symbol determination (normal loss).

MODE data is "E6H" and DATA data is "61H" The variation start command (normal loss, variation time 18000 ms) and corresponding pattern variation production pattern options include pattern variation production pattern 1G1, pattern variation production pattern 1G2, etc. be. The flow of the performance of the pattern variation performance pattern 1G1 is normal variation performance→step-up performance (the number of steps is 1)→design determination (normal loss). The flow of the performance of the pattern variation performance pattern 1G2 is normal variation performance→normal ready-to-win performance→roulette performance (losing)→determination of symbols (normal loss).

The command set in the transmission buffer in the fluctuation effect pattern determination process is transmitted to the general control section 141 and the lamp/driving control section 150 in the data output process of step S1800. Upon receiving this command, the overall control unit 141 and the lamp/driving control unit 150, in accordance with the pattern variation effect pattern indicated by the command, create an effect in accordance with the pattern change. , 330b, 330c, 330d, and lighting devices for presentation 340a, 340b, 340c, 340d.

In the next step S1645, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the symbol variation effect pattern determined in the variation effect pattern determination process includes the normal ready-to-win effect. The sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1646 if the normal reach effect is included (S1645: Yes), and proceeds to step S1648 if the normal reach effect is not included (S1645: No).

In the next step S1646, the sub CPU 120a sets the ready-to-reach establishment standby flag in the ready-to-reach establishment standby flag storage area of the sub RAM 120c.

In the next step S1647, the sub CPU 120a obtains the remaining time until reach establishment in the fluctuation, and divides this time by 2 milliseconds, which is the generation cycle of the reset clock pulse. set to

In the next step S1648, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the symbol variation effect pattern determined in the variation effect pattern determination process includes the SP ready-to-win effect. If the SP reach effect is included (S1648: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1649, and if the SP reach effect is not included (S1648: No), the process proceeds to step S1655.

In the next step S1649, the sub CPU 120a sets the SP reach wait flag in the SP reach wait flag storage area of the sub RAM 120c.

In the next step S1650, the sub CPU 120a obtains the remaining time until the SP reach effect develops in the variation, divides this time by the generation cycle of the reset clock pulse, and stores the value in the SP reach wait timer counter of the sub RAM 120c. set.

In step S1655, the sub CPU 120a performs stage change determination processing. In the stage change determination process, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not a stage change is to be executed, determines a new stage after the change if a stage change is to be executed, generates a production pattern designation command for the new stage, and generates set the effect pattern specification command in the transmission buffer. The details of the stage change determination process will be described later.

The command set in the transmission buffer in the stage change determination process is transmitted to the general control section 141 and the lamp/drive control section 150 in the data output process of step S1800. Upon receiving this command, the general control unit 141 and the lamp/driving control unit 150 cause the image display device 31, the audio output device 32, and the lighting devices 340a, 340b, 340c, and 340d to perform the stage production of the new stage. .

In step S1670, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the command in the reception buffer is the design confirmation command. The sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1671 if the command in the reception buffer is the pattern confirmation command (S1670: Yes), and proceeds to step S1680 if the command in the reception buffer is not the pattern confirmation command (S1670: No).

In step S1671, the sub CPU 120a performs effect symbol stop processing. In the effect symbol stop process, the sub CPU 120a generates a symbol confirmation command and sets the generated stop designation command in the transmission buffer.

The stop designation command set in the transmission buffer in the effect symbol stop process is transmitted to the general control section 141 and the lamp/drive control section 150 in the data output process of step S1800. Upon receiving this command, the integrated control unit 141 and the lamp/driving control unit 150, in accordance with the command, produce an effect related to finalization (complete stop) of the effect pattern 36 by the image display device 31, the audio output device 32, and the lighting device for effect. 340a, 340b, 340c, 340d are executed.

In step S1680, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the command in the reception buffer is a gaming state designation command. If the command in the reception buffer is the game state designation command (S1680: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1681, and if the command in the reception buffer is not the game state designation command (S1680: No), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1690. .

At step S1681, the sub CPU 120a performs a game state setting process. In the game state setting process, the sub CPU 120a analyzes the game state designation command in the reception buffer, obtains the current game state, and stores the game state information indicating the obtained game state in the game state storage area of the sub RAM 120c. .

In the next step S1682, the sub CPU 120a confirms whether or not the gaming state related to the normal symbol lottery has become the first special time-saving gaming state. When it becomes the 1st special time saving game state (S1682: Yes), it progresses to step S1684, and when it is not the 1st special time reduction game state (S1682: No), it progresses to step S1683.

In step S1683, the sub CPU 120a confirms whether or not the gaming state related to the normal symbol lottery has become the second special time-saving gaming state. If the second special time-saving gaming state is entered (S1683: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1684, and if the second special time-saving gaming state is not entered (S1683: No), this command analysis process is terminated.

In step S1684, the sub CPU 120a performs help mode start control processing. In the help mode start control process, the sub CPU 120a sets a help mode production pattern designation command in the transmission buffer.

The command set in the transmission buffer in the help mode start control process is sent to the general control section 141 and the lamp/drive control section 150 in the data output process of step S1800. Upon receiving the command, the overall control unit 141 and the lamp/driving control unit 150, in accordance with the command, provide the effect of the help mode to the image display device 31, the audio output device 32, and the effect lighting devices 340a, 340b, 340c, and 340d. let it run.

In step S1690, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the command in the receive buffer is an opening designation command. If the command in the reception buffer is the opening designation command (S1690: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1691, and if the command in the reception buffer is not the opening designation command (S1690: No), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1692.

In step S1691, the sub CPU 120a performs special game effect selection processing. In the special game effect selection process, the sub CPU 120a determines an opening effect pattern based on the opening designation command in the reception buffer, and stores information on the determined opening effect pattern in the effect pattern storage area of the sub RAM 120c. In addition, the sub CPU 120a executes the promotion effect in the fourth round when the opening designation command is the 8R probability variable hit or the 8R normal hit, Promotion performance execution data indicating the contents of promotion performance are stored. Details of the special game effect selection process will be described later.

The command set in the transmission buffer in the special game effect selection process is transmitted to the general control section 141 and the lamp/drive control section 150 in the data output process of step S1800. Upon receiving this command, the general control unit 141 and the lamp/driving control unit 150 follow the command to display the special game opening effect on the image display device 31, the audio output device 32, and the effect lighting devices 340a, 340b, 340c, and 340d. to execute.

In step S1692, the sub CPU 120a determines whether the command in the reception buffer is a round start command. If the command in the reception buffer is the round start command (S1692: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1693, and if the command in the reception buffer is not the round start command (S1692: No), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1694.

In step S1693, the sub CPU 120a performs round effect control processing. In the round effect control process, the sub CPU 120a analyzes the round start command in the reception buffer, and determines whether or not the current round is the execution round of the promotion effect (4th round of 8R probability variable win or 8R normal win). judge. The sub CPU 120a determines the effect pattern for the current round based on the determination result, stores information on the determined effect pattern in the effect pattern storage area of the sub RAM 120c, and generates an effect pattern designation command for the current round. , set the generated effect pattern specification command in the transmission buffer. Details of the round effect control process will be described later.

The command set in the transmission buffer in the round effect control process is transmitted to the general control section 141 and the lamp/driving control section 150 in the data output process of step S1800. Upon receiving this command, the general control unit 141 and the lamp/driving control unit 150, according to the command, produce a special game round effect through the image display device 31, the audio output device 32, and the effect lighting devices 340a, 340b, 340c, and 340d. to execute.

In step S1694, sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the command in the reception buffer is an ending designation command. If the command in the reception buffer is an ending designation command (S1694: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1695. If the command in the reception buffer is not an ending specifying command (S1694: No), the current command analysis process is terminated.

In step S1695, the sub CPU 120a performs special game end effect control processing, and proceeds to step S1696. In the special game end effect control process, the sub CPU 120a analyzes the ending designation command in the reception buffer, determines the ending effect pattern, and stores information on the determined effect pattern in the effect pattern storage area of the sub RAM 120c. The sub CPU 120a also generates an ending effect pattern designation command and sets the generated effect pattern designation command in the transmission buffer. Also, the sub CPU 120a clears any flags set during the special game.

The command set in the transmission buffer in the special game end effect control process is transmitted to the general control section 141 and the lamp/drive control section 150 in the data output process of step S1800. Upon receiving this command, the general control unit 141 and the lamp/driving control unit 150, according to the command, display the ending effect of the special game through the image display device 31, the audio output device 32, and the effect lighting devices 340a, 340b, 340c, and 340d. to execute.

In step S1696, the sub CPU 120a determines whether the big win that triggered the execution of the finished special game is a normal win or a probability variable win. When the jackpot that triggered the execution of the special game is the normal win (S1696: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1697. When the jackpot that triggered the execution of the special game is a variable probability (S1696: No), the process proceeds to step S1698.

In step S1697, the sub CPU 120a performs special training mode start control processing. In the special training mode start control process, the sub CPU 120a generates an effect pattern designation command for the special training mode, and sets the generated effect pattern designation command in the transmission buffer.

The command set in the transmission buffer in the special training mode start control process is sent to the general control section 141 and the lamp/drive control section 150 in the data output process of step S1800. Upon receiving the command, the general control unit 141 and the lamp/driving control unit 150 execute the special training mode effect on the image display device 31, the audio output device 32, and the lighting devices for effect 340a, 340b, 340c, and 340d according to the command. Let

In step S1698, the sub CPU 120a performs live mode start control processing. In the live mode start control process, the sub CPU 120a generates a live mode effect pattern designation command and sets the generated effect pattern designation command in a transmission buffer.

The command set in the transmission buffer in the live mode start control process is sent to the general control section 141 and the lamp/drive control section 150 in the data output process of step S1800. Upon receiving the command, the general control unit 141 and the lamp/driving control unit 150 execute the live mode effect on the image display device 31, the audio output device 32, and the lighting devices for effect 340a, 340b, 340c, and 340d according to the command. Let

FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing the details of the prefetch pending display change effect selection process. In FIG. 62, the sub CPU 120a treats the suspension corresponding to the storage unit in the effect information storage area storing the start winning designation command in the start winning designation command storage process as the prefetching determination target suspension, and the change in the prefetching determination target suspension develops. It is determined whether or not it is a variation having SP reach production which is production (S1622-1). If the variation has effects (S1622-1: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1622-2. If it is not a variation with development effects (S1622-1: No), the current look-ahead pending display change effect selection process is terminated.

In step S1622-2, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not there is a change having a development effect in the hold that precedes the prefetch determination target hold in the order of change. The sub CPU 120a advances to step S1622-3 when there is no variation with development effect (S1622-2: No). If there is a change with a development effect (S1622-2: Yes), the current look-ahead pending display change effect selection process is terminated.

In step S1622-3, the sub CPU 120a performs a look-ahead suspension display change effect execution determination process. In the look-ahead pending display change effect execution determination process, the sub CPU 120a acquires the effect random value 2, which is one of the random values updated in step S1100. The sub CPU 120a refers to the look-ahead pending display change effect execution determination table in the sub-ROM 120b, and based on the combination of the pre-determination result (jackpot or loss) indicated by the start winning designation command of the look-ahead determination target pending and the random value for effect 2 , determine whether or not to execute the look-ahead pending display change effect.

FIG. 63(a) is a diagram showing a look-ahead suspension display change effect execution determination table. In the look-ahead pending display change effect execution determination table, a set of data indicating the random number 2 for effect and the necessity of execution ("execute" and "not execute") is referred to when the pre-determination result is a big hit. and those to be referred to in the case of a special loss or a normal loss are stored separately.

Specifically, with respect to the jackpot, 55 (0 to 54) random number values 2 for effect are associated with data indicating that the look-ahead pending display change effect is executed, and 45 (55 to 99) The effect random number value 2 is associated with data indicating that the look-ahead pending display change effect is not executed. For the special loss and the normal loss, 45 (0 to 44) production random numbers 2 are associated with data indicating that the look-ahead pending display change production is executed, and 55 (45 to 99) productions. The random number value 2 is associated with data indicating that the look-ahead pending display change effect is not executed.

In step S1622-4, the sub CPU 120a determines whether the determination result of the look-ahead pending display change effect execution determination process is "execute" or "not execute". If the determination result is "execute" (S1622-4: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1622-5. If the determination result is "do not execute" (S1622-4: No), the current look-ahead pending display change effect selection process is terminated.

In step S1622-5, the sub CPU 120a performs prefetch pending display change final stage determination processing. In the look-ahead pending display change final stage determination process, the sub CPU 120a acquires the effect random number value 3, which is one of the random number values updated in step S1100. The sub CPU 120a refers to the final stage pending display mode determination table in the sub ROM 120b, and based on the combination of the preliminary determination result (big win or losing) indicated by the start winning designation command of the prefetch determination target pending and the random number value 3 for effect, The display mode of the pending display image at the final stage in the look-ahead pending display change effect is determined.

FIG. 63(b) is a diagram showing a final stage pending display mode determination table. In the final stage reserved display mode determination table, a set of data indicating the random number 3 for effect and the final stage reserved display mode ("blue", "green", and "red") It is stored separately into what is referred to in the first and what is referred to in the case of a special loss or normal loss. Specifically, with respect to the jackpot, 10 (0 to 9) random number values 3 for effect are associated with the data indicating the pending display mode of "blue", and 30 (10 to 39) random number values 3 for effect are associated with each other. The random number 3 is associated with the data indicating the "green" pending display mode, and the 60 (40 to 99) production random number values 3 are associated with the data indicating the "red" pending display mode. there is For the special loss and the normal loss, 60 (0 to 59) production random numbers 3 are associated with data indicating the reserved display mode of "blue", and 30 (60 to 89) production random numbers. Numerical value 3 is associated with data indicating a "green" pending display mode, and 10 (90 to 99) production random number values 3 are associated with data indicating a "red" pending display mode. .

In step S1622-6, the sub CPU 120a performs prefetch pending display change effect scenario determination processing. In the look-ahead pending display change effect scenario determination process, the sub CPU 120a acquires the effect random value 4, which is one of the random values updated in step S1100. The sub CPU 120a refers to the look-ahead pending display change effect scenario determination table in the sub-ROM 120b, and the preliminary determination result (jackpot or loss) indicated by the start winning designation command of the look-ahead determination object pending, the pending display mode of the final stage, the number of pending, and Based on the combination of random number values 4 for effect, a look-ahead pending display change effect scenario is determined.

There are two types of the look-ahead pending display change effect scenario determination table, one to be referred to when the preliminary determination result is a big win and the other to be referred to when the result is a loss. FIG. 64 is a diagram showing a look-ahead pending display change effect scenario determination table referred to when the preliminary determination result is a jackpot. FIG. 65 is a diagram showing a look-ahead pending display change effect scenario determination table referred to when the preliminary determination result is a special failure or a normal failure.

In the look-ahead pending display change effect scenario determination table, each combination of the effect random number 4 and the look-ahead pending display change effect scenario data corresponds to the combination of the pending display mode and the number of pending events in the final stage of the look-ahead pending display change effect. stored in Whether or not the random number 4 for performance is assigned to the production scenarios HR39 and HR49 of the pending display change performance called "upgrade" in the big hit lookahead pending display change performance scenario determination table and the losing lookahead pending display change performance scenario determination table. is different.

More specifically, in this table, the option corresponding to the combination of blue and the number of pending 1 is the pending display change effect scenario HB11. The pending display change effect scenario HB11 is a scenario in which the pending display image is turned blue in the final change. 100 (0 to 99) production random numbers 4 are associated with the pending display change production scenario HB11. Options corresponding to the combination of blue and the number of pending 2 include pending display change production scenarios HB21 and HB22. Suspension display change effect scenarios HB21 and HB22 are scenarios in which the timing at which the suspension display image turns blue is different. Seventy (0 to 69) production random number values 4 are associated with the pending display change production scenario HB21, and thirty (70 to 99) production random number values 4 are associated with the holding display change production scenario HB22. ing.

Options corresponding to combinations of blue and the number of pending 3 include pending display change production scenarios HB31, HB32, and HB33. Suspended display change effect scenarios HB31, HB32, and HB33 are scenarios in which the timing at which the suspended display image turns blue is different. Twenty to fifty production random numbers 4 are associated with the pending display change production scenarios HB31, HB32, and HB33, respectively. Choices corresponding to combinations of blue and the number of pending 4 include pending display change production scenarios HB41, HB42, HB43, and HB44. Suspended display change effect scenarios HB41, HB42, HB43, and HB44 are scenarios in which the timing at which the suspended display image turns blue differs. 10 to 40 production random numbers 4 are associated with the pending display change production scenarios HB41, HB42, HB43, and HB44, respectively.

An option corresponding to a combination of green and the number of pending 1 is a pending display change effect scenario HG11. The pending display change effect scenario HG11 is a scenario in which the pending display image is turned green at the final change. 100 (0 to 99) production random numbers 4 are associated with the pending display change production scenario HG11. Choices corresponding to combinations of green and the number of pending 2 include pending display change production scenarios HG21 and HG22. Suspension display change effect scenarios HG21 and HG22 are scenarios in which the timing at which the suspension display image turns green and whether or not there is a change to blue before reaching that timing are different. 70 (0 to 69) production random number values 4 are associated with the pending display change production scenario HG21, and 30 (70 to 99) production random number values 4 are associated with the holding display change production scenario HG22. ing.

Choices corresponding to combinations of green and the number of pending 3 include pending display change production scenarios HG31 to HG38. Suspension display change effect scenarios HG31 to HG38 are scenarios in which the timing at which the suspension display image turns green and whether or not there is a change to blue before reaching that timing are different. 5 to 20 production random numbers 4 are associated with the pending display change production scenarios HG31 to HG38, respectively. Choices corresponding to combinations of green and the number of pending 4 include pending display change production scenarios HG41 to HG48. Suspension display change effect scenarios HG41 to HG48 are scenarios in which the timing at which the suspension display image turns green and whether or not there is a change to blue before reaching that timing are different. 5 to 20 production random numbers 4 are associated with the pending display change production scenarios HG41 to HG48, respectively.

The option corresponding to the combination of red and the number of pending 1 is the pending display change effect scenario HR11. The pending display change effect scenario HR11 is a scenario in which the pending display image is turned red at the final change. 100 (0 to 99) production random numbers 4 are associated with the pending display change production scenario HR11. Options corresponding to combinations of red and the number of pending 2 include pending display change production scenarios HR21, HR22, HR23, and HR24. Suspension display change effect scenarios HR21, HR22, HR23, and HR24 are scenarios in which the timing at which the suspension display image turns red and whether or not there is a change to blue or green before reaching that point are different. 10 to 40 production random numbers 4 are associated with the pending display change production scenarios HR21, HR22, HR23, and HR24, respectively.

Options corresponding to combinations of red and the number of pending 3 include pending display change production scenarios HR31 to HR39. The pending display change effect scenarios HR31 to HR39 are scenarios in which the timing at which the pending display image turns red and whether or not there is a change to blue or green before reaching that point are different. Here, the pending display change effect scenarios HR31 to HR38 are "upstart" scenarios in which the subsequent change changes to a more reliable pending display mode than the previous change, such as blue→green→red. On the other hand, the pending display change effect scenario HR39 is a "falling down" scenario in which a subsequent change changes to a pending display mode with lower reliability than the previous change, such as green→red→green. In the jackpot table, 5 to 20 performance random number values 4 are associated with the pending display change performance scenarios HR31 to HR38, and one (99) performance random value 4 is associated with the pending display change performance scenario HR39. are associated. On the other hand, in the losing table, 5 to 20 production random numbers 4 are associated with the pending display change production scenarios HR31 to HR38. Further, in the losing table, even one random number value 4 for effect is not associated with the pending display change effect scenario HR39.

Combinations of red and the number of pending 4 and corresponding options include pending display change production scenarios HR41 to HR49. Suspension display change effect scenarios HR41 to HR49 are scenarios in which the timing at which the suspension display image turns red and whether or not there is a change to blue or green before reaching that point are different. Of the pending display change effect scenarios HR41 to HR49, the pending display change effect scenarios HR41 to HR48 are "upstart" scenarios, and the pending display change effect scenario HR49 is a "downward" scenario. In the jackpot table, 5 to 20 performance random number values 4 are associated with the pending display change performance scenarios HR41 to HR48, and one (99) performance random value 4 is associated with the pending display change performance scenario HR49. are associated. On the other hand, in the losing table, 5 to 20 production random numbers 4 are associated with the pending display change production scenarios HR41 to HR48. Further, in the losing table, even one random number value 4 for effect is not associated with the pending display change effect scenario HR49.

In this way, in the gaming machine 1, for the combination of red and the number of reservations 3 and the combination of red and the number of reservations 4, the reservation display change production scenarios HR39 and HR49 of "downgrade" can be selected only from the big win table. ing. Therefore, in the game machine 1, the look-ahead pending display change effect of "upbringing down" becomes the final change big win confirmation effect (the effect of notifying that the final change will result in a big win before the final change pattern stops).

In step S1622-7 of FIG. 62, the sub CPU 120a stores the scenario data of the prefetching pending display change effect scenario determined in the prefetching pending display change effect scenario determination process in the storage unit in the effect information storage area.

Here, in the look-ahead hold display change effect selection process, if there is a development effect in the look-ahead determination target hold and there is no development effect in the hold before the change order (S1622-1: Yes → S1622-2: No) , prefetch pending display change effect execution determination processing is performed. According to such a flow of processing, the effect control unit 120m executes the development effect as an effect during the variable display of the final variation of the prefetching pending display change effect when executing the prefetching pending display change effect, and executes the prefetching pending display change effect. To regulate execution of a development performance as a performance during a variable display before the final variation of the display change performance.

FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing details of the stage change determination process. In FIG. 66, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the current game mode is the normal mode (S1655-1). If the current game mode is the normal mode (S1655-1: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1632-2, and if the current game mode is either the special training mode or the live mode (S1655-1: No), the current stage change determination process is terminated.

In step S1655-2, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the starting winning designation command stored in the effect information storage area in the starting winning designation command storage process is the normal winning prize information. If the starting winning designation command is for winning prize information for normal failure (S1655-2: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1655-4, and if the starting winning designation command is not for normal failure (S1655-2: Yes). No), the current stage change determination process is terminated.

In step S1655-4, the sub CPU 120a performs stage change execution determination processing. In the stage change execution determination process, the sub CPU 120a acquires the effect random number value 5 updated in step S1100. The sub CPU 120a refers to the stage change execution determination table in the sub ROM 120b, and determines whether or not to execute a stage change based on the number of changes since the previous stage change and the random number value 5 for effect.

FIG. 67 is a diagram showing a stage change execution determination table. In the stage change execution judgment table, a set of data indicating the necessity of execution ("execute" and "not execute") and a random number value for effect 5 is set, and the number of times of change from the previous stage change is 0 to 9 times. Divided into those that are referred to when the number of changes from the previous stage change is 10 to 19 times, and those that are referred to when the number of changes from the previous stage change is 20 times or more. remembered.

In the table, the greater the number of changes from the previous stage change, the more likely the data indicating that the stage change will be executed is selected. Specifically, for 0 to 9 times, 20 (0 to 19) production random number values 5 are associated with data indicating that stage changes are to be executed, and 80 (20 to 99) The effect random number value 5 is associated with data indicating that the stage change is not executed. For the 10th to 19th times, 50 (0 to 49) random number values 5 for effect are associated with data indicating that the stage change is to be executed, and 50 (50 to 99) random value values 5 for effect are associated with each other. is associated with data indicating that the stage change is not executed. For 20 times or more, 80 (0 to 79) random number values 5 for effect are associated with data indicating that the stage change is to be executed, and 20 (80 to 99) random number values 5 for effect are associated with the data. It is associated with data indicating that the stage change is not executed.

In step S1655-4, the sub CPU 120a determines whether the determination result of the stage change effect execution determination process is "execute" or "not execute". If the determination result is "execute" (S1655-4: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1655-5. If the determination result is "do not execute" (S1655-4: No), the current stage change determination process is terminated.

In step S1655-5, the sub CPU 120a sets a stage change wait flag in the stage change wait flag storage area of the sub RAM 120c.

In step S1655-6, the sub CPU 120a performs stage change timing determination processing. In the stage change timing determination process, the sub CPU 120a determines the stage change execution timing within the variation. In step S1655-7, the sub CPU 120a obtains the remaining time until the stage change execution timing, divides this time by 2 milliseconds, which is the reset clock pulse generation cycle, and divides the value by the stage change standby timer counter of the sub RAM 120c. set to

In step S1655-8, the sub CPU 120a performs new stage determination processing. In the new stage determination process, the sub CPU 120a acquires the effect random number value 6 updated in step S1100. In the new stage determination process, the sub CPU 120a refers to the new stage determination table in the sub ROM 120b and determines the new stage based on the random number value 6 for effect.

FIG. 68 shows a new stage determination table. In the new stage determination table, each set of the random number 6 for effect and the stage data indicating the new stage after the change in the stage change is stored for each stage corresponding to the current staying stage.

Specifically, when the current stage is the Marine stage, the options are Savanna stage and Cosmo stage, and when the current stage is the Savanna stage, the options are Marine stage and Cosmo stage, and the current stage is If is the Cosmo stage, the options are the Marine stage and the Savannah stage. Each option is associated with 50 random number values 6 for effect.

In step S1655-9, the sub CPU 120a stores the new stage data in the stage change information storage area of the sub RAM 120c.

FIG. 69 is a flow chart showing details of the special game effect selection process (step S1691 in FIG. 50). In FIG. 69, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the type of jackpot that triggered the special game this time is the 2R probability variable win (S1691-1). If the type of jackpot is 2R probability variation per (S1691-1: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1691-2, and if it is not 2R probability variation per (S1691-1: No), proceeds to step S1691-3.

In step S1691-2, the sub CPU 120a determines to perform an opening effect for 2R, and stores information on the opening effect pattern for 2R in the effect pattern storage area.

In step S1691-3, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the type of jackpot that triggered the special game this time is the 16R probability variable hit. The sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1691-4 when the jackpot type is 16R probability variation per (S1691-3: Yes), and proceeds to step S1691-5 when it is not 16R probability variation per (S1691-3: No).

In step S1691-4, the sub CPU 120a determines to perform an opening effect for 16R, and stores information on the opening effect pattern for 16R in the effect pattern storage area.

In step S1691-5, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the type of jackpot that triggered the special game this time is the 8R probability variable hit. The sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1691-6 when the jackpot type is the 8R probability variable hit (S1691-5: Yes), and proceeds to step S1691-7 when it is the 8R normal hit (S1691-5: No).

In step S1691-6, the sub CPU 120a determines to perform a rank-up success effect, and executes a rank-up effect indicating that the rank-up success effect is to be executed in the round-by-round effect information storage area of the fourth round of the sub RAM 120c. Store data.

In step S1691-7, the sub CPU 120a determines to perform a rank-up failure effect, and executes a rank-up effect indicating that the rank-up failure effect is to be executed in the round-by-round effect information storage area of the fourth round of the sub RAM 120c. Store data.

After executing step S1691-6 or S1691-7, the sub CPU 120a determines to perform an opening effect for 8R, and stores information on the opening effect pattern for 8R in the effect pattern storage area (S1691-8).

In step S1691-9, the sub CPU 120a sets the effect pattern designation command for the opening effect determined in step S1691-2, S1691-4 or S1691-8 in the transmission buffer. After that, the current special game selection process is terminated.

FIG. 70 is a flow chart showing details of the round effect control process. In FIG. 70, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the round start command in the reception buffer is for the fourth round (S1693-1). If the round start command in the reception buffer is for the fourth round (S1693-1: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1693-2, and if it is for a round other than the fourth round (S1693-1 : No), and proceeds to step S1963-6.

In step S1693-2, the sub CPU 120a determines whether rank-up effect execution data is stored in the round-by-round effect information storage area of the sub RAM 120c. If rank-up effect execution data is stored (S1693-2: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1693-3, and if rank-up effect execution data is not stored (S1693-2: No), step Proceed to S1693-6.

In step S1693-3, the sub CPU 120a determines whether the rank-up effect execution data in the round-by-round effect information storage area indicates the execution of the rank-up success effect or the execution of the rank-up failure effect. judge. If the rank-up effect execution data indicates the execution of the rank-up success effect (S1693-3: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1693-4, and the rank-up effect execution data indicates the execution of the rank-up failure effect. If it indicates (S1693-3: No), the process proceeds to step S1693-5.

In step S1693-4, the sub CPU 120a sets a rank-up success effect wait flag in the rank-up effect success wait flag storage area of the sub RAM 120c. After that, the process proceeds to step S1693-5. The rank-up success effect waiting flag is a flag indicating that the rank-up success effect is waiting for execution.

In step S1693-5, the sub CPU 120a waits until the start timing of the operation acceptance valid period (the time when the image of the effect button 35, the indicator image, and the operation guidance image appear) in the rank-up effect of this round (fourth round). is obtained, and the value obtained by dividing this time by 2 milliseconds is set in the operation acceptance effective period start timer counter for rank-up effect in the sub-RAM 120c. In addition, the sub CPU 120a obtains the remaining time until the end time of the operation acceptance valid period (time when the time marker in the indicator image reaches the end) in the rank-up effect of this round, and divides this time by 2 milliseconds. The obtained value is set in the operation reception valid period end timer counter for the rank-up effect of the sub-RAM 120c. The operation reception effective period start timer counter and the operation reception effective period end timer counter are counted down each time the timer update processing in step S1500 is executed. The operation reception effective period start timer counter becomes 0 at the start timing of the operation reception effective period. The operation reception effective period end timer counter becomes 0 at the end time of the operation reception effective period.

In step S1693-6, the sub CPU 120a sets an effect pattern designation command for the round effect of the current round in the transmission buffer.

FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing details of timer update processing. In FIG. 71, the sub CPU 120a decrements the timer counter of the sub RAM 120c by 1 if it is not 0 (S1501).

In the next step S1502, the sub CPU 120a confirms whether or not the reach establishment waiting flag is set in the reach establishment waiting flag storage area of the sub RAM 120c. The sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1503 when the ready-to-reach establishment waiting flag is set (S1502: Yes), and proceeds to step S1506 when the ready-to-reach establishment waiting flag is not set (S1503: No).

In step S1503, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the reach establishment waiting timer counter of the sub RAM 120c is greater than zero. If the reach establishment standby timer counter is 0 (S1503: No), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1504, and if the reach establishment standby timer counter is greater than 0 (S1502: Yes), proceeds to step S1506.

In step S1504, the sub CPU 120a generates an effect pattern designation command instructing execution of normal reach effect, and sets the generated effect pattern designation command in the transmission buffer. In the next step S1505, the sub CPU 120a clears the ready-to-reach establishment standby flag of the sub RAM 120c.

The production pattern designation command for the normal reach production set in the transmission buffer is transmitted to the general control section 141 and the lamp/driving control section 150 in the data output process of step S1800. Upon receiving this command, the general control unit 141 and the lamp/driving control unit 150 cause the image display device 31, the audio output device 32, and the lighting devices 340a, 340b, 340c, and 340d to perform the normal reach effect.

In step S1506, the sub CPU 120a confirms whether or not the SP reach wait flag is set in the SP reach wait flag storage area of the sub RAM 120c. If the SP reach wait flag is set (S1506: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1507, and if the SP reach wait flag is not set (S1507: No), proceeds to step S1510.

In step S1507, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the SP reach standby timer counter in the sub RAM 120c is greater than zero. If the SP reach standby timer counter is 0 (S1507: No), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1508, and if the SP reach standby timer counter is greater than 0 (S1506: Yes), proceeds to step S1510.

In step S1508, the sub CPU 120a generates an effect pattern designation command for instructing execution of the SP ready-to-win effect, and sets the generated effect pattern designation command in the transmission buffer. In the next step S1509, the sub CPU 120a clears the SP reach wait flag of the sub RAM 120c.

The effect pattern designation command for the SP ready-to-win effect set in the transmission buffer is transmitted to the general control section 141 and the lamp/driving control section 150 in the data output process of step S1800. Upon receiving this command, the overall control unit 141 and the lamp/driving control unit 150 cause the image display device 31, the audio output device 32, and the lighting devices 340a, 340b, 340c, and 340d to perform the SP reach effect.

In step S1510, the sub CPU 120a confirms whether or not the stage change wait flag is set in the stage change wait flag storage area of the sub RAM 120c. The sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1511 if the stage change wait flag is set (S1510: Yes), and proceeds to step S1510 if the stage change wait flag is not set (S1511: No).

In step S1511, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the stage change standby timer counter of the sub RAM 120c is greater than zero. If the stage change wait timer counter is 0 (S1511: No), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1512, and if the stage change wait timer counter is greater than 0 (S1510: Yes), proceeds to step S1510.

In step S1512, the sub CPU 120a generates an effect pattern designation command for instructing a stage change to the stage indicated by the data in the stage change information storage area of the sub RAM 120c, and sets the generated effect pattern designation command in the transmission buffer. In the next step S1513, the sub CPU 120a clears the stage change wait flag of the sub RAM 120c.

The stage change effect pattern designation command set in the transmission buffer is transmitted to the general control unit 141 and the lamp/driving control unit 150 in the data output process of step S1800. Upon receiving this command, the general control unit 141 and the lamp/driving control unit 150 cause the image display device 31, the audio output device 32, and the lighting devices 340a, 340b, 340c, and 340d to perform the stage production of the new stage. .

FIG. 72 is a flow chart showing details of the effect input control process. In FIG. 72, the sub CPU 120a performs operation information storage area update processing (S1701). The operation information storage area update process is a process of updating information in the operation information storage area of the sub RAM 120c.

FIG. 73(a) is a diagram showing an operation information storage area. FIG. 73(b) is a diagram showing an example of updating the operation information storage area. As shown in FIG. 73(a), the operation information storage area includes an up cursor key sampling signal storage area, a down cursor key sampling signal storage area, a left cursor key sampling signal storage area, a right cursor key sampling signal storage area, a center key It has a sampling signal storage area, a production button sampling signal storage area, a production button ON edge storage area, a production button OFF edge storage area, a production button OFF edge number storage area, and a production button ON-OFF edge signal number storage area. .

Each of the production button sampling signal storage area, the production button ON edge storage area, the production button OFF edge storage area, the production button OFF edge number storage area, and the production button ON-OFF edge signal number storage area contains the latest sampling timing information. and a previous sampling storage section for storing information on the sampling timing of the previous one (2 milliseconds before).

In the operation information storage area update process, the sub CPU 120a updates the up cursor key sampling signal storage area based on the input signal of the detection switch 39a of the up cursor key 39A. Also, based on the input signal of the detection switch 39b of the down cursor key 39B, the down cursor key sampling signal storage area is updated. Also, the left cursor key sampling signal storage area is updated based on the input signal of the detection switch 39c of the left cursor key 39C. Also, the right cursor key sampling signal storage area is updated based on the input signal of the detection switch 39d of the right cursor key 39D. Also, based on the input signal of the detection switch 39e of the center key 39E, the center key sampling signal storage area is updated. Also, based on the input signal of the detection switch 35a of the effect button 35, the effect button sampling signal storage area, the effect button ON edge storage area, the effect button OFF edge storage area, and the effect button ON-OFF edge signal number storage area are updated. do.

More specifically, at the sampling timing every 2 milliseconds, the sub CPU 120a writes 1 to the upper cursor key sampling signal storage area if the input signal of the detection switch 39a is ON, and the input signal of the detection switch 39a is OFF. If so, 0 is written in the up cursor key sampling signal storage area. If the input signal to the detection switch 39b is ON, 1 is written to the lower cursor key sampling signal storage area, and if the input signal to the detection switch 39b is OFF, 0 is written to the lower cursor key sampling signal storage area. If the input signal to the detection switch 39c is ON, 1 is written to the left cursor key sampling signal storage area, and if the input signal to the detection switch 39c is OFF, 0 is written to the left cursor key sampling signal storage area. If the input signal to the detection switch 39d is ON, 1 is written to the right cursor key sampling signal storage area, and if the input signal to the detection switch 39d is OFF, 0 is written to the right cursor key sampling signal storage area. If the input signal to the detection switch 39e is ON, 1 is written in the center key sampling signal storage area, and if the input signal to the detection switch 39e is OFF, 0 is written to the center key sampling signal storage area.

The sub CPU 120a stores information in the latest sampling storage section of the effect button sampling signal storage area, the effect button ON edge storage area, the effect button OFF edge storage area, and the effect button ON-OFF edge signal number storage area to the previous sampling storage unit. copy each. Then, as shown in the update example of FIG. 73(b), if the input signal of the detection switch 35a is ON, the sub CPU 120a writes 1 to the latest sampling storage section of the effect button sampling signal storage area, and detects the switch 35a. If the input signal is OFF, 0 is written in the latest sampling storage section of the performance button sampling signal storage area. The sub CPU 120a writes 1 to the latest sampling storage part of the effect button on-edge signal storage area when the previous sampling signal storage part of the effect button sampling signal storage area is 0 and the latest sampling storage part is 1, and other combinations. If (the previous sampling signal is 1→the latest sampling signal is 1, the previous sampling signal is 0→the latest sampling signal is 0, or the previous sampling signal is 1→the latest sampling signal is 0), the production button ON edge signal storage area. 0 is written in the latest sampling storage part of .

The sub CPU 120a writes 1 to the latest sampling storage section of the presentation button off-edge signal storage area when the previous sampling signal storage section of the presentation button sampling signal storage area is 1 and the latest sampling storage section is 0, and other combinations are performed. If (the previous sampling signal is 1→the latest sampling signal is 1, the previous sampling signal is 0→the latest sampling signal is 0, or the previous sampling signal is 0→the latest sampling signal is 1), the production button OFF edge signal storage area. 0 is written in the latest sampling storage part of .

When the sub CPU 120a writes 1 to the latest sampling storage part of the effect button sampling signal storage area, the number of the latest sampling storage part of the effect button ON-OFF edge signal number storage area is incremented by 1 to rewrite the number, and the effect button When 0 is written in the latest sampling storage area of the sampling signal storage area, the latest sampling storage area of the effect button on-off edge signal count storage area is reset to 0.

In the next step S1702, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the operation acceptance valid period start timer counter for the rank-up effect is zero. The determination result of this step becomes "Yes" after the start timing of the effective period for accepting operation of the continuous hit effect in the rank-up effect. If the operation acceptance effective period start timer counter is 0 (S1702: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1703. If the operation reception validity period start timer counter is greater than 0 (S1702: No), the process proceeds to step S1713.

In step S1703, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the operation acceptance effective period end timer counter for the rank-up effect is zero. If it is within the operation reception effective period of the rank-up effect, the determination result of this step becomes "No", and at the end time of the operation reception effective period, the determination result of this step becomes "Yes". If the operation acceptance effective period end timer counter is greater than 0 (S1703: No), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1704. If the operation acceptance effective period end timer counter is 0 (S1703: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1709.

In step S1704, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the value of the latest sampling signal storage part of the effect button on-off edge signal number storage area is equal to or greater than a predetermined value. The predetermined value in this step is a value obtained by dividing a sufficient period (for example, 1 second) by 2 milliseconds to determine that the effect button 35 is continuously operated (depressed). do. If the performance button 35 is continuously operated (pressed continuously) for one second or more, the determination result of this step becomes "Yes". If the value stored in the latest sampling signal storage area of the effect button on-off edge signal number storage area is less than the predetermined value (S1704: No), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1705. If the value stored in the latest sampling signal storage area of the effect button on-off edge signal number storage area is greater than or equal to the predetermined value (S1704: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1713.

In step S1705, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not 1 is written in the latest sampling signal storage section of the effect button ON edge storage area. Immediately after the performance button 35 is pressed, the determination result of this step is "Yes". If 1 is written (S1705: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1706. If 0 is written (S1705: No), the process proceeds to step S1713.

In step S1706, the sub CPU 120a adds 1 to the number of consecutive hits NRD in the number of repeated hits storage area of the sub RAM 120c and updates it. After that, the process proceeds to step S1707.

In step S<b>1707 , the sub CPU 120 a determines whether or not the updated number of repeated hits NRD has reached 30. If the number of depressions of the production button 35 after the display of the guide image of "Consecutive hits!" The determination result is "No". If the number of repeated hits NRD has not reached 30 (S1707: No), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1708. If the number of repeated hits NRD has reached 30 (S1707: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1709.

In step S1708, the sub CPU 120a sets the effect progress designation command in the transmission buffer. After that, the process proceeds to step S1712.

Upon receipt of the command set in the transmission buffer in step S1708, the overall control unit 141 and the lamp/drive control unit 150 output an effect of advancing the gauge progress amount of the gauge image to the right by a predetermined amount through the image display device 31 and voice output. The device 32 and the production lighting devices 340a, 340b, 340c, and 340d are caused to execute.

In step S1709, it is confirmed whether or not the rank-up success effect standby flag is set in the rank-up success effect standby flag storage area of the sub-RAM 120c. The rank-up success effect standby flag is set at the start of the 4th round round game in the special game per 8R probability variation. If the rank-up success effect standby flag is set (S1709: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1710. If the rank-up success effect standby flag is not set (S1709: No), the process proceeds to step S1713.

In step S1710, the sub CPU 120a sets an effect pattern specifying command for rank-up failure in the transmission buffer. After that, the process proceeds to step S1713.

Upon receiving the command set in the transmission buffer in step S1710, the overall control unit 141 and the lamp/driving control unit 150 transmit the result notification effect of the rank-up failure effect to the image display device 31, the audio output device 32, and the effect Illumination devices 340a, 340b, 340c, and 340d are caused to execute.

In step S1711, the sub CPU 120a sets an effect pattern specifying command for successful rank up in the transmission buffer. After that, the process proceeds to step S1712.

Upon receiving the command set in the transmission buffer in step S1711, the overall control unit 141 and the lamp/driving control unit 150 transmit the result notification effect of the rank-up success effect to the image display device 31, the audio output device 32, and the effect effect. Illumination devices 340a, 340b, 340c, and 340d are caused to execute.

In step S1712, the sub CPU 120a clears the rank-up effect standby flag storage area of the sub RAM 120c. After that, the process proceeds to step S1713.

In step S1713, the sub CPU 120a generates an operation designation command according to the operation of the effect button 35, cross key 39, or center key 39E, and sets the generated operation designation command in the transmission buffer.

Upon receiving the command set in the transmission buffer in step S1713, the overall control unit 141 and the lamp/driving control unit 150 display an effect corresponding to the operation of the effect button 35, the cross key 39, or the center key 39E on the image display device. 31, the audio output device 32, and the production lighting devices 340a, 340b, 340c, and 340d.

FIG. 74 is a flow chart showing the main processing of the integrated control section 141 of the gaming machine 1. As shown in FIG. The main process is started when a system reset is generated from the power supply board 170 to the supervising CPU 141a by the activation operation.

In FIG. 74, the supervising CPU 141a performs initialization processing (S2010). In the initialization process, the general CPU 141a reads the startup program from the general ROM 141c of the general control unit 141, initializes the flag of the general RAM 141b, and instructs the initial setting of the VDP 145 when the power is turned on.

In the next step S2020, the overall CPU 141a confirms whether or not there is a received command received from the effect control section 120m in the reception buffer. The supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2030 if there is a command in the reception buffer (S2020: Yes), and proceeds to step S2050 if there is no command in the reception buffer (S2020: No).

In step S2030, the overall CPU 141a performs animation pattern setting processing. In the animation pattern setting process, the supervising CPU 141a analyzes the command in the reception buffer, obtains the content of the effect image corresponding to the subsequent series of effects, and the standby time until the display start timing of the effect image, and starts displaying the effect image. At the timing, the animation pattern of each effect image is determined and set. Details of the animation pattern setting process will be described later.

In step S2040, the overall CPU 141a performs sound setting processing. In the sound setting process, the supervising CPU 141a analyzes the commands in the reception buffer, obtains the content of the sound effects corresponding to the subsequent series of effects, and the standby time until the output start timing of the sound effects, and determines the output start timing of the sound effects. , the sound pattern of each effect sound is determined and set. Details of the sound setting process will be described later.

In step S2050, the overall CPU 141a determines whether or not the FB switching flag=01. The FB switching flag is set to 01 if the drawing of the previous display list has been completed at the V blank interrupt every 1/30 second. When the FB switching flag=01 (S2050: Yes), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2060, and when the FB switching flag=01 (S2050: No), the process proceeds to step S2020.

In step S2060, the supervising CPU 141a sets the FB switching flag=00 (turns off the FB switching flag), and proceeds to the next step S2070. In step S2070, the overall CPU 141a performs display list generation/output processing. In the display list generation/output process, the supervising CPU 141 a generates a display list according to the animation pattern set in the animation pattern setting process, and outputs the display list to the VDP 145 . The display list is image shaping information for shaping effect images to be displayed on the image display device 31 .

In step S2080, the supervising CPU 141a performs drawing command processing. In the drawing command process, the overall CPU 141a instructs the VDP 145 to draw an image based on the display list output in the display list generation/output process. In response to this drawing command, the VDP 145 draws the effect image based on the display list in the drawing frame buffer and causes the image display device 31 to display the effect image drawn in the display frame buffer.

In step S2090, the overall CPU 141a performs sound list generation/output processing. In the sound list generation/output process, the overall CPU 141 a generates a sound list composed of sound control commands and outputs the generated sound list to the audio processor 144 . The sound list is audio output information for designating sounds (BGM, sound effects, etc.) such as audio data and music data to be output from the audio output device 32 .

In step S2100, the overall CPU 141a performs voice output command processing. In the audio output command process, the overall CPU 141a instructs the audio control unit to output sound based on the output sound list. By performing this sound output command process, the audio control unit causes the audio output device 32 to output sounds based on the sound list.

In step S2110, the supervising CPU 141a performs animation control processing for updating animation scene information (addresses) for each predetermined animation pattern in preparation for creating a display list for the next frame, and returns to step S2020. Thereafter, the supervising CPU 141a repeats the loop processing from step S2020. In addition to this loop processing, the general CPU 141a executes timer interrupt processing each time the reset clock pulse signal is generated by the reset clock pulse generation circuit.

FIG. 75 is a flow chart showing drawing end interrupt processing of the overall control unit 141 . When the drawing of one frame is completed, the VDP 145 of the overall control unit 141 outputs a drawing end interrupt signal to the overall CPU 141a. When the drawing end interrupt signal is input from the VDP 145, the supervising CPU 141a executes drawing end interrupt processing.

In the drawing end interrupt process, the supervising CPU 141a sets the drawing end flag=01 (step S2210). After that, the current rendering end interrupt process is ended.

FIG. 76 is a flow chart showing V-blank interrupt processing of the integrated control unit 141. As shown in FIG. The VDP 145 of the overall control unit 141 outputs a V blank interrupt signal (vertical synchronization signal) to the overall CPU 141a every 1/30 second. When the V-blank interrupt signal is input from the VDP 145, the supervising CPU 141a executes V-blank interrupt processing.

In the V-blank interrupt process, the overall CPU 141a performs a process of updating various counters such as a scene switching counter, a wait frame, and a frame counter (step S2310). In the next step S2320, the supervising CPU 141a determines whether or not the rendering end flag=01. The drawing end flag is set to 01 if the drawing of a predetermined unit of frames has been completed.

If the drawing end flag=01 (S2320; Yes), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2330, and if the drawing end flag=01 (S2320; No), ends the current V blank interrupt process.

In step S2330, the supervising CPU 141a sets the drawing end flag=00 (turns off the drawing end flag). In step S2340, the supervising CPU 141a instructs the memory controller of the VDP 145 to switch between the "display frame buffer" and the "drawing frame buffer".

In step S2350, the supervising CPU 141a sets the FB switching flag=01 (turns on the FB switching flag), and terminates the current V blank interrupt process. When the general control unit 141 receives an instruction to generate a video signal from the general CPU 141a, the general control unit 141 converts the image data (digital signal) stored in the display frame buffer of the VRAM 147 into an RGB signal (analog signal) representing image data as a video signal. The generated video signal (RGB signal) and the synchronizing signal (vertical synchronizing signal, horizontal synchronizing signal, etc.) for synchronizing with the image display device 31 are output to the image display device 31, and the current V blanking is performed. End interrupt processing.

FIG. 77 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing of the integrated control unit 141. As shown in FIG. The general CPU 141a of the general control unit 141 executes timer interrupt processing every 4 milliseconds, which is the generation period of the reset clock pulse signal in the reset clock pulse generation circuit in the effect control unit 120m.

In the timer interrupt process, the overall CPU 141a performs image control timer update process (S2410). In the image control timer update process, if there is a timer counter set in the animation pattern setting process, the supervising CPU 141a decrements it by 1 and updates it. Details of the image control timer update process will be described later.

In the next step S2420, the overall CPU 141a performs voice control timer update processing. In the voice control timer update process, if there is a timer counter set in the sound setting process, the supervising CPU 141a decrements it by 1 and updates it. Details of the voice control timer update process will be described later.

FIG. 78 is a flow chart showing the main processing of the lamp/drive control section 150. FIG. In FIG. 78, the lamp CPU 150a performs initialization processing (S2510). In the initialization process, the lamp CPU 150a reads a startup program from the lamp ROM 150c of the lamp/drive control unit 150 and initializes flags stored in the lamp ROM 150c when power is turned on.

In the next step S2520, the lamp CPU 150a confirms whether or not there is a received command received from the effect control section 120m in the reception buffer. If there is a command in the reception buffer (S2520: Yes), the lamp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2530, and if there is no command in the reception buffer (S2520: No), it proceeds to step S2550.

In step S2530, the lamp CPU 150a performs lamp emission information setting processing. In the lamp light emission information setting process, the lamp CPU 150a analyzes the commands in the reception buffer, and obtains the light emission contents of the lamps 34a, 34b, 34c, and 34d corresponding to the subsequent series of effects and the standby time until the light emission start timing. , lamp light emission information is determined and set at the light emission start timing of the lamps 34a, 34b, 34c, and 34d. Details of the lamp emission information setting process will be described later.

In step S2540, the lamp CPU 150a performs a role product driving information setting process. In the role driving information setting process, the lamp CPU 150a analyzes the command in the reception buffer, and waits until the driving start timing of the movable accessories 33a, 33b, 33c, and 33d corresponding to the subsequent series of effects. The time is obtained, and the accessory driving information is determined and set at the driving start timing of the movable accessories 33a, 33b, 33c, and 33d. The details of the accessory driving information setting process will be described later.

In step S2550, lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not FB switching flag=01. The FB switching flag is set to 01 if the drawing of the previous display list has been completed at the V blank interrupt every 1/30 second. If the FB switching flag is 01 (S2550: Yes), the lamp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2560, and if the FB switching flag is not 01 (S2550: No), the lamp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2520.

In step S2560, lamp CPU 150a sets the FB switching flag=00 (turns off the FB switching flag), and proceeds to the next step S2570.

In step S2570, the lamp CPU 150a performs lamp control processing. In the lamp control process, the lamp CPU 150a controls the lamps 34a, 34b, 34c, and 34d of the corresponding production lighting devices 340a, 340b, 340c, and 340d in a light emission mode according to the lamp light emission information set in the lamp light emission information setting process. light up.

In step S2580, the lamp CPU 150a performs a role product driving process. In the role product driving process, the lamp CPU 150a drives the movable role products 33a, 33a, 33b, 33c and 33d are driven.

Thereafter, lamp CPU 150a repeats the loop processing from step S2520. In addition to this loop processing, the lamp CPU 150a executes timer interrupt processing each time the reset clock pulse signal is generated by the reset clock pulse generation circuit.

FIG. 79 is a flow chart showing drawing end interrupt processing of the lamp/drive control unit 150 . The VDP 145 of the lamp/drive control unit 150 outputs a drawing end interrupt signal to the lamp CPU 150a when the drawing of one frame is completed. When the drawing end interrupt signal is input from the VDP 145, the lamp CPU 150a executes drawing end interrupt processing.

In the drawing end interrupt process, the lamp CPU 150a sets the drawing end flag=01 (step S2610). After that, the current rendering end interrupt process is ended.

FIG. 80 is a flow chart showing V blank interrupt processing of the lamp/drive control unit 150. As shown in FIG. The VDP 145 of the lamp/drive control unit 150 outputs a V blank interrupt signal (vertical synchronization signal) to the lamp CPU 150a every 1/30 second. When the V-blank interrupt signal is input from the VDP 145, the lamp CPU 150a executes V-blank interrupt processing.

In the V blank interrupt process, the lamp CPU 150a sets the FB switching flag=01 (turns on the FB switching flag) (step S2710). After that, the current V-blank interrupt processing is terminated.

FIG. 81 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing of the lamp/drive control unit 150. FIG. The lamp CPU 150a of the lamp/drive control unit 150 executes timer interrupt processing every 4 milliseconds, which is the generation period of the reset clock pulse signal in the reset clock pulse generation circuit in the effect control unit 120m.

In the timer interrupt processing, the lamp CPU 150a performs lamp control timer update processing (S2810). In the lamp control timer update process, the lamp CPU 150a decrements the timer counter set in the lamp light emission information setting process by one, if any, and updates it. Details of the lamp control timer update process will be described later.

In the next step S2820, the lamp CPU 150a performs a role product control timer update process. In the role product control timer update process, if there is a timer counter set in the role product drive setting process, the lamp CPU 150a decrements it by -1 and updates it. Details of the role product control timer update process will be described later.

82 to 93 are flowcharts showing the details of the animation pattern setting process (step S2040 in FIG. 74) of the overall control unit 141. FIG. In FIG. 82, the supervising CPU 141a confirms whether or not the normal fluctuation effect image displaying flag is set in the normal fluctuation effect image displaying flag storage area of the supervising RAM 141b (S2030-1). The normal fluctuation effect image display flag indicates that (background image of marine stage, savanna stage, cosmo stage, live mode, special training mode, or help mode shown in FIG. 10(b)) is being displayed. is a flag. The normal fluctuation image displaying flag is set in step S2030-61, which will be described later, when an effect pattern specification command for starting a change is received from the effect control unit 120m. If the normal fluctuation effect image displaying flag is set (S2030-1: Yes), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2030-2, and if the normal fluctuation effect image displaying flag is not set (S2030-1: No), go to step S2030-6.

In step S2030-2, the overall CPU 141a performs normal fluctuation effect image control mode determination processing. In the normal fluctuation effect image control mode determination process, the supervising CPU 141a refers to the normal fluctuation effect image control mode determination table in the supervising ROM 141c, and based on the type of the effect pattern designation command in the reception buffer, determines the effect image of the normal fluctuation effect. Determine control mode.

FIG. 94 is a diagram showing a normal fluctuation effect image control mode determination table. In the normal fluctuation production control mode determination table, the type of production pattern designation command that the integrated control unit 141 can receive from the production control unit 120m and the control mode ("end" or "continue") of the production image of the normal fluctuation production are stored. Each set of data shown is stored. The "end" data indicates that the display of the effect image of the normal variable effect is immediately stopped when the corresponding effect pattern specifying command is received, and the "continue" data indicates that the corresponding effect pattern specifying command is received. It indicates that the display of the effect image of the normal fluctuation effect is continued in the case of doing so.

In the next step S2030-3, the overall CPU 141a determines whether the control mode determined in the normal variation effect image control mode determination process is "end" or "continue". If the control mode is "end" (S2030-3: Yes), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2030-4. move on.

In step S2030-4, the overall CPU 141a clears the animation pattern of the normal variation effect. The animation pattern of the normal variation effect is set in step S2030-62, which will be described later, when an effect pattern designation command for starting the variation is received from the effect control unit 120m. When the animation pattern of the normal variation effect is cleared, the image display device 31 displays (the background image of the marine stage, the savanna stage, the cosmo stage, the live mode, the special training mode, or the help mode shown in FIG. 10B). ) is stopped.

In the next step S2030-5, the overall CPU 141a clears the normal fluctuation effect image displaying flag in the overall RAM 141b, and proceeds to step S2030-6.

In step S2030-6, the supervising CPU 141a checks whether or not the step-up effect image displaying flag is set in the step-up effect image displaying flag storage area of the supervising RAM 141b (S2030-6). The step-up effect image displaying flag is a flag indicating that a step-up effect image (photo image shown in FIG. 19) is being displayed. The step-up image displaying flag is set in step S2410-5 of the image control timer updating process (FIGS. 107 to 114) described later when the timing for displaying the effect image of the step-up effect in the variation has arrived. . If the step-up effect image displaying flag is set (S2030-6: Yes), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2030-7, and if the step-up effect image displaying flag is not set (S2030-6: No), go to step S2030-11.

In step S2030-7, the overall CPU 141a performs step-up effect image control mode determination processing. In the step-up effect image control mode determination process, the supervising CPU 141a refers to the step-up effect image control mode determination table in the supervising ROM 141c, and determines the effect image of the step-up effect based on the type of effect pattern designation command in the reception buffer. Determine control mode.

FIG. 95 is a diagram showing a step-up effect image control mode determination table. In the step-up effect control mode determination table, the type of effect pattern designation command that the integrated control unit 141 can receive from the effect control unit 120m and the control mode ("end" or "continue") of the effect image of the step-up effect are stored. Each set of data shown is stored. The "end" data indicates that the display of the effect image of the step-up effect is immediately stopped when the corresponding effect pattern specifying command is received, and the "continue" data indicates that the corresponding effect pattern specifying command is received. It indicates that the display of the effect image of the step-up effect is continued when the step-up effect is performed.

In the next step S2030-8, the supervising CPU 141a determines whether the control mode determined in the step-up effect image control mode determination process is "end" or "continue". If the control mode is "end" (S2030-8: Yes), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2030-9; move on.

In step S2030-9, the overall CPU 141a clears the animation pattern of the step-up effect. The animation pattern of the step-up effect is set in step S2410-7 of the image control timer update process (FIGS. 107 to 114) described later when the timing for displaying the effect image of the step-up effect in the variation has arrived. . When the step-up effect animation pattern is cleared, the image display device 31 stops displaying the step-up effect effect image (the photo image shown in FIG. 19).

In the next step S2030-10, the supervising CPU 141a clears the step-up effect image displaying flag of the supervising RAM 141b, and proceeds to step S2030-11.

In step S2030-11, the supervising CPU 141a checks whether or not the normal reach effect image displaying flag is set in the normal reach effect image displaying flag storage area of the supervising RAM 141b. The normal reach effect image display flag is a flag indicating that the normal reach effect image (background image of the adventure shown in FIG. 15) is being displayed. The normal ready-to-win image displaying flag is set in step S2030-96, which will be described later, when a ready-to-win effect pattern specification command is received from the effect control unit 120m. If the normal reach effect image displaying flag is set (S2030-11: Yes), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2030-12, and if the normal reach effect image displaying flag is not set (S2030-11: No). , to step S2030-16.

In step S2030-12, the overall CPU 141a performs normal reach effect image control mode determination processing. In the normal reach effect image control mode determination process, the supervising CPU 141a refers to the normal reach effect image control mode determination table in the supervising ROM 141c, and determines the control mode of the normal reach effect effect image based on the type of effect pattern designation command in the reception buffer. decide.

FIG. 96 is a diagram showing a normal reach effect image control mode determination table. The normal reach effect control mode determination table contains data indicating the type of effect pattern designation command that the overall control unit 141 can receive from the effect control unit 120m and the control mode ("end" or "continue") of the effect image of the normal reach effect. are stored. The "end" data indicates that the display of the effect image of the normal reach effect is immediately stopped when the corresponding effect pattern designation command is received, and the "continue" data indicates that the corresponding effect pattern designation command is received. In this case, it indicates that the display of the effect image of the normal ready-to-win effect is continued.

In the next step S2030-13, the supervising CPU 141a determines whether the control mode determined in the normal reach effect image control mode determination process is "end" or "continue". If the control mode is "end" (S2030-13: Yes), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2030-14. move on.

In step S2030-14, the supervising CPU 141a clears the normal reach animation pattern. The normal ready-to-win effect animation pattern is set in step S2030-95, which will be described later, when a ready-to-win effect pattern specification command is received from the effect control unit 120m. When the animation pattern of the normal reach effect is cleared, the image display device 31 stops displaying the effect image of the normal reach effect (the background image of the adventure shown in FIG. 15).

In the next step S2030-15, the supervising CPU 141a clears the normal reach effect image displaying flag of the supervising RAM 141b, and proceeds to step S2030-16.

In step S2030-16, the supervising CPU 141a checks whether or not the character appearance effect image displaying flag is set in the character appearance effect image displaying flag storage area of the supervising RAM 141b (S2030-16). The character appearance effect image display flag is a flag indicating that the character appearance effect image (character image shown in FIG. 21) is being displayed. The character appearance image displaying flag is set in step S2410-11 of the image control timer update process (FIGS. 107 to 114) described later when the display timing of the effect image of the character appearance effect in the variation has arrived. . If the character appearance effect image displaying flag is set (S2030-16: Yes), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2030-17, and if the character appearance effect image displaying flag is not set (S2030-16: No), go to step S2030-23.

In step S2030-17, the supervising CPU 141a confirms whether or not the premium character image flag is set in the premium character image flag storage area of the supervising RAM 141b. The premium character image flag is set in step S2030-68, which will be described later, when the character appearing in the character appearance effect is a premium character. If the premium character image flag is set (S2030-17: Yes), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2030-18; if the premium character image flag is not set (S2030-17: No), step S2030- Go to 19.

In step S2030-18, the overall CPU 141a performs premium character appearance effect image control mode determination processing. In the premium character appearance effect image control mode determination process, the supervising CPU 141a refers to the premium character appearance effect image control mode determination table in the supervising ROM 141c, and determines the character appearance of the premium character based on the type of effect pattern designation command in the reception buffer. The control mode of the effect image of the effect is determined.

FIG. 97 is a diagram showing a premium character appearance effect image control mode determination table. The premium character appearance effect control mode determination table includes the types of effect pattern designation commands that the overall control unit 141 can receive from the effect control unit 120m, and the control mode of the effect image of the character appearance effect in which the premium character appears ("End"). or "continuation") are stored. The "end" data indicates that the display of the effect image of the character appearance effect in which the premium character appears is immediately stopped when the corresponding effect pattern designation command is received, and the "continue" data indicates that the corresponding effect pattern designation command is received. It indicates that the display of the effect image of the character appearance effect in which the premium character appears is continued when the pattern designation command is received.

In step S2030-19, the overall CPU 141a performs character appearance effect image control mode determination processing. In the character appearance effect image control mode determination process, the supervising CPU 141a refers to the premium character appearance effect image control mode determination table in the supervising ROM 141c, and selects character A, B, or The control mode of the effect image of the character appearance effect of C is determined.

FIG. 98 is a diagram showing a character appearance effect image control mode determination table. In the character appearance effect control mode determination table, the types of effect pattern designation commands that can be received by the overall control unit 141 from the effect control unit 120m and the control mode ("end" or "continue") of the effect image of the character appearance effect are stored. Each set of data shown is stored. The "end" data indicates that the display of the effect image of the character appearance effect is immediately stopped when the corresponding effect pattern specifying command is received, and the "continue" data indicates that the corresponding effect pattern specifying command is received. It indicates that the display of the effect image of the character appearance effect is continued when the character appearance effect is performed.

In step S2030-20, the supervising CPU 141a determines whether the control mode determined in the premium character appearance effect control mode determination process or the character appearance effect image control mode determination process is "end" or "continue". . If the control mode is "end" (S2030-20: Yes), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2030-21; move on.

In step S2030-21, the supervising CPU 141a clears the animation pattern of the character appearance effect. The animation pattern for the character appearance effect is set in step S2410-13 of the image control timer update process (FIGS. 107 to 114), which will be described later, when the timing for displaying the effect image for the character appearance effect in the variation has arrived. . When the animation pattern for the character appearance effect is cleared, the image display device 31 stops displaying the character appearance effect image (character image shown in FIG. 21).

In the next step S2030-22, the supervising CPU 141a clears the character appearance effect image displaying flag of the supervising RAM 141b, and proceeds to step S2030-23.

In step S2030-23, the supervising CPU 141a checks whether or not the roulette effect image displaying flag is set in the roulette effect image displaying flag storage area of the supervising RAM 141b (S2030-23). The roulette effect image display flag is a flag indicating that the roulette effect image (the roulette image shown in FIG. 23) is being displayed. The roulette image display flag is set in step S2410-17 of the image control timer update process (FIGS. 107 to 114) described later when the timing for displaying the effect image of the roulette effect in the variation has arrived. If the roulette effect image displaying flag is set (S2030-23: Yes), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2030-24, and if the roulette effect image displaying flag is not set (S2030-23: No). , to step S2030-28.

In step S2030-24, the overall CPU 141a performs roulette effect image control mode determination processing. In the roulette effect image control mode determination process, the overall CPU 141a refers to the roulette effect image control mode determination table in the overall ROM 141c, and determines the control mode of the roulette effect image control mode based on the type of effect pattern designation command in the reception buffer. decide.

FIG. 99 is a diagram showing a roulette effect image control mode determination table. The roulette effect control mode determination table contains data indicating the types of effect pattern designation commands that the overall control unit 141 can receive from the effect control unit 120m and the control mode ("end" or "continue") of the effect image of the roulette effect. are stored. The "end" data indicates that the display of the effect image of the roulette effect is immediately stopped when the corresponding effect pattern designation command is received, and the "continue" data indicates that the corresponding effect pattern designation command is received. In this case, it indicates that the display of the effect image of the roulette effect is continued.

In the next step S2030-25, the overall CPU 141a determines whether the control mode determined in the roulette effect image control mode determination process is "end" or "continue". If the control mode is "end" (S2030-25: Yes), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2030-26. move on.

In step S2030-26, the overall CPU 141a clears the animation pattern of the roulette effect. The animation pattern of the roulette effect is set in step S2410-19 of the image control timer update process (FIGS. 107 to 114) described later when the display timing of the effect image of the roulette effect in the variation comes. When the animation pattern for the roulette effect is cleared, the image display device 31 stops displaying the effect image for the roulette effect (the roulette image shown in FIG. 23).

In the next step S2030-27, the overall CPU 141a clears the roulette effect image displaying flag in the overall RAM 141b, and proceeds to step S2030-28.

In step S2030-28, the supervising CPU 141a confirms whether or not the flag during SP development stimulating effect image display is set in the flag storage area for the SP developing stimulating effect image displaying flag of the supervising RAM 141b. The flag during display of the SP development fan effect image is a flag indicating that the SP development fan effect image (the sandstorm effect image shown in FIG. 25) is being displayed. The flag during display of the SP development hype image is set in step S2410-23 of the image control timer update process (FIGS. 107 to 114) to be described later when the display timing of the effect image of the SP development hype effect in the variation has arrived. be done. If the SP development inflection effect image displaying flag is set (S2030-28: Yes), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2030-29, and if the SP development inflection effect image display flag is not set (S2030- 28: No), go to step S2030-33.

In step S2030-29, the supervising CPU 141a performs a process of determining the mode of control of the SP development fan effect image control mode. In the SP development stimulus effect image control mode determination process, the supervising CPU 141a refers to the SP development stimulus effect image control mode determination table in the supervising ROM 141c, and based on the type of the performance pattern designation command in the reception buffer, determines the SP development stimulus effect image control mode determination process. Determines the mode of control of the effect image.

FIG. 100 is a diagram showing an SP development fan effect image control mode determination table. The SP development fan effect control mode determination table includes the types of effect pattern designation commands that can be received by the overall control unit 141 from the effect control unit 120m and the control mode of the effect image of the SP development fan effect ("end" or "continue"). ) are stored. The "end" data indicates that the display of the effect image of the SP development fan effect is immediately stopped when the corresponding effect pattern specifying command is received, and the "continue" data indicates that the corresponding effect pattern specifying command is to be stopped. When received, it indicates that the display of the effect image of the SP development fan effect is continued.

In the next step S2030-30, the supervising CPU 141a determines whether the control mode determined in the SP development fan effect image control mode determination process is "end" or "continue". If the control mode is "end" (S2030-30: Yes), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2030-31; move on.

In step S2030-31, the supervising CPU 141a clears the animation pattern of the SP development inciting effect. The animation pattern of the SP development stimulus effect is set in step S2410-25 of the image control timer update process (FIGS. 107 to 114) described later when the display timing of the effect image of the SP development stimulus effect in the variation has arrived. be done. When the SP development animation pattern is cleared, the image display device 31 stops displaying the SP development animation effect image (the sandstorm effect image shown in FIG. 25).

In the next step S2030-32, the supervising CPU 141a clears the flag of the supervising RAM 141b during display of the SP development stimulating effect image display, and proceeds to step S2030-33.

In step S2030-33, the supervising CPU 141a confirms whether or not the SP development finalized effect image displaying flag is set in the SP development finalized effect image displaying flag storage area of the supervising RAM 141b. The SP development fixed effect image displaying flag is a flag indicating that the SP development fixed effect effect image (the bubble effect image shown in FIG. 27) is being displayed. The SP development fixed image displaying flag is set in step S2410-29 of the image control timer updating process (FIGS. 107 to 114) described later when the display timing of the effect image of the SP development fixed effect in the variation has arrived. be done. If the SP development fixed effect image displaying flag is set (S2030-33: Yes), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2030-34, and if the SP development fixed effect image displaying flag is not set (S2030- 33: No), go to step S2030-38.

In step S2030-34, the supervising CPU 141a performs SP development finalization effect image control mode determination processing. In the SP development finalized effect image control mode determination process, the supervising CPU 141a refers to the SP development finalized effect image control mode determination table in the supervising ROM 141c, and based on the type of effect pattern designation command in the reception buffer, determines the SP development finalized effect. Determines the mode of control of the effect image.

FIG. 101 is a diagram showing an SP development fixed effect image control mode determination table. The SP development fixed effect control mode determination table includes the types of effect pattern designation commands that can be received by the overall control unit 141 from the effect control unit 120m, and the control mode of the SP development fixed effect effect image ("end" or "continue"). ) are stored. The "end" data indicates that the display of the effect image of the SP development fixed effect is immediately stopped when the corresponding effect pattern designation command is received, and the "continue" data indicates that the corresponding effect pattern designation command is stopped. It indicates that the display of the effect image of the SP development fixed effect is continued when it is received.

In the next step S2030-35, the supervising CPU 141a determines whether the control mode determined in the SP development fixed effect image control mode determination process is "end" or "continue". If the control mode is "end" (S2030-35: Yes), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2030-36; move on.

In step S2030-36, the supervising CPU 141a clears the animation pattern of the SP development fixed effect. The animation pattern of the fixed SP development effect is set in step S2410-31 of the image control timer update process (FIGS. 107 to 114) to be described later when the display timing of the effect image of the fixed SP development effect in the variation has arrived. be done. When the animation pattern for the fixed SP development effect is cleared, the display of the effect image for the fixed SP development effect (the bubble effect image shown in FIG. 27) on the image display device 31 is stopped.

In the next step S2030-37, the supervising CPU 141a clears the SP development fixed effect image displaying flag of the supervising RAM 141b, and proceeds to step S2030-38.

In step S2030-38, the supervising CPU 141a checks whether or not the SP reach effect image displaying flag is set in the SP reach effect image displaying flag storage area of the supervising RAM 141b. The SP ready-to-win effect image display flag is a flag indicating that the SP ready-to-win effect image (the image of the battle animation shown in FIG. 17) is being displayed. The SP reach image displaying flag is set in step S2030-93 to be described later when an effect pattern specifying command for developing to the SP reach effect is received from the effect control unit 120m. If the SP reach effect image displaying flag is set (S2030-38: Yes), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2030-39, and if the SP reach effect image displaying flag is not set (S2030-38: No), go to step S2030-43.

In step S2030-39, the overall CPU 141a performs SP reach effect image control mode determination processing. In the SP ready-to-win effect image control mode determination process, the overall CPU 141a refers to the SP ready-to-win effect image control mode determination table in the overall ROM 141c, and determines the effect image of the SP ready-to-win effect based on the type of the effect pattern designation command in the reception buffer. Determine control mode.

FIG. 102 is a diagram showing an SP reach effect image control mode determination table. The SP ready-to-win effect control mode determination table includes the type of effect pattern designation command that can be received by the overall control unit 141 from the effect control unit 120m and the control mode ("end" or "continue") of the effect image of the SP ready-to-win effect. Each set of data shown is stored. The "end" data indicates that the display of the effect image of the SP ready-to-win effect is immediately stopped when the corresponding effect pattern specifying command is received, and the "continue" data indicates that the corresponding effect pattern specifying command is received. It indicates that the display of the effect image of the SP ready-to-win effect is continued in the case of doing so.

In the next step S2030-40, the supervising CPU 141a determines whether the control mode determined in the SP reach effect image control mode determination process is "end" or "continue". If the control mode is "end" (S2030-40: Yes), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2030-41; move on.

In step S2030-41, the supervising CPU 141a clears the animation pattern of the SP reach effect. The SP ready-to-win effect animation pattern is set in step S2030-100, which will be described later, when an effect pattern specification command for developing to the SP ready-to-win effect is received from the effect control unit 120m. When the SP ready-to-win effect animation pattern is cleared, the image display device 31 stops displaying the SP ready-to-win effect effect image (the battle animation image shown in FIG. 17).

In the next step S2030-42, the overall CPU 141a clears the SP reach effect image displaying flag in the overall RAM 141b, and proceeds to step S2030-43.

In step S2030-43, the supervising CPU 141a checks whether or not the cut-in effect image displaying flag is set in the cut-in effect image displaying flag storage area of the supervising RAM 141b. The cut-in effect image display flag is a flag indicating that a cut-in effect image (the cut-in image shown in FIG. 29) is being displayed. The cut-in image displaying flag is set in step S2410-35 of the image control timer updating process (FIGS. 107 to 114), which will be described later, when the display timing of the effect image of the cut-in effect in the variation has arrived. . If the cut-in effect image displaying flag is set (S2030-43: Yes), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2030-44, and if the cut-in effect image displaying flag is not set (S2030-43: No), go to step S2030-50.

In step S2030-44, the supervising CPU 141a checks whether or not the premium cut-in image flag is set in the premium cut-in image flag storage area of the supervising RAM 141b. The premium cut-in image flag is set in step S2030-82, which will be described later, when the background of the cut-in effect is a rainbow background. If the premium cut-in image flag is set (S2030-44: Yes), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2030-45; if the premium cut-in image flag is not set (S2030-44: No), step Proceed to S2030-46.

In step S2030-45, the overall CPU 141a performs premium cut-in effect image control mode determination processing. In the premium cut-in effect image control mode determination process, the supervising CPU 141a refers to the premium cut-in effect image control mode determination table in the supervising ROM 141c, and cuts the rainbow background based on the type of effect pattern designation command in the reception buffer. A control mode of the effect image of the in effect is determined.

FIG. 103 is a diagram showing a premium cut-in effect image control mode determination table. The premium cut-in effect control mode determination table includes the types of effect pattern designation commands that the overall control unit 141 can receive from the effect control unit 120m, and the control mode of the effect image of the cut-in effect with a rainbow background ("end" or Each set of data indicating "continuation") is stored. The "end" data indicates that the display of the effect image of the rainbow-colored background cut-in effect is immediately stopped when the corresponding effect pattern designation command is received, and the "continue" data indicates that the corresponding effect pattern is displayed. It indicates that the display of the effect image of the rainbow background cut-in effect is continued when the specified command is received.

In step S2030-46, the overall CPU 141a performs cut-in effect image control mode determination processing. In the cut-in effect image control mode determination process, the supervising CPU 141a refers to the premium cut-in effect image control mode determination table in the supervising ROM 141c, and selects green, red, or zebra based on the type of effect pattern designation command in the reception buffer. The control mode of the effect image of the cut-in effect of the background of the pattern is determined.

FIG. 104 is a diagram showing a cut-in effect image control mode determination table. In the cut-in effect control mode determination table, the types of effect pattern designation commands that can be received by the overall control unit 141 from the effect control unit 120m and the control mode ("end" or "continue") of the effect image of the cut-in effect are stored. Each set of data shown is stored. The "end" data indicates that the display of the effect image of the cut-in effect is immediately stopped when the corresponding effect pattern specifying command is received, and the "continue" data indicates that the corresponding effect pattern specifying command is received. It indicates that the display of the effect image of the cut-in effect is continued when the

In step S2030-47, the supervising CPU 141a determines whether the control mode determined in the premium cut-in effect control mode determination process or the cut-in effect image control mode determination process is "end" or "continue". . If the control mode is "end" (S2030-47: Yes), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2030-48. move on.

In step S2030-48, the overall CPU 141a clears the cut-in effect animation pattern. The animation pattern of the cut-in effect is set in step S2410-37 of the image control timer update process (FIGS. 107 to 114) described later when the timing for displaying the effect image of the cut-in effect in the variation has arrived. . When the animation pattern for the cut-in effect is cleared, the image display device 31 stops displaying the effect image for the cut-in effect (the cut-in image shown in FIG. 29).

In the next step S2030-49, the supervising CPU 141a clears the cut-in effect image displaying flag of the supervising RAM 141b, and proceeds to step S2030-50.

In step S2030-50, the supervising CPU 141a confirms whether or not the confirmed role product actuation first effect image displaying flag is set in the decided role actuation first effect image displaying flag storage area of the supervising RAM 141b. The fixed role product actuation first effect image displaying flag is a flag indicating that the effect image (yellow lightning bolt image shown in FIG. 31) of the fixed role product actuation first effect is being displayed. The fixed role product operation first effect image displaying flag is set when the display timing of the fixed role product operation first effect image display timing in the variation comes. It is set in step S2410-41. The supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2030-51 when the confirmed role product operation first effect image displaying flag is set (S2030-50: Yes), and the confirmed role product operation first effect image display flag is set. If not (S2030-50: No), proceed to step S2030-55.

In step S2030-51, the supervising CPU 141a performs a fixed accessory actuation first effect image control mode determination process. In the fixed role product operation first effect image control mode determination process, the overall CPU 141a refers to the fixed role product operation first effect image control mode determination table in the overall ROM 141c, and based on the type of effect pattern designation command in the reception buffer , determines the control mode of the effect image of the fixed accessory actuation first effect.

FIG. 105 is a diagram showing a fixed accessory actuation first effect image control mode determination table. In the fixed role actuation first effect control mode determination table, the type of effect pattern designation command that the overall control unit 141 can receive from the effect control part 120m and the control mode of the effect image of the fixed role actuation first effect (" Each set of data indicating "end" or "continue") is stored. The data of "end" indicates that the display of the effect image of the first effect of the confirmed accessory operation is immediately stopped when the corresponding effect pattern designation command is received, and the data of "continue" indicates that the effect pattern of the corresponding effect is to be displayed. It indicates that the display of the effect image of the fixed accessory operation first effect is continued when the specified command is received.

In the next step S2030-52, the supervising CPU 141a determines whether the control mode determined in the fixed accessory actuation first effect image control mode determination process is "end" or "continue". If the control mode is "end" (S2030-52: Yes), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2030-53; move on.

In step S2030-53, the supervising CPU 141a clears the animation pattern of the fixed accessory actuation first effect. The animation pattern of the fixed role actuation first effect is executed in steps of image control timer update processing (FIGS. 107 to 114), which will be described later, when the display timing of the effect image of the fixed role actuation first effect in the variation comes. Set in S2410-43. When the animation pattern of the confirmed role actuation first effect is cleared, the display of the effect image (the yellow lightning bolt image shown in FIG. 31) of the confirmed role actuation first effect is stopped on the image display device 31. .

In the next step S2030-54, the supervising CPU 141a clears the flag of the determined role product operation first effect image displaying flag in the supervising RAM 141b, and proceeds to step S2030-55.

In step S2030-55, the supervising CPU 141a confirms whether or not the flag for the second determined role product actuation image being displayed is set in the flag storage area for the second determined role product actuation image being displayed flag of the overall RAM 141b. The fixed role product operation second effect image displaying flag is a flag indicating that the effect image of the fixed role product operation second effect (golden lightning bolt image shown in FIG. 31) is being displayed. The fixed role product operation second effect image displaying flag is set when the display timing of the fixed role product operation second effect image in the variation comes. It is set in step S2410-47. If the flag for displaying the second effect image in operation of the confirmed role is set (S2030-55: Yes), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2030-56, and the flag of the second effect image in operation of the confirmed role is set. If not (S2030-55: No), proceed to step S2030-60.

In step S2030-56, the supervising CPU 141a performs a confirmed accessory actuation second effect image control mode determination process. In the confirmed role product operation second effect image control mode determination process, the overall CPU 141a refers to the confirmed role product operation second effect image control mode determination table in the overall ROM 141c, and based on the type of effect pattern designation command in the reception buffer , to determine the control mode of the effect image of the confirmed accessory actuation second effect.

FIG. 106 is a diagram showing a determined accessory actuation second effect image control mode determination table. The determined role actuation second effect control mode determination table includes the types of effect pattern designation commands that can be received by the overall control unit 141 from the effect control unit 120m and the control mode of the effect image of the determined role actuation second effect (" Each set of data indicating "end" or "continue") is stored. The "end" data indicates that the display of the effect image of the confirmed accessory actuation second effect is immediately stopped when the corresponding effect pattern designation command is received, and the "continue" data indicates that the corresponding effect pattern designation command is received. It indicates that the display of the effect image of the confirmed accessory actuation second effect is continued when the specified command is received.

In the next step S2030-57, the supervising CPU 141a determines whether the control mode determined in the confirmed accessory actuation second effect image control mode determination process is "end" or "continue". If the control mode is "end" (S2030-57: Yes), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2030-58. move on.

In step S2030-58, the supervising CPU 141a clears the animation pattern of the confirmed accessory actuation second effect. The animation pattern of the confirmed role actuation second effect is executed in steps of image control timer update processing (FIGS. 107 to 114) to be described later when the display timing of the effect image of the confirmed role actuation second effect in the variation comes. Set in S2410-49. When the animation pattern of the confirmed role actuation second effect is cleared, the display of the effect image (golden lightning bolt image shown in FIG. 31) of the confirmed role actuation second effect is stopped on the image display device 31. .

In the next step S2030-59, the supervising CPU 141a clears the flag of the confirmed role product operation second effect image displaying flag of the supervising RAM 141b, and proceeds to step S2030-60.

In step S2030-60, the overall CPU 141a determines whether or not the command in the reception buffer is a variation start production pattern designation command. If the command in the reception buffer is a production pattern designation command for starting fluctuation (S2030-60: Yes), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2030-61; ) and proceed to step S2030-91.

In step S2030-61, the overall CPU 141a sets a normal variation effect image displaying flag in the normal variation effect image displaying flag storage area of the overall RAM 141b.

In the next step S2030-62, the supervising CPU 141a sets the animation pattern for the normal variation effects. After that, the image display device 31 displays (the background image of the marine stage, the savanna stage, the Cosmo stage, the live mode, the special training mode, or the help mode shown in FIG. 10B).

In the next step S2030-63, the supervising CPU 141a analyzes the effect pattern specifying command for starting the variation, and determines whether or not there is a step-up effect in the series of effects to be executed in the variation. If there is a step-up effect (S2030-63: Yes), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2030-64, and if there is no step-up effect (S2030-63: No), it proceeds to step S2030-66.

In the next step S2030-64, the overall CPU 141a sets a step-up effect image standby flag in the step-up effect image standby flag storage area of the overall RAM 141b.

In the next step S2030-65, the supervising CPU 141a obtains the remaining time until the display timing of the effect image of the step-up effect, divides this time by 2 milliseconds, which is the generation cycle of the reset clock pulse, and divides the value into the supervising RAM 141b. step-up effect image standby timer counter.

In the next step S2030-66, the supervising CPU 141a analyzes the variation start effect pattern specifying command, and determines whether or not there is a character appearance effect in the series of effects to be executed in the variation. If there is a character appearance effect (S2030-66: Yes), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2030-67, and if there is no character appearance effect (S2030-66: No), it proceeds to step S2030-71.

In step S2030-67, the supervising CPU 141a determines whether or not the character appearing in the character appearance effect is a premium character. If a premium character appears (S2030-67: Yes), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2030-68, and if a character other than the premium character appears (S2030-67: No), proceeds to step S2030-69.

In step S2030-68, the supervising CPU 141a sets a premium character image flag in the premium character image flag storage area of the supervising RAM 141b.

In the next step S2030-69, the supervising CPU 141a sets a character appearance effect image standby flag in the character appearance effect image standby flag storage area of the supervising RAM 141b.

In the next step S2030-70, the supervising CPU 141a obtains the remaining time until the display timing of the effect image of the character appearance effect, divides this time by 2 milliseconds, which is the generation cycle of the reset clock pulse, and divides the value into the supervising RAM 141b. character appearance effect image standby timer counter.

In the next step S2030-71, the supervising CPU 141a analyzes the effect pattern designation command for starting the variation, and determines whether or not there is a roulette effect in the series of effects to be executed in the variation. The supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2030-72 if there is a roulette effect (S2030-71: Yes), and proceeds to step S2030-74 if there is no roulette effect (S2030-71: No).

In the next step S2030-72, the overall CPU 141a sets a roulette effect image standby flag in the roulette effect image standby flag storage area of the overall RAM 141b.

In the next step S2030-73, the supervising CPU 141a obtains the remaining time until the display timing of the effect image of the roulette effect, divides this time by 2 milliseconds, which is the generation cycle of the reset clock pulse, and saves the value in the supervising RAM 141b. Set the roulette effect image standby timer counter.

In the next step S2030-74, the supervising CPU 141a analyzes the variation start effect pattern designation command, and determines whether or not there is an SP development fan effect in the series of effects to be executed in the variation. The supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2030-75 if there is an SP development stimulating effect (S2030-74: Yes), and proceeds to step S2030-77 if there is no SP development stimulating effect (S2030-74: No).

In the next step S2030-75, the supervising CPU 141a sets the SP development stimulating effect image waiting flag in the SP developing stimulating effect image standby flag storage area of the supervising RAM 141b.

In the next step S2030-76, the supervising CPU 141a obtains the remaining time until the display timing of the effect image of the SP development fan effect, and supervises the value obtained by dividing this time by 2 milliseconds, which is the generation cycle of the reset clock pulse. It is set in the SP development fan effect image waiting timer counter of the RAM 141b.

In the next step S2030-77, the supervising CPU 141a analyzes the variation start effect pattern specifying command, and determines whether or not there is an SP development fixed effect in the series of effects to be executed in the variation. The supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2030-78 when there is an SP development fixed effect (S2030-77: Yes), and proceeds to step S2030-80 when there is no SP development fixed effect (S2030-77: No).

In the next step S2030-78, the overall CPU 141a sets the SP development finalized effect image standby flag in the SP development finalized effect image standby flag storage area of the overall RAM 141b.

In the next step S2030-79, the supervising CPU 141a obtains the remaining time until the display timing of the effect image of the SP development finalizing effect, and supervises the value obtained by dividing this time by 2 milliseconds, which is the generation cycle of the reset clock pulse. It is set in the SP development fixed effect image waiting timer counter of the RAM 141b.

In the next step S2030-80, the supervising CPU 141a analyzes the effect pattern designation command for starting the variation, and determines whether or not there is a cut-in effect in the series of effects to be executed in the variation. The supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2030-81 if there is a cut-in effect (S2030-80: Yes), and proceeds to step S2030-85 if there is no cut-in effect (S2030-80: No).

In step S2030-81, the overall CPU 141a determines whether or not the background of the cut-in effect is rainbow colored. If the background is rainbow colored (S2030-81: Yes), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2030-82, and if the background is not rainbow colored (S2030-81: No), proceeds to step S2030-83.

In step S2030-82, the supervising CPU 141a sets a premium cut-in image flag in the premium cut-in image flag storage area of the supervising RAM 141b.

In the next step S2030-83, the overall CPU 141a sets the cut-in effect image standby flag in the cut-in effect image standby flag storage area of the overall RAM 141b.

In the next step S2030-84, the supervising CPU 141a obtains the remaining time until the display timing of the effect image of the cut-in effect, divides this time by 2 milliseconds, which is the generation cycle of the reset clock pulse, and divides the value into the supervising RAM 141b. is set in the cut-in effect image waiting timer counter.

In the next step S2030-85, the supervising CPU 141a analyzes the production pattern designation command for starting the variation, and determines whether or not there is a fixed accessory actuation first production in the series of productions to be executed in the variation. . The supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2030-86 if there is a fixed role actuation first effect (S2030-85: Yes), and if there is no fixed role actuation first effect (S2030-85: No), step S2030- Proceed to 88.

In the next step S2030-86, the supervising CPU 141a sets the confirmed role actuation first effect image waiting flag in the decided role actuation first effect image waiting flag storage area of the supervising RAM 141b.

In the next step S2030-87, the supervising CPU 141a obtains the remaining time until the display timing of the effect image of the fixed accessory actuation first effect, and divides this time by 2 milliseconds, which is the generation cycle of the reset clock pulse. A value is set in the finalized role product operation first effect image standby timer counter of the overall RAM 141b.

In the next step S2030-88, the supervising CPU 141a analyzes the production pattern designation command for starting the variation, and determines whether or not there is a second production of the confirmed role product operation in the series of productions to be executed in the variation. . The supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2030-89 if there is a confirmed role actuation second effect (S2030-88: Yes), and if there is no confirmed role actuation second effect (S2030-88: No), step S2030- Go to 91.

In the next step S2030-89, the supervising CPU 141a sets the confirmed role product actuation second effect image waiting flag in the decided role product actuation second effect image waiting flag storage area of the supervising RAM 141b.

In the next step S2030-90, the supervising CPU 141a obtains the remaining time until the display timing of the effect image of the confirmed accessory actuation second effect, and divides this time by 2 milliseconds, which is the generation cycle of the reset clock pulse. A value is set in the finalized accessory actuation second effect image standby timer counter of the overall RAM 141b.

In the next step S2030-91, the overall CPU 141a determines whether or not the command in the reception buffer is the command for designating the effect pattern for finalizing the design. If the command in the reception buffer is not a pattern confirmation effect pattern designation command (S2030-91: No), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2030-92, and if it is a symbol confirmation effect pattern designation command (S2030-91: Yes ) and proceed to step S2030-98.

In step S2030-92, the overall CPU 141a determines whether or not the command in the reception buffer is an effect pattern designation command for developing to the SP ready-to-win effect. If the command in the reception buffer is an effect pattern designation command for development to the SP ready-to-win effect (S2030-92: Yes), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2030-93 to determine that the command is not an effect pattern designation command to develop to the SP ready-to-win effect. If so (S2030-92: No), the process proceeds to step S2030-95.

In step S2030-93, the supervising CPU 141a sets the SP reach effect image displaying flag in the SP reach effect image displaying flag storage area of the supervising RAM 141b.

In the next step S2030-94, the supervising CPU 141a sets an animation pattern for the SP ready-to-win effect, and proceeds to step S2030-101. After that, the image display device 31 displays the effect image of the SP ready-to-win effect (the image of the battle animation shown in FIG. 17).

In step S2030-95, the overall CPU 141a determines whether or not the command in the reception buffer is a ready-to-win effect pattern specifying command. If the command in the reception buffer is a ready-to-win effect pattern designation command (S2030-95: Yes), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2030-96, and if it is not a ready-to-win effect pattern designation command (S2030-95: No). , go to step S2030-105.

In step S2030-96, the supervising CPU 141a sets the normal reach effect image displaying flag in the normal reach effect image displaying flag storage area of the supervising RAM 141b.

At the next step S2030-97, the supervising CPU 141a sets the animation pattern of the normal ready-to-win effect, and proceeds to step S2030-103. After that, the image display device 31 displays the effect image of the normal reach effect (the animation image of the state of the adventure shown in FIG. 15).

In step S2030-98, the supervising CPU 141a sets the animation pattern for design confirmation effect, and proceeds to step S2030-99. After that, the image display device 31 displays a design confirmation effect image (an image in which the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, the right symbol 36R, and the fourth symbol 36Z are completely stopped).

In step S2030-99, the supervising CPU 141a confirms whether or not the SP reach effect image displaying flag is set in the SP reach effect image displaying flag storage area of the supervising RAM 141b. If the SP reach effect image displaying flag is set (2030-99: Yes), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2030-100, and if the SP reach effect image displaying flag is not set (2030-99: No), go to step S2030-101.

In step S2030-100, the overall CPU 141a clears the SP reach effect image displaying flag, and proceeds to step S2030-101.

In step S2030-101, the supervising CPU 141a confirms whether or not the normal reach effect image displaying flag is set in the normal reach effect image displaying flag storage area of the supervising RAM 141b. If the normal reach effect image displaying flag is set (S2030-101: Yes), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2030-102, and if the normal reach effect image displaying flag is not set (S2030-101: No). , go to step S2030-103.

In step S2030-102, the overall CPU 141a clears the normal reach effect image displaying flag, and proceeds to step S2030-103.

In step S2030-103, the supervising CPU 141a confirms whether or not the normal fluctuation effect image displaying flag is set in the normal fluctuation image displaying flag storage area of the supervising RAM 141b. If the normal fluctuation effect image displaying flag is set (S2030-103: Yes), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2030-104, and if the normal fluctuation effect image displaying flag is not set (S2030-103: No), go to step S2030-105.

In step S2030-104, the overall CPU 141a clears the normal fluctuation effect image displaying flag, and proceeds to step S2030-105.

In step S2030-105, the overall CPU 141a determines whether or not the command in the reception buffer is an opening effect pattern designation command. If the command in the reception buffer is an opening effect pattern designation command (S2030-105: Yes), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2030-106; Proceed to step S2030-107.

In step S2030-106, the overall CPU 141a sets the animation pattern for the opening effect. After that, the image display device 31 displays the effect image of the opening effect.

In step S2030-107, the overall CPU 141a determines whether or not the command in the reception buffer is a round effect pattern designation command. If the command in the reception buffer is a round effect pattern designation command (S2030-107: Yes), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2030-108; Proceed to step S2030-109.

In step S2030-108, the supervising CPU 141a sets an animation pattern for round effects. After that, the image display device 31 displays the effect image of the round effect.

In step S2030-109, the overall CPU 141a determines whether or not the command in the reception buffer is an ending effect pattern designation command. If the command in the reception buffer is an ending effect pattern designation command (S2030-109: Yes), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2030-110; Proceed to step S2030-111.

In step S2030-110, the supervising CPU 141a sets the ending animation pattern. After that, the image display device 31 displays the effect image of the ending effect.

In step S2030-111, the overall CPU 141a determines whether or not the command in the reception buffer is a pending display change effect pattern specification command. If the command in the reception buffer is a pending display change effect pattern designation command (S2030-111: Yes), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2030-112, and if not a pending display change effect pattern designation command (S2030-111 : No), and proceeds to step S2030-113.

In step S2030-112, the overall CPU 141a sets an animation pattern for a pending display change effect. After that, the image display device 31 displays the effect image of the pending display change effect.

In step S2030-113, the supervising CPU 141a determines whether or not the command in the reception buffer is an effect pattern designating command for success in ranking up. If the command in the reception buffer is a production pattern designation command for successful rank up (S2030-113: Yes), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2030-114. : No), go to step S2030-115.

In step S2030-114, the supervising CPU 141a sets an animation pattern for a rank-up success effect. After that, the image display device 31 displays the effect image of the rank-up success effect.

In step S2030-115, the overall CPU 141a determines whether or not the command in the reception buffer is an effect pattern specifying command for failing in rank up. If the command in the reception buffer is a production pattern designation command for rank up failure (S2030-115: Yes), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2030-116, and if it is not a production pattern designation command for rank up failure (S2030-115 : No), and proceeds to step S2030-117.

In step S2030-116, the supervising CPU 141a sets an animation pattern for a rank-up failure effect. After that, the image display device 31 displays the effect image of the rank-up failure effect.

In step S2030-117, the overall CPU 141a determines whether or not the command in the reception buffer is a stage change effect pattern designation command. If the command in the reception buffer is a stage change effect pattern designation command (S2030-117: Yes), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2030-118, and if not a stage change effect pattern designation command (S2030-117: No ), ending the current animation pattern setting process.

In step S2030-118, the supervising CPU 141a sets an animation pattern for stage change effects. After that, the image display device 31 displays the effect image of the new stage.

107 to 114 are flowcharts showing the details of the image control timer update processing (step S2410 in FIG. 77) of the overall control unit 141. FIG. In FIG. 107, the supervising CPU 141a decrements the timer counter of the supervising RAM 141b, which is referred to in the animation pattern setting process, by 1 if it is not 0, and updates it.

In the next step S2410-2, the general CPU 141a confirms whether or not the step-up effect image standby flag is set in the step-up effect image standby flag storage area of the general RAM 141b. If the step-up effect image standby flag is set (S2410-2: Yes), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2410-3, and if the step-up effect image standby flag is not set (S2410-2: No). , the process proceeds to step S2410-8.

In step S2410-3, the overall CPU 141a determines whether or not the step-up effect image standby timer counter in the overall RAM 141b is greater than zero. If the step-up effect image standby timer counter is 0 (S2410-3: No), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2410-4, and if the step-up effect image standby timer counter is greater than 0 (S2410-3: Yes). , the process proceeds to step S2410-8.

In step S2410-4, the overall CPU 141a clears the step-up effect image standby flag.

In the next step S2410-5, the supervising CPU 141a sets a step-up effect image displaying flag in the step-up effect image displaying flag storage area of the supervising RAM 141b.

In the next step S2410-6, the supervising CPU 141a obtains the remaining time until the display end timing of the effect image of the step-up effect, and supervises the value obtained by dividing this time by 2 milliseconds, which is the generation cycle of the reset clock pulse. It is set in the step-up effect image termination standby timer counter of the RAM 141b.

At the next step S2410-7, the supervising CPU 141a sets an animation pattern for step-up effects. Thereafter, the image display device 31 displays a step-up effect image.

In the next step S2410-8, the supervising CPU 141a confirms whether or not the character appearance effect image standby flag is set in the character appearance effect image standby flag storage area of the supervising RAM 141b. If the character appearance effect image standby flag is set (S2410-8: Yes), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2410-9, and if the character appearance effect image standby flag is not set (S2410-8: No). , the process proceeds to step S2410-14.

In step S2410-9, the supervising CPU 141a determines whether or not the character appearance effect image waiting timer counter in the supervising RAM 141b is greater than zero. If the character appearance effect image standby timer counter is 0 (S2410-9: No), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2410-10, and if the character appearance effect image standby timer counter is greater than 0 (S2410-9: Yes). , the process proceeds to step S2410-14.

In step S2410-10, the overall CPU 141a clears the character appearance effect image standby flag.

In the next step S2410-11, the supervising CPU 141a sets the character appearance effect image displaying flag in the character appearance effect image displaying flag storage area of the supervising RAM 141b.

In the next step S2410-12, the supervising CPU 141a obtains the remaining time until the display end timing of the effect image of the character appearance effect, and supervises the value obtained by dividing this time by 2 milliseconds, which is the generation cycle of the reset clock pulse. It is set in the character appearance effect image termination standby timer counter of the RAM 141b.

In the next step S2410-13, the supervising CPU 141a sets an animation pattern for character appearance effects. After that, the image display device 31 displays the effect image of the character appearance effect.

In the next step S2410-14, the overall CPU 141a checks whether or not the roulette effect image standby flag is set in the roulette effect image standby flag storage area of the overall RAM 141b. If the roulette effect image standby flag is set (S2410-14: Yes), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2410-15; if the roulette effect image standby flag is not set (S2410-14: No), step Proceed to S2410-20.

In step S2410-15, the overall CPU 141a determines whether or not the roulette effect image standby timer counter in the overall RAM 141b is greater than zero. If the roulette effect image standby timer counter is 0 (S2410-15: No), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2410-16; Proceed to S2410-20.

In step S2410-16, the overall CPU 141a clears the roulette effect image standby flag.

In the next step S2410-17, the overall CPU 141a sets a roulette effect image displaying flag in the roulette effect image displaying flag storage area of the overall RAM 141b.

In the next step S2410-18, the supervising CPU 141a obtains the remaining time until the display end timing of the effect image of the roulette effect, divides this time by 2 milliseconds, which is the generation cycle of the reset clock pulse, and divides the value into the supervising RAM 141b. roulette effect image end waiting timer counter.

In the next step S2410-19, the overall CPU 141a sets the animation pattern for the roulette effect. After that, the image display device 31 displays the effect image of the roulette effect.

In the next step S2410-20, the supervising CPU 141a confirms whether or not the SP development stimulating effect image waiting flag is set in the SP developing stimulating effect image standby flag storage area of the supervising RAM 141b. The supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2410-21 when the SP development inciting effect image standby flag is set (S2410-20: Yes), and when the SP development inciting effect image standby flag is not set (S2410-20: No), go to step S2410-26.

In step S2410-21, the supervising CPU 141a determines whether or not the SP development inciting effect image standby timer counter in the supervising RAM 141b is greater than zero. The supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2410-22 when the SP development fan effect image standby timer counter is 0 (S2410-21: No), and when the SP development fan effect image standby timer counter is greater than 0 (S2410-21: Yes), go to step S2410-26.

In step S2410-22, the supervising CPU 141a clears the SP development fan effect image waiting flag.

In the next step S2410-23, the supervising CPU 141a sets the SP developing stimulating effect image displaying flag in the SP developing stimulating effect image displaying flag storage area of the supervising RAM 141b.

In the next step S2410-24, the supervising CPU 141a obtains the remaining time until the display end timing of the effect image of the SP development fan effect, and divides this time by 2 milliseconds, which is the generation cycle of the reset clock pulse. It is set in the SP development fan effect image end standby timer counter of the overall RAM 141b.

At the next step S2410-25, the supervising CPU 141a sets the animation pattern for the SP development fanning effect. After that, the image display device 31 displays the effect image of the SP development fan effect.

In the next step S2410-26, the supervising CPU 141a checks whether or not the SP development finalized effect image standby flag is set in the SP development finalized effect image standby flag storage area of the supervising RAM 141b. If the SP development fixed effect image waiting flag is set (S2410-26: Yes), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2410-27, and if the SP development fixed effect image waiting flag is not set (S2410-26: No), go to step S2410-32.

In step S2410-27, the supervising CPU 141a determines whether or not the SP development finalized effect image waiting timer counter in the supervising RAM 141b is greater than zero. If the SP development fixed effect image waiting timer counter is 0 (S2410-27: No), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2410-28. Yes), go to step S2410-32.

In step S2410-28, the supervising CPU 141a clears the SP development finalized effect image standby flag.

In the next step S2410-29, the supervising CPU 141a sets the SP development finalized effect image displaying flag in the SP development finalized effect image displaying flag storage area of the supervising RAM 141b.

In the next step S2410-30, the supervising CPU 141a obtains the remaining time until the display end timing of the effect image of the fixed SP development effect, and divides this time by 2 milliseconds, which is the generation cycle of the reset clock pulse. It is set in the SP development fixed effect image end waiting timer counter of the overall RAM 141b.

In the next step S2410-31, the supervising CPU 141a sets the animation pattern for the SP development fixed effect. Thereafter, the image display device 31 displays the effect image of the SP development fixed effect.

In the next step S2410-32, the general CPU 141a checks whether or not the cut-in effect image standby flag is set in the cut-in effect image standby flag storage area of the general RAM 141b. If the cut-in effect image standby flag is set (S2410-32: Yes), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2410-33, and if the cut-in effect image standby flag is not set (S2410-32: No). , go to step S2410-38.

In step S2410-33, the general CPU 141a determines whether or not the cut-in effect image standby timer counter of the general RAM 141b is greater than zero. If the cut-in effect image standby timer counter is 0 (S2410-33: No), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2410-34, and if the cut-in effect image standby timer counter is greater than 0 (S2410-33: Yes). , go to step S2410-38.

In step S2410-34, the overall CPU 141a clears the cut-in effect image standby flag.

In the next step S2410-35, the overall CPU 141a sets a cut-in effect image displaying flag in the cut-in effect image displaying flag storage area of the overall RAM 141b.

In the next step S2410-36, the supervising CPU 141a obtains the remaining time until the display end timing of the effect image of the cut-in effect, and supervises the value obtained by dividing this time by 2 milliseconds, which is the generation cycle of the reset clock pulse. It is set in the cut-in effect image completion waiting timer counter of the RAM 141b.

At the next step S2410-37, the supervising CPU 141a sets an animation pattern for a cut-in effect. After that, the image display device 31 displays a cut-in effect image.

In the next step S2410-38, the supervising CPU 141a confirms whether or not the confirmed role actuation first effect image waiting flag is set in the decided role actuation first effect image waiting flag storage area of the supervising RAM 141b. If the confirmed role product actuation first effect image standby flag is set (S2410-38: Yes), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2410-39, and the confirmed role act act first effect image wait flag is not set. If so (S2410-38: No), the process proceeds to step S2410-44.

In step S2410-39, the supervising CPU 141a determines whether or not the fixed role product operation first effect image standby timer counter of the supervising RAM 141b is greater than zero. The supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2410-40 when the confirmed role product operation first effect image standby timer counter is 0 (S2410-39: No), and the confirmed role product operation first effect image standby timer counter is greater than 0. If so (S2410-39: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2410-44.

In step S2410-40, the supervising CPU 141a clears the confirmed accessory actuation first effect image standby flag.

In the next step S2410-41, the supervising CPU 141a sets the confirmed role actuation first effect image displaying flag in the decided role actuation first effect image displaying flag storage area of the supervising RAM 141b.

In the next step S2410-42, the supervising CPU 141a obtains the remaining time until the display end timing of the effect image of the fixed accessory actuation first effect, and divides this time by 2 milliseconds, which is the generation cycle of the reset clock pulse. The value thus obtained is set in the fixed role product operation first effect image end standby timer counter of the overall RAM 141b.

In the next step S2410-43, the supervising CPU 141a sets the animation pattern of the fixed accessory actuation first effect. After that, the image display device 31 displays the effect image of the first determined accessory actuation effect.

In the next step S2410-44, the supervising CPU 141a confirms whether or not the confirmed role actuation second effect image waiting flag is set in the decided role actuation second effect image waiting flag storage area of the supervising RAM 141b. The supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2410-45 when the confirmed role product operation second effect image waiting flag is set (S2410-44: Yes), and the confirmed role product operation second effect image waiting flag is not set. If so (S2410-44: No), proceed to step S2410-50.

In step S2410-45, the supervising CPU 141a determines whether or not the fixed role product actuation second effect image standby timer counter of the supervising RAM 141b is greater than zero. The supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2410-46 when the confirmed role product operation second effect image standby timer counter is 0 (S2410-45: No), and the confirmed role product operation second effect image standby timer counter is greater than 0. If so (S2410-45: Yes), proceed to step S2410-50.

In step S2410-46, the overall CPU 141a clears the confirmed accessory actuation second effect image standby flag.

In the next step S2410-47, the supervising CPU 141a sets the confirmed role actuation second effect image displaying flag in the decided role actuation second effect image displaying flag storage area of the supervising RAM 141b.

In the next step S2410-48, the supervising CPU 141a obtains the remaining time until the display end timing of the effect image of the confirmed accessory actuation second effect, and divides this time by 2 milliseconds, which is the generation cycle of the reset clock pulse. The value thus obtained is set in the fixed role product operation second effect image end standby timer counter of the overall RAM 141b.

In the next step S2410-49, the supervising CPU 141a sets the animation pattern for the second production of the confirmed accessory actuation. After that, the image display device 31 displays the effect image of the second determined accessory actuation effect.

In step S2410-50, the supervising CPU 141a checks whether or not the step-up effect image displaying flag is set in the step-up effect image displaying flag storage area of the supervising RAM 141b. If the step-up effect image displaying flag is set (S2410-50: Yes), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2410-51, and if the step-up effect image displaying flag is not set (S2410-50: No), go to step S2410-54.

In step S2410-51, the general CPU 141a determines whether or not the step-up effect image end standby timer counter of the general RAM 141b is greater than zero. If the step-up effect image end standby timer counter is 0 (S2410-51: No), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2410-52, and if the step-up effect image end standby timer counter is greater than 0 (S2410-51: Yes), go to step S2410-54.

In step S2410-52, the overall CPU 141a clears the step-up effect image displaying flag.

In step S2410-53, the overall CPU 141a clears the animation pattern of the step-up effect. When the animation pattern for the step-up effect is cleared, the image display device 31 stops displaying the effect image for the step-up effect.

In step S2410-54, the supervising CPU 141a checks whether or not the character appearance effect image displaying flag is set in the character appearance effect image displaying flag storage area of the supervising RAM 141b. If the character appearance effect image displaying flag is set (S2410-54: Yes), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2410-55, and if the character appearance effect image displaying flag is not set (S2410-54: No), go to step S2410-60.

In step S2410-55, the supervising CPU 141a determines whether or not the character appearance effect image end standby timer counter in the supervising RAM 141b is greater than zero. If the character appearance effect image end standby timer counter is 0 (S2410-55: No), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2410-56, and if the character appearance effect image end standby timer counter is greater than 0 (S2410-55: Yes), go to step S2410-60.

In step S2410-56, the supervising CPU 141a confirms whether or not the premium character image flag is set in the premium character image flag storage area of the supervising RAM 141b. If the premium character image flag is set (S2410-56: Yes), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2410-57; if the premium character image flag is not set (S2410-56: No), step S2410- Proceed to 58.

In step S2410-57, the supervising CPU 141a clears the premium character image flag.

In step S2410-58, the overall CPU 141a clears the character appearance effect image displaying flag.

In step S2410-59, the supervising CPU 141a clears the animation pattern of the character appearance effect. When the animation pattern of the character appearance effect is cleared, the image display device 31 stops displaying the effect image of the character appearance effect.

In step S2410-60, the supervising CPU 141a checks whether or not the roulette effect image displaying flag is set in the roulette effect image displaying flag storage area of the supervising RAM 141b. If the roulette effect image displaying flag is set (S2410-60: Yes), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2410-61, and if the roulette effect image displaying flag is not set (S2410-60: No). , go to step S2410-64.

In step S2410-61, the overall CPU 141a determines whether or not the roulette effect image end standby timer counter in the overall RAM 141b is greater than zero. If the roulette effect image end standby timer counter is 0 (S2410-61: No), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2410-62, and if the roulette effect image end standby timer counter is greater than 0 (S2410-61: Yes). , go to step S2410-64.

In step S2410-62, the overall CPU 141a clears the roulette effect image displaying flag.

In step S2410-63, the overall CPU 141a clears the animation pattern of the roulette effect. When the animation pattern of the roulette effect is cleared, the image display device 31 stops displaying the effect image of the roulette effect.

In step S2410-64, the supervising CPU 141a confirms whether or not the flag during display of the SP development stimulating effect image is set in the flag storage area for the SP developing stimulating effect image being displayed in the supervising RAM 141b. If the flag for displaying the SP development stimulating effect image is set (S2410-64: Yes), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2410-65, and if the SP development stimulating effect image displaying flag is not set (S2410- 64: No), go to step S2410-68.

In step S2410-65, the supervising CPU 141a determines whether or not the wait timer counter for ending the SP development stimulating effect image in the supervising RAM 141b is greater than zero. If the SP development fan effect image end standby timer counter is 0 (S2410-65: No), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2410-66. 65: Yes), go to step S2410-68.

In step S2410-66, the supervising CPU 141a clears the SP development inciting effect image displaying flag.

In step S2410-67, the supervising CPU 141a clears the animation pattern of the SP development fan effect. When the animation pattern of the SP development fan effect is cleared, the display of the effect image of the SP development fan effect is stopped on the image display device 31. - 特許庁

In step S2410-68, the supervising CPU 141a confirms whether or not the SP developing fixed effect image displaying flag is set in the SP developing fixed effect image displaying flag storage area of the supervising RAM 141b. If the SP development fixed effect image displaying flag is set (S2410-68: Yes), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2410-69, and if the SP development fixed effect image displaying flag is not set (S2410- 68: No), go to step S2410-72.

In step S2410-69, the supervising CPU 141a determines whether or not the SP development fixed effect image end waiting timer counter in the supervising RAM 141b is greater than zero. If the SP development fixed effect image end waiting timer counter is 0 (S2410-69: No), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2410-70, and if the SP development fixed effect image end waiting timer counter is greater than 0 (S2410- 69: Yes), go to step S2410-72.

In step S2410-70, the supervising CPU 141a clears the SP development finalized effect image displaying flag.

In step S2410-71, the supervising CPU 141a clears the animation pattern of the SP development fixed effect. When the animation pattern of the SP development fixed effect is cleared, the image display device 31 stops displaying the effect image of the SP development fixed effect.

In step S2410-72, the supervising CPU 141a checks whether or not the cut-in effect image displaying flag is set in the cut-in effect image displaying flag storage area of the supervising RAM 141b. If the cut-in effect image displaying flag is set (S2410-72: Yes), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2410-73, and if the cut-in effect image displaying flag is not set (S2410-72: No), go to step S2410-78.

In step S2410-73, the general CPU 141a determines whether or not the cut-in effect image end standby timer counter of the general RAM 141b is greater than zero. If the cut-in effect image end standby timer counter is 0 (S2410-73: No), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2410-74, and if the cut-in effect image end standby timer counter is greater than 0 (S2410-73: Yes), go to step S2410-78.

In step S2410-74, the supervising CPU 141a checks whether or not the premium cut-in image flag is set in the premium cut-in image flag storage area of the supervising RAM 141b. If the premium cut-in image flag is set (S2410-74: Yes), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2410-75; if the premium cut-in image flag is not set (S2410-74: No), step Proceed to S2410-76.

In step S2410-75, the supervising CPU 141a clears the premium cut-in image flag.

In step S2410-76, the overall CPU 141a clears the cut-in effect image displaying flag.

In step S2410-77, the supervising CPU 141a clears the cut-in effect animation pattern. When the animation pattern for the cut-in effect is cleared, the image display device 31 stops displaying the effect image for the cut-in effect.

In step S2410-78, the supervising CPU 141a confirms whether or not the flag for the determined role actuation first effect image displaying flag is set in the determined role actuation first effect image displaying flag storage area of the supervising RAM 141b. If the flag for displaying the first effect image in operation of the confirmed role is set (S2410-78: Yes), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2410-79, and the flag during display of the first effect image in operation of the confirmed role is set. If not (S2410-78: No), proceed to step S2410-82.

In step S2410-79, the supervising CPU 141a determines whether or not the fixed role product operation first effect image end waiting timer counter of the supervising RAM 141b is greater than zero. The supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2410-80 when the confirmed role product operation first effect image end standby timer counter is 0 (S2410-79: No), and the fixed role product operation first effect image end standby timer counter is 0. If larger (S2410-79: Yes), proceed to step S2410-82.

In step S2410-80, the supervising CPU 141a clears the confirmed accessory actuation first effect image displaying flag.

In step S2410-81, the supervising CPU 141a clears the animation pattern of the fixed accessory actuation first effect. When the animation pattern of the first production of the confirmed role actuation is cleared, the display of the production image of the first production of the confirmed role actuation is stopped in the image display device 31 .

In step S2410-82, the supervising CPU 141a confirms whether or not the confirmed role product actuation second effect image displaying flag is set in the decided role actuation second effect image displaying flag storage area of the supervising RAM 141b. The supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2410-83 when the confirmed role product operation second effect image displaying flag is set (S2410-82: Yes), and the confirmed role product operation second effect image display flag is set. If not (S2410-82: No), the current image control timer update process is terminated.

In step S2410-83, the supervising CPU 141a determines whether or not the fixed role product operation second effect image end standby timer counter of the supervising RAM 141b is greater than zero. The supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2410-84 when the confirmed role product activation second effect image end waiting timer counter is 0 (S2410-83: No), and the confirmed role product activation second effect image end standby timer counter is 0. If larger (S2410-83: Yes), the current image control timer update process is terminated.

In step S2410-84, the supervising CPU 141a clears the confirmed accessory actuation second effect image displaying flag.

In step S2410-85, the supervising CPU 141a clears the animation pattern of the confirmed accessory actuation second effect. When the animation pattern of the second determined role actuation effect is cleared, the image display device 31 stops displaying the effect image of the second determined role actuation effect.

115 to 126 are flowcharts showing the details of the sound pattern setting process (step S2040 in FIG. 74) of the overall control unit 141. FIG. In FIG. 115, the supervising CPU 141a checks whether or not the normal fluctuation effect sound output flag is set in the normal fluctuation effect sound output flag storage area of the supervising RAM 141b (S2040-1). The normal fluctuation production effect sound output flag indicates that the production sound effect of the normal fluctuation production (music (1), music (2), music (3), music (4), music (5) shown in FIG. 10B) ), or the effect sound of music (6)) is being output. The normal fluctuating sound effect output flag is set in step S2040-61, which will be described later, when an effect pattern specification command for starting fluctuation is received from the effect control unit 120m. If the normal fluctuation effect sound output flag is set (S2040-1: Yes), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2040-2, and if the normal fluctuation effect sound output flag is not set (S2040- 1: No), go to step S2040-6.

In step S2040-2, the supervising CPU 141a performs normal fluctuation production sound effect control mode determination processing. In the normal fluctuation effect sound effect control mode determination process, the supervising CPU 141a refers to the normal fluctuation effect sound effect control mode determination table in the supervising ROM 141c, and based on the type of the effect pattern designation command in the reception buffer, the normal fluctuation effect effect is performed. Determines the mode of sound effect control.

FIG. 127 is a diagram showing a normal fluctuation effect sound control mode determination table. In the normal fluctuation production control mode determination table, the type of production pattern designation command that the integrated control unit 141 can receive from the production control unit 120m and the control mode of the production sound effect of the normal fluctuation production ("end" or "continue") Each set of data representing is stored. The "end" data indicates that the output of the effect sound of the normal fluctuation effect will be stopped immediately when the corresponding effect pattern designation command is received, and the "continue" data indicates that the corresponding effect pattern designation command will be stopped. When received, it indicates to continue the output of the effect sound of the normal fluctuation effect.

In the next step S2040-3, the supervising CPU 141a determines whether the control mode determined in the normal fluctuation effect sound control mode determination process is "end" or "continue". If the control mode is "end" (S2040-3: Yes), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2040-4; move on.

In step S2040-4, the overall CPU 141a clears the sound pattern of the normal variation effect. The sound pattern of the normal variation effect is set in step S2040-62 described later when an effect pattern specifying command for starting the variation is received from the effect control unit 120m. When the sound pattern of the normal fluctuation production is cleared, the sound output device 32 outputs the production sound effect of the normal fluctuation production (music (1), music (2), music (3), The output of music (4), music (5), or music (6) is stopped.

In the next step S2040-5, the supervising CPU 141a clears the normal fluctuation effect sound output flag of the supervising RAM 141b, and proceeds to step S2040-6.

In step S2040-6, the supervising CPU 141a checks whether or not the step-up effect sound output flag is set in the step-up effect sound output flag storage area of the supervising RAM 141b (S2040-6). The step-up effect sound output flag is a flag indicating that the step-up effect sound effect (the effect sound shown in FIG. 19) is being output. The step-up sound effect output flag is set in step S2420-5 of the voice control timer update process (FIGS. 140 to 147) to be described later when the timing for outputting the effect sound of the step-up effect in the variation has arrived. be done. If the step-up effect sound output flag is set (S2040-6: Yes), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2040-7, and if the step-up effect sound output flag is not set (S2040- 6: No), go to step S2040-11.

In step S2040-7, the overall CPU 141a performs step-up effect sound control mode determination processing. In the step-up effect sound effect control mode determination process, the supervising CPU 141a refers to the step-up effect sound effect control mode determination table in the supervising ROM 141c, and based on the type of the effect pattern designation command in the reception buffer, the step-up effect effect is performed. Determines the mode of sound effect control.

FIG. 128 is a diagram showing a step-up effect sound control mode determination table. The step-up effect control mode determination table includes the types of effect pattern designation commands that can be received by the overall control unit 141 from the effect control unit 120m, and the control mode ("end" or "continue") of the effect sound of the step-up effect. Each set of data representing is stored. The "end" data indicates that the output of the effect sound of the step-up effect is immediately stopped when the corresponding effect pattern designation command is received, and the "continue" data indicates that the corresponding effect pattern designation command is to be stopped. Indicates to continue outputting the effect sound of the step-up effect when it is received.

In the next step S2040-8, the supervising CPU 141a determines whether the control mode determined in the step-up effect sound control mode determination process is "end" or "continue". If the control mode is "end" (S2040-8: Yes), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2040-9; move on.

In step S2040-9, the overall CPU 141a clears the sound pattern of the step-up effect. The sound pattern of the step-up effect is set in step S2420-7 of the voice control timer update process (FIGS. 140 to 147) to be described later when the output timing of the effect sound of the step-up effect in the variation comes. be. When the sound pattern of the step-up effect is cleared, the sound output device 32 stops outputting the effect sound of the step-up effect (the effect sound shown in FIG. 19).

In the next step S2040-10, the supervising CPU 141a clears the step-up effect sound output flag of the supervising RAM 141b, and proceeds to step S2040-11.

In step S2040-11, the supervising CPU 141a checks whether or not the normal reach effect sound output flag is set in the normal reach effect sound output flag storage area of the supervising RAM 141b. The normal reach effect sound output flag is a flag indicating that the normal reach effect sound effect (music (7) shown in FIG. 15) is being output. The normal reach effect sound outputting flag is set in step S2040-96 described later when a reach establishment effect pattern specification command is received from the effect control unit 120m. If the normal reach effect sound output flag is set (S2040-11: Yes), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2040-12, and if the normal reach effect sound output flag is not set (S2040-11: No), go to step S2040-16.

In step S2040-12, the supervising CPU 141a performs normal reach production sound effect control mode determination processing. In the normal reach effect sound effect control mode determination process, the supervising CPU 141a refers to the normal reach effect sound effect control mode determination table in the supervising ROM 141c, and determines the normal reach effect sound effect control mode based on the type of the effect pattern designation command in the reception buffer. Determine control mode.

FIG. 129 is a diagram showing a normal reach production sound effect control mode determination table. The normal reach production control mode determination table shows the type of production pattern designation command that the integrated control unit 141 can receive from the production control unit 120m and the control mode ("end" or "continue") of the production sound effect of the normal reach production. Each set of data is stored. The "end" data indicates that the output of the normal reach effect effect sound will be stopped immediately when the corresponding effect pattern designation command is received, and the "continue" data indicates that the corresponding effect pattern designation command has been received. It indicates that the output of the effect sound of the normal reach effect is continued in the case of the normal reach effect.

In the next step S2040-13, the supervising CPU 141a determines whether the control mode determined in the normal reach effect sound effect control mode determination processing is "end" or "continue". If the control mode is "end" (S2040-13: Yes), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2040-14. move on.

In step S2040-14, the overall CPU 141a clears the sound pattern of the normal reach effect. The normal ready-to-win effect sound pattern is set in step S2040-95, which will be described later, when a ready-to-win effect pattern specification command is received from the effect control unit 120m. When the sound pattern of the normal reach effect is cleared, the sound output device 32 stops outputting the effect sound of the normal reach effect (music (7) shown in FIG. 15).

In the next step S2040-15, the supervising CPU 141a clears the normal reach effect sound output flag of the supervising RAM 141b, and proceeds to step S2040-16.

In step S2040-16, the supervising CPU 141a checks whether or not the character appearance effect sound output flag is set in the character appearance effect sound output flag storage area of the supervising RAM 141b (S2040-16). The character appearance effect sound output flag is a flag indicating that the character appearance effect sound effect (the effect sound shown in FIG. 23) is being output. The character appearance effect sound output flag is set in step S2420-11 of the voice control timer update process (FIGS. 140 to 147) to be described later when the output timing of the character appearance effect sound for the character appearance effect in the variation has arrived. be done. If the character appearance effect sound output flag is set (S2040-16: Yes), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2040-17, and if the character appearance effect sound output flag is not set (S2040- 16: No), go to step S2040-23.

In step S2040-17, the supervising CPU 141a confirms whether or not the premium character sound effect flag is set in the premium character sound effect flag storage area of the supervising RAM 141b. The premium character sound effect flag is set in step S2040-68, which will be described later, when the character appearing in the character appearance effect is a premium character. If the premium character sound effect flag is set (S2040-17: Yes), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2040-18; if the premium character sound effect flag is not set (S2040-17: No), step Proceed to S2040-19.

In step S2040-18, the supervising CPU 141a performs premium character appearance effect sound control mode determination processing. In the premium character appearance effect sound effect control mode determination process, the supervising CPU 141a refers to the premium character appearance effect sound effect control mode determination table in the supervising ROM 141c, and determines the premium character based on the type of the effect pattern designation command in the reception buffer. A control mode of the effect sound of the character appearance effect is determined.

FIG. 130 is a diagram showing a premium character appearance effect sound control mode determination table. The premium character appearance effect control mode determination table includes the types of effect pattern designation commands that can be received by the overall control unit 141 from the effect control unit 120m, and the effect sound control mode of the character appearance effect in which the premium character appears ("End"). ” or “Continue”) are stored. The "end" data indicates that the output of the effect sound for the character appearance effect of the premium character is immediately stopped when the corresponding effect pattern specifying command is received, and the "continue" data indicates that the corresponding effect pattern is output. It indicates that the output of the effect sound of the character appearance performance of the premium character is to be continued when the specified command is received.

In step S2040-19, the supervising CPU 141a performs character appearance effect sound control mode determination processing. In the character appearance effect sound effect control mode determination process, the supervising CPU 141a refers to the premium character appearance effect sound effect control mode determination table in the supervising ROM 141c, and selects characters A and B based on the type of effect pattern designation command in the reception buffer. , or the control mode of the effect sound for the character appearance effect of C is determined.

FIG. 131 is a diagram showing a character appearance effect sound effect control mode determination table. The character appearance effect control mode determination table includes the types of effect pattern designation commands that the general control unit 141 can receive from the effect control unit 120m and the control mode ("end" or "continue") of the effect sound of the character appearance effect. Each set of data representing is stored. The "end" data indicates that the output of the effect sound for the character appearance effect of characters A, B, or C is immediately stopped when the corresponding effect pattern specifying command is received, and the "continue" data indicates that , indicates that the output of the effect sound of the character appearance effect of the character A, B or C is continued when the corresponding effect pattern designation command is received.

In step S2040-20, the supervising CPU 141a determines whether the control mode determined in the premium character appearance effect control mode determination process or the character appearance effect sound effect control mode determination process is either "end" or "continue". do. If the control mode is "end" (S2040-20: Yes), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2040-21; move on.

In step S2040-21, the overall CPU 141a clears the sound pattern of the character appearance effect. The sound pattern for the character appearance effect is set in step S2420-13 of the voice control timer update process (FIGS. 140 to 147), which will be described later, when the timing for outputting the effect sound for the character appearance effect in the variation has arrived. be. When the sound pattern of the character appearance effect is cleared, the sound output device 32 stops outputting the effect sound of the character appearance effect (the effect sound shown in FIG. 23).

In the next step S2040-22, the supervising CPU 141a clears the character appearance effect sound output flag of the supervising RAM 141b, and proceeds to step S2040-23.

In step S2040-23, the supervising CPU 141a checks whether or not the roulette effect sound output flag is set in the roulette effect sound output flag storage area of the supervising RAM 141b (S2040-23). The roulette effect sound output flag is a flag indicating that the roulette effect sound effect (the effect sound shown in FIG. 22) is being output. The roulette effect sound output flag is set in step S2420-17 of the voice control timer update process (FIGS. 140 to 147) to be described later when the timing for outputting the effect sound of the roulette effect in the variation has arrived. . If the roulette effect sound effect output flag is set (S2040-23: Yes), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2040-24, and if the roulette effect sound effect output flag is not set (S2040-23: No), go to step S2040-28.

In step S2040-24, the overall CPU 141a performs roulette effect sound effect control mode determination processing. In the roulette effect sound effect control mode determination process, the supervising CPU 141a refers to the roulette effect sound effect control mode determination table in the supervising ROM 141c, and determines the effect sound effect of the roulette effect based on the type of the effect pattern designation command in the reception buffer. Determine control mode.

FIG. 132 is a diagram showing a roulette effect sound control mode determination table. The roulette effect control mode determination table shows the types of effect pattern designation commands that can be received by the overall control unit 141 from the effect control unit 120m and the control mode ("end" or "continue") of the effect sound of the roulette effect. Each set of data is stored. The "end" data indicates that the output of the effect sound of the roulette effect is immediately stopped when the corresponding effect pattern designation command is received, and the "continue" data indicates that the corresponding effect pattern designation command is received. It indicates that the output of the effect sound of the roulette effect is continued when the roulette effect is performed.

In the next step S2040-25, the supervising CPU 141a determines whether the control mode determined in the roulette effect sound control mode determination process is "end" or "continue". If the control mode is "end" (S2040-25: Yes), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2040-26; move on.

In step S2040-26, the overall CPU 141a clears the sound pattern of the roulette effect. The sound pattern of the roulette effect is set in step S2420-19 of the voice control timer update process (FIGS. 140 to 147), which will be described later, when the output timing of the effect sound of the roulette effect in the variation comes. When the sound pattern of the roulette effect is cleared, the sound output device 32 stops outputting the effect sound of the roulette effect (the effect sound shown in FIG. 22).

In the next step S2040-27, the supervising CPU 141a clears the roulette effect sound output flag of the supervising RAM 141b, and proceeds to step S2040-28.

In step S2040-28, the supervising CPU 141a checks whether or not the SP developing stimulating effect sound output flag is set in the SP developing stimulating effect sound output flag storage area of the supervising RAM 141b. The flag during output of the SP development stimulating effect sound effect is a flag indicating that the effect sound effect of the SP development stimulating effect (the effect sound shown in FIG. 25) is being output. The flag during output of the SP development stimulating effect sound is set in step S2420-23 of the later-described voice control timer update process (FIGS. 140 to 147) when the output timing of the SP development stimulating effect sound effect in the relevant fluctuation has arrived. , is set. The supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2040-29 if the SP development stimulating effect sound output flag is set (S2040-28: Yes), and if the SP development stimulating effect sound output flag is not set ( S2040-28: No), proceed to step S2040-33.

In step S2040-29, the supervising CPU 141a carries out a process of determining the mode of control of sound effects for SP development stimulating effects. In the SP development hype effect sound effect control mode determination process, the supervising CPU 141a refers to the SP development hype effect sound effect control mode determination table in the overall ROM 141c, and determines the SP development hype effect based on the type of the effect pattern designation command in the reception buffer. A control mode of the production effect sound of the production is determined.

FIG. 133 is a diagram showing an SP development provocative effect sound control mode determination table. The SP development fan effect control mode determination table includes the types of effect pattern designation commands that can be received by the overall control unit 141 from the effect control unit 120m and the control mode of the effect sound of the SP development fan effect ("end" or "continue"). ”) are stored. The data of "end" indicates that the output of the effect sound of the SP development hype effect is immediately stopped when the corresponding effect pattern designation command is received, and the data of "continue" is the effect pattern designation command of the corresponding effect pattern. is received, it indicates that the output of the effect sound for the SP development hype effect is to be continued.

In the next step S2040-30, the supervising CPU 141a determines whether the control mode determined in the SP development hype production sound effect control mode determination processing is "end" or "continue". If the control mode is "end" (S2040-30: Yes), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2040-31; move on.

In step S2040-31, the supervising CPU 141a clears the sound pattern of the SP development fan effect. The sound pattern of the SP development hype effect is generated in step S2420-25 of the voice control timer update process (FIGS. set. When the sound pattern of the SP development hype effect is cleared, the sound output device 32 stops outputting the effect sound of the SP development hype effect (the effect sound shown in FIG. 25).

In the next step S2040-32, the supervising CPU 141a clears the flag of the SP development stimulating effect sound outputting flag in the supervising RAM 141b, and proceeds to step S2040-33.

In step S2040-33, the supervising CPU 141a checks whether or not the SP development fixed effect sound output flag is set in the SP development fixed effect sound output flag storage area of the supervising RAM 141b. The SP development fixed effect sound output flag is a flag indicating that the SP development fixed effect sound effect (the effect sound shown in FIG. 27) is being output. The SP development fixed effect sound output flag is set in step S2420-29 of the later-described voice control timer update process (FIGS. 140 to 147) when the timing for outputting the SP development fixed effect effect sound for the change has arrived. , is set. If the SP development fixed effect sound output flag is set (S2040-33: Yes), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2040-34, and if the SP development fixed effect sound output flag is not set ( S2040-33: No), go to step S2040-38.

In step S2040-34, the supervising CPU 141a performs SP development fixed effect sound control mode determination processing. In the SP development fixed production sound effect control mode determination process, the supervising CPU 141a refers to the SP development fixed production sound effect control mode determination table in the supervising ROM 141c, and based on the type of the production pattern designation command in the reception buffer, the SP development is fixed. A control mode of the production effect sound of the production is determined.

FIG. 134 is a diagram showing an SP development fixed effect sound control mode determination table. The SP development fixed effect control mode determination table includes the types of effect pattern designation commands that the overall control unit 141 can receive from the effect control unit 120m and the control mode of the effect sound of the SP development fixed effect ("end" or "continue"). ”) are stored. The "end" data indicates that when the corresponding effect pattern designation command is received, the output of the effect sound of the SP development fixed effect is immediately stopped, and the "continue" data indicates the corresponding effect pattern designation command. is received, it indicates that the output of the effect sound of the SP development finalization effect is to be continued.

In the next step S2040-35, the supervising CPU 141a determines whether the control mode determined in the SP development fixed effect sound effect control mode determination process is "end" or "continue". If the control mode is "end" (S2040-35: Yes), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2040-36; move on.

In step S2040-36, the supervising CPU 141a clears the sound pattern of the SP development finalization effect. The sound pattern of the SP development fixed effect is generated in step S2420-31 of the voice control timer update process (FIGS. 140 to 147) to be described later when the output timing of the effect sound of the SP development fixed effect in the fluctuation comes. set. When the sound pattern of the SP development fixed effect is cleared, the sound output device 32 stops outputting the effect sound of the SP development fixed effect (the effect sound shown in FIG. 27).

In the next step S2040-37, the supervising CPU 141a clears the SP development fixed effect sound output flag of the supervising RAM 141b, and proceeds to step S2040-38.

In step S2040-38, the supervising CPU 141a checks whether or not the SP reach effect sound output flag is set in the SP reach effect sound output flag storage area of the supervising RAM 141b. The SP reach effect sound output flag is a flag indicating that the SP reach effect effect sound (music (8) shown in FIG. 17) is being output. The SP reach effect sound output flag is set in step S2040-93, which will be described later, when an effect pattern designation command for developing to the SP reach effect is received from the effect control unit 120m. If the SP reach effect sound output flag is set (S2040-38: Yes), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2040-39, and if the SP reach effect sound effect output flag is not set (S2040- 38: No), go to step S2040-43.

In step S2040-39, the supervising CPU 141a performs SP reach production sound effect control mode determination processing. In the SP reach effect sound effect control mode determination process, the supervising CPU 141a refers to the SP reach effect sound effect control mode determination table in the supervising ROM 141c, and based on the type of effect pattern designation command in the reception buffer, the SP reach effect effect is performed. Determines the mode of sound effect control.

FIG. 135 is a diagram showing an SP reach effect sound effect control mode determination table. The SP reach production control mode determination table includes the type of production pattern designation command that can be received by the overall control unit 141 from the production control unit 120m and the control mode of the production sound effect of the SP reach production ("end" or "continue"). Each set of data representing is stored. The "end" data indicates that the output of the effect sound of the SP reach effect will be stopped immediately when the corresponding effect pattern designation command is received, and the "continue" data indicates that the corresponding effect pattern designation command will be stopped. When received, it indicates to continue the output of the effect sound of the SP ready-to-win effect.

In the next step S2040-40, the supervising CPU 141a determines whether the control mode determined in the SP reach effect sound effect control mode determination process is "end" or "continue". If the control mode is "end" (S2040-40: Yes), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2040-41; move on.

In step S2040-41, the overall CPU 141a clears the sound pattern of the SP reach effect. The sound pattern of the SP reach effect is set in step S2040-100, which will be described later, when an effect pattern specification command for developing to the SP reach effect is received from the effect control unit 120m. When the sound pattern of the SP ready-to-win effect is cleared, the sound output device 32 stops outputting the effect sound of the SP ready-to-win effect (the effect sound of the battle shown in FIG. 17).

In the next step S2040-42, the supervising CPU 141a clears the SP reach effect sound effect output flag of the supervising RAM 141b, and proceeds to step S2040-43.

In step S2040-43, the supervising CPU 141a checks whether or not the cut-in effect sound output flag is set in the cut-in effect sound output flag storage area of the supervising RAM 141b. The cut-in production sound effect output flag is a flag indicating that the production sound effect of the cut-in production (the production sound effect shown in FIG. 28) is being output. The cut-in effect sound output flag is set in step S2420-35 of the voice control timer update process (FIGS. 140 to 147) to be described later when the timing for outputting the effect sound of the cut-in effect in the variation has arrived. be done. If the cut-in effect sound output flag is set (S2040-43: Yes), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2040-44, and if the cut-in effect sound output flag is not set (S2040- 43: No), go to step S2040-50.

In step S2040-44, the supervising CPU 141a checks whether or not the premium cut-in sound effect flag is set in the premium cut-in sound effect flag storage area of the supervising RAM 141b. The premium cut-in sound effect flag is set in step S2040-82, which will be described later, when the background of the cut-in effect is a rainbow background. If the premium cut-in sound effect flag is set (S2040-44: Yes), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2040-45, and if the premium cut-in sound effect flag is not set (S2040-44: No). , go to step S2040-46.

In step S2040-45, the overall CPU 141a performs premium cut-in production sound effect control mode determination processing. In the premium cut-in effect sound effect control mode determination processing, the supervising CPU 141a refers to the premium cut-in effect sound effect control mode determination table in the supervising ROM 141c, and based on the type of effect pattern designation command in the reception buffer, the rainbow background is displayed. The control mode of the effect sound of the cut-in effect is determined.

FIG. 136 is a diagram showing a premium cut-in effect sound control mode determination table. The premium cut-in effect control mode determination table includes the types of effect pattern designation commands that the overall control unit 141 can receive from the effect control unit 120m, and the control mode of the effect sound of the rainbow background cut-in effect ("End"). or "continuation") are stored. The "End" data indicates that the output of the effect sound for the rainbow background cut-in effect will be immediately stopped when the corresponding effect pattern specification command is received, and the "Continue" data indicates that the corresponding effect pattern specification command is received. It indicates that the output of the effect sound for the rainbow background cut-in effect is continued when the pattern designation command is received.

In step S2040-46, the overall CPU 141a performs cut-in effect sound control mode determination processing. In the cut-in effect sound effect control mode determination process, the supervising CPU 141a refers to the premium cut-in effect sound effect control mode determination table in the supervising ROM 141c, and selects green, red, green, red, etc. based on the type of the effect pattern designation command in the reception buffer. Alternatively, the control mode of the effect sound for the cut-in effect of the zebra-patterned background is determined.

FIG. 137 is a diagram showing a cut-in effect sound control mode determination table. The cut-in effect control mode determination table includes the types of effect pattern designation commands that the overall control unit 141 can receive from the effect control unit 120m and the control mode ("end" or "continue") of the effect sound of the cut-in effect. Each set of data representing is stored. The "end" data indicates that the output of the effect sound of the green, red, or zebra pattern background cut-in effect will be immediately stopped when the corresponding effect pattern designation command is received, and the "continue" data The data indicates that the output of the effect sound of the green, red, or zebra pattern background cut-in effect is to be continued when the corresponding effect pattern specifying command is received.

In step S2040-47, the supervising CPU 141a determines whether the control mode determined in the premium cut-in effect control mode determination process or the cut-in effect sound effect control mode determination process is either "end" or "continue". do. If the control mode is "end" (S2040-47: Yes), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2040-48. move on.

In step S2040-48, the overall CPU 141a clears the sound pattern for the cut-in effect. The sound pattern for the cut-in effect is set in step S2420-37 of the voice control timer update process (FIGS. 140 to 147), which will be described later, when the output timing of the effect sound for the cut-in effect in the variation has arrived. be. When the sound pattern for the cut-in effect is cleared, the sound output device 32 stops outputting the effect sound for the cut-in effect (the effect sound shown in FIG. 28).

In the next step S2040-49, the supervising CPU 141a clears the cut-in effect sound output flag of the supervising RAM 141b, and proceeds to step S2040-50.

In step S2040-50, the supervising CPU 141a confirms whether or not the fixed role product operation first effect sound output flag is set in the decided role product operation first effect sound output flag storage area of the overall RAM 141b. . The fixed role actuation first production effect sound output flag is a flag indicating that the production effect sound (production effect sound shown in FIG. 31) of the fixed role actuation first production is being output. When the output timing of the production effect sound of the fixed role operation first production in the fluctuation comes, the fixed role product operation first effect sound output flag is set to the voice control timer update process (FIGS. 140 to 147) to be described later. ) in step S2420-41. The supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2040-51 when the fixed role product operation first effect sound output flag is set (S2040-50: Yes), and the fixed role product operation first effect sound output flag is set. If not set (S2040-50: No), proceed to step S2040-55.

In step S2040-51, the supervising CPU 141a performs a process of determining the mode of control of the finalized accessory actuation first effect sound control mode. In the determined role product operation first effect sound control mode determination process, the overall CPU 141a refers to the determined role product operation first effect sound control mode determination table in the overall ROM 141c, and determines the type of the effect pattern designation command in the reception buffer. Based on this, the control mode of the production effect sound of the fixed accessory actuation first production is determined.

FIG. 138 is a diagram showing a determined accessory actuation first effect sound control mode determination table. In the fixed role actuation first effect control mode determination table, the type of effect pattern designation command that the integrated control unit 141 can receive from the effect control part 120m and the control mode of the effect sound of the fixed role actuation first effect ( Each set of data indicating "end" or "continue") is stored. The "end" data indicates that the output of the effect sound of the fixed role actuation first effect is immediately stopped when the corresponding effect pattern designation command is received, and the "continue" data indicates that the corresponding effect pattern designation command is received. It indicates that the output of the production effect sound of the fixed accessory operation first production is continued when the pattern designation command is received.

In the next step S2040-52, the supervising CPU 141a determines whether the control mode determined in the fixed accessory actuation first effect sound control mode determination process is "end" or "continue". If the control mode is "end" (S2040-52: Yes), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2040-53; move on.

In step S2040-53, the supervising CPU 141a clears the sound pattern of the fixed accessory actuation first effect. The sound pattern of the fixed role actuation first production, when the output timing of the production effect sound of the fixed role actuation first production in the variation comes, the voice control timer update process (FIGS. 140 to 147) to be described later. Set in step S2420-43. When the sound pattern of the fixed role actuation first production is cleared, the sound output device 32 stops outputting the production effect sound of the fixed role actuation first production (the effect sound shown in FIG. 31).

In the next step S2040-54, the supervising CPU 141a clears the determined role product activation first effect sound output flag of the supervising RAM 141b, and proceeds to step S2040-55.

In step S2040-55, the supervising CPU 141a confirms whether or not the confirmed role product operation second effect sound output flag is set in the decided role product operation second effect sound output flag storage area of the overall RAM 141b. . The fixed role actuation second production effect sound output flag is a flag indicating that the production effect sound (production effect sound shown in FIG. 31) of the fixed role actuation second production is being output. The fixed role product operation second effect sound output flag is set when the output timing of the fixed role product operation second effect sound effect output in the variation comes. ) in step S2420-47. The supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2040-56 when the confirmed role product operation second effect sound output flag is set (S2040-55: Yes), and the confirmed role product operation second effect sound output flag is If not set (S2040-55: No), proceed to step S2040-60.

In step S2040-56, the supervising CPU 141a performs a finalized accessory actuation second effect sound control mode determination process. In the confirmed role product operation second effect sound control mode determination process, the overall CPU 141a refers to the confirmed role product operation second effect sound control mode determination table in the overall ROM 141c, and determines the type of the effect pattern designation command in the reception buffer. Based on this, the control mode of the production effect sound of the fixed accessory actuation second production is determined.

FIG. 139 is a diagram showing a determined accessory actuation second effect sound control mode determination table. The determined role actuation second effect control mode determination table includes the types of effect pattern designation commands that can be received by the overall control unit 141 from the effect control unit 120m and the effect sound control mode of the determined role actuation second effect effect ( Each set of data indicating "end" or "continue") is stored. "End" data indicates that when the relevant production pattern designation command is received, the output of the production effect sound of the second production of the confirmed role operation is immediately stopped, and "Continue" data indicates that the relevant production When the pattern designation command is received, it indicates that the output of the production effect sound of the fixed accessory operation second production is continued.

In the next step S2040-57, the supervising CPU 141a determines whether the control mode determined in the determined accessory actuation second effect sound control mode determination process is "end" or "continue". If the control mode is "end" (S2040-57: Yes), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2040-58. move on.

In step S2040-58, the supervising CPU 141a clears the sound pattern of the confirmed accessory actuation second effect. The sound pattern of the second production of the fixed role product operation, when the output timing of the effect sound of the second production of the fixed role product operation in the variation comes, the voice control timer update process (FIGS. 140 to 147) to be described later. Set in step S2420-49. When the sound pattern of the confirmed role actuation second effect is cleared, the sound output device 32 stops outputting the effect sound of the confirmed role actuation second effect (effect sound shown in FIG. 31).

In the next step S2040-59, the supervising CPU 141a clears the fixed role product operation second effect sound output flag of the supervising RAM 141b, and proceeds to step S2040-60.

In step S2040-60, the overall CPU 141a determines whether or not the command in the reception buffer is a variation start production pattern designation command. If the command in the reception buffer is the production pattern designation command for starting fluctuation (S2040-60: Yes), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2040-61; ) and proceed to step S2040-91.

In step S2040-61, the supervising CPU 141a sets the normal fluctuation effect sound output flag in the normal fluctuation effect sound output flag storage area of the supervising RAM 141b.

In the next step S2040-62, the overall CPU 141a sets the sound pattern of the normal variation effect. Thereafter, in the audio output device 32, the production sound effect of the normal fluctuation production (music (1), music (2), music (3), music (4), music (5) shown in FIG. 10B) , or the effect sound of music (6)) is output.

In the next step S2040-63, the supervising CPU 141a analyzes the effect pattern specifying command for starting the variation, and determines whether or not there is a step-up effect in the series of effects to be executed in the variation. If there is a step-up effect (S2040-63: Yes), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2040-64, and if there is no step-up effect (S2040-63: No), it proceeds to step S2040-66.

In the next step S2040-64, the supervising CPU 141a sets a step-up effect sound waiting flag in the step-up effect sound waiting flag storage area of the supervising RAM 141b.

In the next step S2040-65, the supervising CPU 141a obtains the remaining time until the output timing of the effect sound for the step-up effect, and supervises the value obtained by dividing this time by 2 milliseconds, which is the generation cycle of the reset clock pulse. It is set in the step-up effect sound standby timer counter of the RAM 141b.

In the next step S2040-66, the supervising CPU 141a analyzes the effect pattern specification command for starting the variation, and determines whether or not there is a character appearance effect in the series of effects to be executed in the variation. If there is a character appearance effect (S2040-66: Yes), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2040-67, and if there is no character appearance effect (S2040-66: No), it proceeds to step S2040-71.

In step S2040-67, the supervising CPU 141a determines whether or not the character appearing in the character appearance effect is a premium character. If a premium character appears (S2040-67: Yes), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2040-68, and if a character other than the premium character appears (S2040-67: No), proceeds to step S2040-69.

In step S2040-68, the supervising CPU 141a sets the premium character sound effect flag in the premium character sound effect flag storage area of the supervising RAM 141b.

In the next step S2040-69, the supervising CPU 141a sets a character appearance effect sound effect waiting flag in the character appearance effect sound effect waiting flag storage area of the supervising RAM 141b.

In the next step S2040-70, the supervising CPU 141a obtains the remaining time until the output timing of the effect sound for the character appearance effect, and supervises the value obtained by dividing this time by 2 milliseconds, which is the generation cycle of the reset clock pulse. A character appearance effect sound standby timer counter in the RAM 141b is set.

In the next step S2040-71, the supervising CPU 141a analyzes the variation start effect pattern designation command, and determines whether or not there is a roulette effect in the series of effects to be executed in the variation. The supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2040-72 if there is a roulette effect (S2040-71: Yes), and proceeds to step S2040-74 if there is no roulette effect (S2040-71: No).

In the next step S2040-72, the supervising CPU 141a sets a roulette effect sound effect waiting flag in the roulette effect sound effect waiting flag storage area of the supervising RAM 141b.

In the next step S2040-73, the supervising CPU 141a obtains the remaining time until the output timing of the effect sound of the roulette rendition, divides this time by 2 milliseconds, which is the generation cycle of the reset clock pulse, and divides the value into the supervising RAM 141b. roulette production sound effect standby timer counter.

In the next step S2040-74, the supervising CPU 141a analyzes the variation start effect pattern designation command, and determines whether or not there is an SP development fan effect in the series of effects to be executed in the variation. The supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2040-75 if there is an SP development stimulating effect (S2040-74: Yes), and proceeds to step S2040-77 if there is no SP development stimulating effect (S2040-74: No).

In the next step S2040-75, the supervising CPU 141a sets the SP development stimulating effect sound effect waiting flag in the SP developing stimulating effect sound effect standby flag storage area of the supervising RAM 141b.

In the next step S2040-76, the supervising CPU 141a obtains the remaining time until the output timing of the effect sound for the SP development stage effect, and divides this time by 2 milliseconds, which is the generation cycle of the reset clock pulse. It is set in the SP development fanning production sound effect waiting timer counter of the overall RAM 141b.

In the next step S2040-77, the supervising CPU 141a analyzes the variation start effect pattern designation command, and determines whether or not there is an SP development fixed effect in the series of effects to be executed in the variation. The supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2040-78 when there is an SP development fixed effect (S2040-77: Yes), and proceeds to step S2040-80 when there is no SP development fixed effect (S2040-77: No).

In the next step S2040-78, the supervising CPU 141a sets the SP development finalized effect sound waiting flag in the SP development finalized effect sound effect waiting flag storage area of the supervising RAM 141b.

In the next step S2040-79, the supervising CPU 141a obtains the remaining time until the output timing of the effect sound for the fixed SP development effect, and divides this time by 2 milliseconds, which is the generation cycle of the reset clock pulse. It is set in the SP development fixed effect sound waiting timer counter of the overall RAM 141b.

In the next step S2040-80, the supervising CPU 141a analyzes the effect pattern designation command for starting the variation, and determines whether or not there is a cut-in effect in the series of effects to be executed in the variation. The supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2040-81 if there is a cut-in effect (S2040-80: Yes), and proceeds to step S2040-85 if there is no cut-in effect (S2040-80: No).

In step S2040-81, the overall CPU 141a determines whether or not the background of the cut-in effect is rainbow colored. If the background is rainbow colored (S2040-81: Yes), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2040-82, and if the background is not rainbow colored (S2040-81: No), proceeds to step S2040-83.

In step S2040-82, the supervising CPU 141a sets the premium cut-in sound effect flag in the premium cut-in sound effect flag storage area of the supervising RAM 141b.

In the next step S2040-83, the supervising CPU 141a sets a cut-in effect sound waiting flag in the cut-in effect sound waiting flag storage area of the supervising RAM 141b.

In the next step S2040-84, the supervising CPU 141a obtains the remaining time until the output timing of the effect sound for the cut-in effect, and supervises the value obtained by dividing this time by 2 milliseconds, which is the generation cycle of the reset clock pulse. It is set in the cut-in effect sound waiting timer counter of the RAM 141b.

In the next step S2040-85, the supervising CPU 141a analyzes the production pattern designation command for starting the variation, and determines whether or not there is a fixed accessory actuation first production in the series of productions to be executed in the variation. . The supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2040-86 if there is a fixed role actuation first effect (S2040-85: Yes), and if there is no fixed role actuation first effect (S2040-85: No), step S2040- Proceed to 88.

In the next step S2040-86, the supervising CPU 141a sets the confirmed role actuation first effect sound waiting flag in the decided role actuation first effect sound waiting flag storage area of the supervising RAM 141b.

In the next step S2040-87, the supervising CPU 141a obtains the remaining time until the output timing of the production effect sound of the first production of the fixed role product operation, and divides this time by 2 milliseconds, which is the generation cycle of the reset clock pulse. The value obtained is set in the finalized accessory actuation first effect sound standby timer counter of the overall RAM 141b.

In the next step S2040-88, the supervising CPU 141a analyzes the production pattern specification command for starting the variation, and determines whether or not there is a second production of the confirmed role product operation in the series of productions to be executed in the variation. . The supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2040-89 if there is a confirmed role actuation second effect (S2040-88: Yes), and if there is no confirmed role actuation second effect (S2040-88: No), step S2040- Go to 91.

In the next step S2040-89, the supervising CPU 141a sets the confirmed role actuation second effect sound waiting flag in the decided role actuation second effect sound waiting flag storage area of the supervising RAM 141b.

In the next step S2040-90, the supervising CPU 141a obtains the remaining time until the output timing of the production effect sound of the second production of the fixed role product operation, and divides this time by 2 milliseconds, which is the generation cycle of the reset clock pulse. The value obtained is set in the finalized accessory actuation second effect sound standby timer counter of the overall RAM 141b.

In the next step S2040-91, the overall CPU 141a determines whether or not the command in the reception buffer is the command for designating the effect pattern for finalizing the design. If the command in the reception buffer is not the production pattern designation command for design confirmation (S2040-91: No), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2040-92, and if it is the production pattern designation command for design establishment (S2040-91: Yes ) and proceed to step S2040-98.

In step S2040-92, the overall CPU 141a determines whether or not the command in the reception buffer is an effect pattern designation command for developing to the SP ready-to-win effect. If the command in the reception buffer is an effect pattern designation command for development to the SP ready-to-win effect (S2040-92: Yes), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2040-93, where it is not an effect pattern designation command for development to the SP ready-to-win effect. If so (S2040-92: No), the process proceeds to step S2040-95.

In step S2040-93, the supervising CPU 141a sets the SP reach effect sound output flag in the SP reach effect sound output flag storage area of the supervising RAM 141b.

In the next step S2040-94, the supervising CPU 141a sets the sound pattern of the SP ready-to-win effect, and proceeds to step S2040-101. Thereafter, the audio output device 31 outputs the effect sound of the SP reach effect (music (8) shown in FIG. 17).

In step S2040-95, the overall CPU 141a determines whether or not the command in the reception buffer is a ready-to-win effect pattern designation command. If the command in the reception buffer is a ready-to-win effect pattern designation command (S2040-95: Yes), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2040-96, and if not a ready-to-win effect pattern designation command (S2040-95: No). , go to step S2040-105.

In step S2040-96, the supervising CPU 141a sets the normal reach effect sound output flag in the normal reach effect sound output flag storage area of the supervising RAM 141b.

At the next step S2040-97, the supervising CPU 141a sets the sound pattern of the normal reach effect, and proceeds to step S2040-103. After that, the sound output device 31 outputs the effect sound of the normal reach effect (music (7) shown in FIG. 15).

In step S2040-98, the overall CPU 141a sets a mute sound pattern, and proceeds to step S2040-99. After that, the sound is muted in the audio output device 31 .

In step S2040-99, the supervising CPU 141a checks whether or not the SP reach effect sound output flag is set in the SP reach effect sound output flag storage area of the supervising RAM 141b. If the SP reach effect sound output flag is set (2040-99: Yes), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2040-100, and if the SP reach effect sound output flag is not set (2040-99: No), go to step S2040-101.

In step S2040-100, the supervising CPU 141a clears the SP reach effect sound output flag, and proceeds to step S2040-101.

In step S2040-101, the supervising CPU 141a checks whether or not the normal reach effect sound output flag is set in the normal reach effect sound output flag storage area of the supervising RAM 141b. If the normal reach effect sound output flag is set (S2040-101: Yes), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2040-102, and if the normal reach effect sound output flag is not set (S2040-101: No). , go to step S2040-103.

In step S2040-102, the overall CPU 141a clears the normal reach effect sound output flag, and proceeds to step S2040-103.

In step S2040-103, the supervising CPU 141a confirms whether or not the normal fluctuation effect sound output flag is set in the normal fluctuation sound output flag storage area of the supervising RAM 141b. If the normal fluctuation effect sound output flag is set (S2040-103: Yes), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2040-104, and if the normal change effect sound output flag is not set (S2040-103: No), go to step S2040-105.

In step S2040-104, the overall CPU 141a clears the normal fluctuation effect sound output flag, and proceeds to step S2040-105.

In step S2040-105, the overall CPU 141a determines whether or not the command in the reception buffer is an opening effect pattern designation command. If the command in the reception buffer is an opening effect pattern designation command (S2040-105: Yes), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2040-106; Proceed to step S2040-107.

In step S2040-106, the overall CPU 141a sets the sound pattern for the opening effect. After that, the sound output device 32 outputs the effect sound of the opening effect.

In step S2040-107, the overall CPU 141a determines whether or not the command in the reception buffer is a round effect pattern designation command. If the command in the reception buffer is a round effect pattern designation command (S2040-107: Yes), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2040-108; Proceed to step S2040-109.

In step S2040-108, the overall CPU 141a sets a sound pattern for round effects. After that, the sound output device 32 outputs the effect sound of the round effect.

In step S2040-109, the overall CPU 141a determines whether or not the command in the reception buffer is an ending effect pattern designation command. If the command in the reception buffer is an ending effect pattern designation command (S2040-109: Yes), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2040-110; Proceed to step S2040-111.

In step S2040-110, the overall CPU 141a sets the sound pattern for the ending effect. After that, the sound output device 32 outputs the effect sound of the ending effect.

In step S2040-111, the overall CPU 141a determines whether or not the command in the reception buffer is a pending display change effect pattern specification command. If the command in the reception buffer is a pending display change effect pattern designation command (S2040-111: Yes), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2040-112, and if not a pending display change effect pattern designation command (S2040-111 : No), and proceeds to step S2040-113.

In step S2040-112, the overall CPU 141a sets the sound pattern of the pending display change effect. After that, the audio output device 32 outputs the effect sound of the pending display change effect.

In step S2040-113, the supervising CPU 141a determines whether or not the command in the reception buffer is an effect pattern designating command for success in ranking up. If the command in the reception buffer is a production pattern designation command for successful rank up (S2040-113: Yes), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2040-114. : No), go to step S2040-115.

In step S2040-114, the supervising CPU 141a sets a sound pattern for a rank-up success effect. After that, the sound output device 32 outputs the effect sound of the rank-up success effect.

In step S2040-115, the overall CPU 141a determines whether or not the command in the reception buffer is an effect pattern specifying command for failing in rank up. If the command in the reception buffer is a production pattern designation command for rank-up failure (S2040-115: Yes), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2040-116. : No), and proceeds to step S2040-117.

In step S2040-116, the overall CPU 141a sets a sound pattern for a rank-up failure effect. After that, the sound output device 32 outputs the effect sound of the rank-up failure effect.

In step S2040-117, the overall CPU 141a determines whether or not the command in the reception buffer is a stage change effect pattern designation command. If the command in the reception buffer is a stage change effect pattern designation command (S2040-117: Yes), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2040-118, and if not a stage change effect pattern designation command (S2040-117: No ), ending the current sound pattern setting process.

In step S2040-118, the overall CPU 141a sets the sound pattern for the stage change effect. After that, the sound output device 32 outputs the effect sound of the new stage.

140 to 147 are flowcharts showing the details of the voice control timer update processing (step S2420 in FIG. 77) of the overall control unit 141. FIG. In FIG. 140, the supervising CPU 141a decrements the timer counter of the supervising RAM 141b, which is referred to in the sound pattern setting process, by 1 if it is not 0, and updates it.

In the next step S2420-2, the supervising CPU 141a checks whether or not the step-up effect sound standby flag is set in the step-up effect sound standby flag storage area of the supervising RAM 141b. If the step-up effect sound waiting flag is set (S2420-2: Yes), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2420-3, and if the step-up effect sound waiting flag is not set (S2420-2: No), go to step S2420-8.

In step S2420-3, the supervising CPU 141a determines whether or not the step-up effect sound waiting timer counter in the supervising RAM 141b is greater than zero. If the step-up effect sound waiting timer counter is 0 (S2420-3: No), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2420-4, and if the step-up effect sound waiting timer counter is greater than 0 (S2420-3: Yes), go to step S2420-8.

In step S2420-4, the overall CPU 141a clears the step-up effect sound effect standby flag.

In the next step S2420-5, the supervising CPU 141a sets a step-up effect sound output flag in the step-up effect sound output flag storage area of the supervising RAM 141b.

In the next step S2420-6, the supervising CPU 141a obtains the remaining time until the output end timing of the effect sound of the step-up effect, and divides this time by 2 milliseconds, which is the generation cycle of the reset clock pulse. A step-up effect sound completion standby timer counter in the general RAM 141b is set.

In the next step S2420-7, the overall CPU 141a sets a sound pattern for a step-up effect. After that, the sound output device 32 outputs the effect sound of the step-up effect.

In the next step S2420-8, the supervising CPU 141a checks whether or not the character appearance effect sound effect waiting flag is set in the character appearance effect sound effect waiting flag storage area of the supervising RAM 141b. If the character appearance effect sound effect wait flag is set (S2420-8: Yes), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2420-9, and if the character appearance effect sound effect wait flag is not set (S2420-8: No), go to step S2420-14.

In step S2420-9, the supervising CPU 141a determines whether or not the character appearance effect sound standby timer counter in the supervising RAM 141b is greater than zero. If the character appearance effect sound effect standby timer counter is 0 (S2420-9: No), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2420-10, and if the character appearance effect sound effect standby timer counter is greater than 0 (S2420-9: Yes), go to step S2420-14.

In step S2420-10, the supervising CPU 141a clears the character appearance effect sound effect standby flag.

In the next step S2420-11, the supervising CPU 141a sets a character appearance effect sound output flag in the character appearance effect sound output flag storage area of the supervising RAM 141b.

In the next step S2420-12, the supervising CPU 141a obtains the remaining time until the output end timing of the effect sound for the character appearance effect, and divides this time by 2 milliseconds, which is the generation cycle of the reset clock pulse. It is set in the character appearance effect sound end waiting timer counter of the overall RAM 141b.

In the next step S2420-13, the supervising CPU 141a sets the sound pattern for the character appearance effect. After that, the sound output device 32 outputs the effect sound of the character appearance effect.

In the next step S2420-14, the supervising CPU 141a checks whether or not the roulette effect sound effect waiting flag is set in the roulette effect sound effect waiting flag storage area of the supervising RAM 141b. If the roulette effect sound effect standby flag is set (S2420-14: Yes), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2420-15, and if the roulette effect sound effect standby flag is not set (S2420-14: No). , to step S2420-20.

In step S2420-15, the supervising CPU 141a determines whether or not the roulette effect sound effect standby timer counter in the supervising RAM 141b is greater than zero. If the roulette effect sound effect standby timer counter is 0 (S2420-15: No), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2420-16, and if the roulette effect sound effect standby timer counter is greater than 0 (S2420-15: Yes). , to step S2420-20.

In step S2420-16, the overall CPU 141a clears the roulette effect sound effect standby flag.

In the next step S2420-17, the supervising CPU 141a sets a roulette effect sound output flag in the roulette effect sound output flag storage area of the supervising RAM 141b.

In the next step S2420-18, the supervising CPU 141a obtains the remaining time until the output end timing of the effect sound of the roulette rendition, and supervises the value obtained by dividing this time by 2 milliseconds, which is the generation cycle of the reset clock pulse. It is set in the roulette effect sound end standby timer counter of the RAM 141b.

In the next step S2420-19, the overall CPU 141a sets the sound pattern for the roulette effect. After that, the sound output device 32 outputs the effect sound of the roulette performance.

In the next step S2420-20, the supervising CPU 141a confirms whether or not the SP developing stimulating effect sound effect waiting flag is set in the SP developing stimulating effect sound effect standby flag storage area of the supervising RAM 141b. The supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2420-21 if the SP development stimulating effect sound effect standby flag is set (S2420-20: Yes), and if the SP development stimulating effect sound effect standby flag is not set (S2420- 20: No), go to step S2420-26.

In step S2420-21, the supervising CPU 141a determines whether or not the wait timer counter for the SP development stimulating effect sound effect standby timer in the supervising RAM 141b is greater than zero. The supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2420-22 if the SP development stimulating effect sound effect standby timer counter is 0 (S2420-21: No), and if the SP development stimulating effect sound effect standby timer counter is greater than 0 (S2420- 21: Yes), go to step S2420-26.

In step S2420-22, the supervising CPU 141a clears the SP development stimulating production sound effect standby flag.

In the next step S2420-23, the supervising CPU 141a sets the SP developing stimulating effect sound output flag in the SP developing stimulating effect sound output flag storage area of the supervising RAM 141b.

In the next step S2420-24, the supervising CPU 141a obtains the remaining time until the output end timing of the effect sound for the SP development hype effect, and divides this time by 2 milliseconds, which is the generation cycle of the reset clock pulse. is set in the SP development fanning effect sound end standby timer counter of the overall RAM 141b.

In the next step S2420-25, the supervising CPU 141a sets the sound pattern of the SP development hype effect. After that, the sound output device 32 outputs the effect sound of the SP development hype effect.

In the next step S2420-26, the supervising CPU 141a confirms whether or not the SP development finalized effect sound effect standby flag is set in the SP development finalized effect sound effect standby flag storage area of the supervising RAM 141b. If the SP development fixed effect sound effect waiting flag is set (S2420-26: Yes), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2420-27, and if the SP development fixed effect sound effect waiting flag is not set (S2420- 26: No), go to step S2420-32.

In step S2420-27, the supervising CPU 141a determines whether or not the SP development fixed effect sound waiting timer counter in the supervising RAM 141b is greater than zero. If the SP development fixed production sound effect standby timer counter is 0 (S2420-27: No), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2420-28. 27: Yes), go to step S2420-32.

In step S2420-28, the supervising CPU 141a clears the SP development fixed effect sound waiting flag.

In the next step S2420-29, the supervising CPU 141a sets the SP development fixed effect sound output flag in the SP development fixed effect sound output flag storage area of the supervising RAM 141b.

In the next step S2420-30, the supervising CPU 141a obtains the remaining time until the output end timing of the effect sound for the fixed SP development effect, and divides this time by 2 milliseconds, which is the generation cycle of the reset clock pulse. is set in the SP development fixed production sound effect termination standby timer counter of the overall RAM 141b.

At the next step S2420-31, the supervising CPU 141a sets the sound pattern of the SP development finalization effect. Thereafter, the sound output device 32 outputs the effect sound of the SP development fixed effect.

In the next step S2420-32, the supervising CPU 141a checks whether or not the cut-in effect sound waiting flag is set in the cut-in effect sound waiting flag storage area of the supervising RAM 141b. If the cut-in effect sound waiting flag is set (S2420-32: Yes), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2420-33, and if the cut-in effect sound waiting flag is not set (S2420-32: No), go to step S2420-38.

In step S2420-33, the supervising CPU 141a determines whether or not the cut-in effect sound standby timer counter in the supervising RAM 141b is greater than zero. If the cut-in effect sound waiting timer counter is 0 (S2420-33: No), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2420-34, and if the cut-in effect sound waiting timer counter is greater than 0 (S2420-33: Yes), go to step S2420-38.

In step S2420-34, the overall CPU 141a clears the cut-in effect sound waiting flag.

In the next step S2420-35, the supervising CPU 141a sets the cut-in effect sound output flag in the cut-in effect sound output flag storage area of the supervising RAM 141b.

In the next step S2420-36, the supervising CPU 141a obtains the remaining time until the output end timing of the effect sound for the cut-in effect, and divides this time by 2 milliseconds, which is the generation cycle of the reset clock pulse. It is set in the cut-in effect sound end standby timer counter of the overall RAM 141b.

In the next step S2420-37, the overall CPU 141a sets a sound pattern for cut-in effects. After that, the sound output device 32 outputs the effect sound of the cut-in effect.

In the next step S2420-38, the supervising CPU 141a confirms whether or not the confirmed role actuation first effect sound waiting flag is set in the decided role actuation first effect sound waiting flag storage area of the supervising RAM 141b. . The supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2420-39 when the confirmed role product operation first effect sound standby flag is set (S2420-38: Yes), and the confirmed role product operation first effect sound wait flag is set. If not (S2420-38: No), proceed to step S2420-44.

In step S2420-39, the supervising CPU 141a determines whether or not the fixed role product actuation first effect sound standby timer counter in the supervising RAM 141b is greater than zero. The supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2420-40 when the fixed role product operation first effect sound standby timer counter is 0 (S2420-39: No), and the fixed role product operation first effect sound standby timer counter is 0 If larger (S2420-39: Yes), proceed to step S2420-44.

In step S2420-40, the supervising CPU 141a clears the confirmed accessory activation first effect sound standby flag.

In the next step S2420-41, the supervising CPU 141a sets the fixed role actuation first effect sound output flag in the decided role actuation first effect sound output flag storage area of the supervising RAM 141b.

In the next step S2420-42, the supervising CPU 141a obtains the remaining time until the output end timing of the production effect sound of the fixed role actuation first production, and this time is 2 milliseconds, which is the generation cycle of the reset clock pulse. The divided value is set in the fixed accessory actuation first effect sound end standby timer counter of the overall RAM 141b.

In the next step S2420-43, the supervising CPU 141a sets the sound pattern of the finalized accessory actuation first effect. After that, the sound output device 32 outputs the production effect sound of the first production of the confirmed accessory actuation.

In the next step S2420-44, the supervising CPU 141a confirms whether or not the confirmed role product actuation second effect sound waiting flag is set in the decided role product actuation second effect sound waiting flag storage area of the supervising RAM 141b. . The supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2420-45 when the confirmed role product operation second effect sound standby flag is set (S2420-44: Yes), and the confirmed role product operation second effect sound wait flag is set. If not (S2420-44: No), proceed to step S2420-50.

In step S2420-45, the supervising CPU 141a determines whether or not the fixed role product actuation second effect sound standby timer counter in the supervising RAM 141b is greater than zero. The supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2420-46 when the confirmed role product operation second effect sound standby timer counter is 0 (S2420-45: No), and the confirmed role product operation second effect sound standby timer counter is 0 If greater (S2420-45: Yes), proceed to step S2420-50.

In step S2420-46, the supervising CPU 141a clears the confirmed accessory activation second effect sound standby flag.

In the next step S2420-47, the supervising CPU 141a sets the confirmed role actuation second effect sound output flag in the decided role actuation second effect sound output flag storage area of the overall RAM 141b.

In the next step S2420-48, the supervising CPU 141a obtains the remaining time until the output end timing of the production effect sound of the second production of the confirmed accessory operation, and this time is set to 2 milliseconds, which is the generation cycle of the reset clock pulse. The value obtained by division is set in the final standby timer counter for the end of the second production effect sound for the finalized role in the general RAM 141b.

In the next step S2420-49, the overall CPU 141a sets the sound pattern of the second production of the finalized accessory actuation. After that, the sound output device 32 outputs the effect sound of the second production of the confirmed accessory actuation.

In step S2420-50, the supervising CPU 141a checks whether or not the step-up effect sound output flag is set in the step-up effect sound output flag storage area of the supervising RAM 141b. If the step-up effect sound output flag is set (S2420-50: Yes), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2420-51, and if the step-up effect sound output flag is not set (S2420- 50: No), go to step S2420-54.

In step S2420-51, the supervising CPU 141a determines whether or not the step-up effect sound termination standby timer counter in the supervising RAM 141b is greater than zero. If the step-up effect sound end standby timer counter is 0 (S2420-51: No), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2420-52. 51: Yes), go to step S2420-54.

In step S2420-52, the overall CPU 141a clears the step-up effect sound output flag.

At step S2420-53, the overall CPU 141a clears the sound pattern of the step-up effect. When the sound pattern of the step-up effect is cleared, the sound output device 32 stops outputting the effect sound of the step-up effect.

In step S2420-54, the supervising CPU 141a checks whether or not the character appearance effect sound output flag is set in the character appearance effect sound output flag storage area of the supervising RAM 141b. If the character appearance effect sound output flag is set (S2420-54: Yes), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2420-55, and if the character appearance effect sound output flag is not set (S2420- 54: No), go to step S2420-60.

In step S2420-55, the supervising CPU 141a determines whether or not the character appearance effect sound end standby timer counter in the supervising RAM 141b is greater than zero. If the character appearance effect sound end standby timer counter is 0 (S2420-55: No), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2420-56, and if the character appearance effect sound end standby timer counter is greater than 0 (S2420- 55: Yes), go to step S2420-60.

In step S2420-56, the supervising CPU 141a checks whether or not the premium character sound effect flag is set in the premium character sound effect flag storage area of the supervising RAM 141b. If the premium character sound effect flag is set (S2420-56: Yes), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2420-57; if the premium character sound effect flag is not set (S2420-56: No), step Proceed to S2420-58.

In step S2420-57, the supervising CPU 141a clears the premium character sound effect flag.

In step S2420-58, the supervising CPU 141a clears the character appearance effect sound output flag.

In step S2420-59, the supervising CPU 141a clears the sound pattern of the character appearance effect. When the sound pattern for the character appearance presentation is cleared, the sound output device 32 stops outputting the presentation effect sound for the character appearance presentation.

In step S2420-60, the supervising CPU 141a checks whether or not the roulette effect sound output flag is set in the roulette effect sound output flag storage area of the supervising RAM 141b. If the roulette effect sound effect output flag is set (S2420-60: Yes), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2420-61, and if the roulette effect sound effect output flag is not set (S2420-60: No), go to step S2420-64.

In step S2420-61, the overall CPU 141a determines whether or not the roulette effect sound end standby timer counter in the overall RAM 141b is greater than zero. If the roulette effect sound effect end standby timer counter is 0 (S2420-61: No), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2420-62, and if the roulette effect sound effect end standby timer counter is greater than 0 (S2420-61: Yes), go to step S2420-64.

In step S2420-62, the overall CPU 141a clears the roulette effect sound output flag.

In step S2420-63, the overall CPU 141a clears the sound pattern of the roulette effect. When the sound pattern of the roulette effect is cleared, the sound output device 32 stops outputting the effect sound of the roulette effect.

In step S2420-64, the supervising CPU 141a checks whether or not the SP developing stimulating effect sound output flag is set in the SP developing stimulating effect sound output flag storage area of the supervising RAM 141b. The supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2420-65 if the SP development stimulating effect sound output flag is set (S2420-64: Yes), and if the SP development stimulating effect sound effect output flag is not set ( S2420-64: No), go to step S2420-68.

In step S2420-65, the supervising CPU 141a determines whether or not the wait timer counter for ending the SP development stimulating effect sound effects in the supervising RAM 141b is greater than zero. The supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2420-66 if the SP development fanning effect sound end standby timer counter is 0 (S2420-65: No), and if the SP development fanning effect sound effect end standby timer counter is greater than 0 ( S2420-65: Yes), proceed to step S2420-68.

In step S2420-66, the supervising CPU 141a clears the flag during output of the SP development stimulating effect sound effect.

In step S2420-67, the supervising CPU 141a clears the sound pattern of the SP development fan effect. When the sound pattern of the SP development hype effect is cleared, the sound output device 32 stops outputting the effect sound of the SP development hype effect.

In step S2420-68, the supervising CPU 141a confirms whether or not the SP development fixed effect sound output flag is set in the SP development fixed effect sound output flag storage area of the supervising RAM 141b. If the SP development fixed effect sound output flag is set (S2420-68: Yes), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2420-69, and if the SP development fixed effect sound output flag is not set ( S2420-68: No), go to step S2420-72.

In step S2420-69, the supervising CPU 141a determines whether or not the SP development fixed effect sound end standby timer counter in the supervising RAM 141b is greater than zero. If the SP development fixed effect sound end standby timer counter is 0 (S2420-69: No), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2420-70, and if the SP development fixed effect sound end standby timer counter is greater than 0 ( S2420-69: Yes), proceed to step S2420-72.

In step S2420-70, the supervising CPU 141a clears the SP development fixed effect sound output flag.

In step S2420-71, the supervising CPU 141a clears the sound pattern of the SP development finalization effect. When the sound pattern of the SP development fixed effect is cleared, the sound output device 32 stops outputting the effect sound of the SP development fixed effect.

In step S2420-72, the supervising CPU 141a checks whether or not the cut-in effect sound output flag is set in the cut-in effect sound output flag storage area of the supervising RAM 141b. If the cut-in effect sound output flag is set (S2420-72: Yes), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2420-73, and if the cut-in effect sound output flag is not set (S2420- 72: No), go to step S2420-78.

In step S2420-73, the supervising CPU 141a determines whether or not the cut-in effect sound termination standby timer counter in the supervising RAM 141b is greater than zero. If the cut-in effect sound end standby timer counter is 0 (S2420-73: No), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2420-74, and if the cut-in effect sound end standby timer counter is greater than 0 (S2420- 73: Yes), go to step S2420-78.

In step S2420-74, the supervising CPU 141a checks whether or not the premium cut-in sound effect flag is set in the premium cut-in sound effect flag storage area of the supervising RAM 141b. If the premium cut-in sound effect flag is set (S2420-74: Yes), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2420-75, and if the premium cut-in sound effect flag is not set (S2420-74: No). , go to step S2420-76.

In step S2420-75, the supervising CPU 141a clears the premium cut-in sound effect flag.

In step S2420-76, the overall CPU 141a clears the cut-in effect sound output flag.

At step S2420-77, the overall CPU 141a clears the sound pattern of the cut-in effect. When the sound pattern for the cut-in effect is cleared, the sound output device 32 stops outputting the effect sound for the cut-in effect.

In step S2420-78, the supervising CPU 141a confirms whether or not the fixed role product operation first effect sound output flag is set in the decided role product operation first effect sound output flag storage area of the overall RAM 141b. . The supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2420-79 when the confirmed role product operation first effect sound output flag is set (S2420-78: Yes), and the fixed role operation first effect sound output flag is If not set (S2420-78: No), proceed to step S2420-82.

In step S2420-79, the supervising CPU 141a determines whether or not the fixed role product activation first effect sound end waiting timer counter in the supervising RAM 141b is greater than zero. The supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2420-80 when the fixed role product operation first effect sound end standby timer counter is 0 (S2420-79: No), and the fixed role product operation first effect sound end standby timer counter is greater than 0 (S2420-79: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2420-82.

In step S2420-80, the supervising CPU 141a clears the fixed accessory actuation first effect sound output flag.

In step S2420-81, the supervising CPU 141a clears the sound pattern of the fixed accessory actuation first effect. When the sound pattern of the fixed role actuation first effect is cleared, the sound output device 32 stops outputting the effect sound of the fixed role actuation first effect.

In step S2420-82, the supervising CPU 141a confirms whether or not the determined role product operation second effect sound output flag is set in the determined role product operation second effect sound output flag storage area of the overall RAM 141b. . The supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2420-83 when the confirmed role product operation second effect sound output flag is set (S2420-82: Yes), and the confirmed role product operation second effect sound output flag is If not set (S2420-82: No), the current voice control timer update process is terminated.

In step S2420-83, the supervising CPU 141a determines whether or not the fixed role product actuation second effect sound end standby timer counter in the supervising RAM 141b is greater than zero. The supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2420-84 when the fixed role product operation second effect sound end standby timer counter is 0 (S2420-83: No), and the fixed role product operation second effect sound end standby timer counter is greater than 0 (S2420-83: Yes), the current voice control timer update process is terminated.

In step S2420-84, the supervising CPU 141a clears the confirmed accessory actuation second effect sound output flag.

In step S2420-85, the supervising CPU 141a clears the sound pattern of the confirmed accessory actuation second effect. When the sound pattern of the confirmed role actuation second effect is cleared, the sound output device 32 stops outputting the effect sound of the confirmed role actuation second effect.

148 to 159 are flowcharts showing details of the lamp emission information setting process (step S2530 in FIG. 78) of the integrated control unit 141. FIG. In FIG. 148, the lamp CPU 150a confirms whether or not the normal fluctuation effect lamp lighting flag is set in the normal fluctuation effect lamp lighting flag storage area of the lamp RAM 150b (S2530-1). The normal fluctuation effect lamp light emission flag is the light emission mode of the normal change effect (light emission patterns (1), (2), (3), (4), (5), (4), (5), or ( 6)) is a flag indicating that the lamp 34d is emitting light. The normal fluctuation lamp light emission flag is set in step S2530-61, which will be described later, when an effect pattern specifying command for starting fluctuation is received from the effect control unit 120m. If the normal fluctuation effect lamp light emission flag is set (S2530-1: Yes), the lamp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2530-2, and if the normal change effect lamp light emission flag is not set (S2530-1: No), go to step S2530-6.

In step S2530-2, lamp CPU 150a performs normal fluctuation effect lamp control mode determination processing. In the normal fluctuation production lamp control mode determination process, the lamp CPU 150a refers to the normal fluctuation production lamp control mode determination table in the lamp ROM 150c, and based on the type of the production pattern designation command in the reception buffer, determines the normal fluctuation production lamp 34d. Determine control mode.

FIG. 160 is a diagram showing a normal fluctuation effect lamp control mode determination table. In the normal fluctuation production control mode determination table, the type of production pattern designation command that can be received by the lamp/drive control unit 150 from the production control unit 120m and the control mode ("end" or "continue") of the lamp 34d of the normal fluctuation production ) are stored. The "end" data indicates that the light emission of the lamp 34d of the normal variable effect is immediately terminated when the corresponding effect pattern specifying command is received, and the "continue" data indicates that the corresponding effect pattern specifying command is received. In this case, it indicates that the light emission of the lamp 34d of the normal fluctuation effect is continued.

In the next step S2530-3, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether the control mode determined in the normal variation effect lamp control mode determination process is "end" or "continue". If the control mode is "end" (S2530-3: Yes), the lamp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2530-4, and if the control mode is "continue" (S2530-3: No), the process proceeds to step S2530-6. move on.

In step S2530-4, the lamp CPU 150a clears the lamp emission information of the normal variation effect. Lamp light emission information of normal fluctuation production is set in step S2530-62 described later when a production pattern designation command for starting fluctuation is received from production control unit 120m. When the lamp light emission information of the normal variation effect is cleared, the light emission mode of the normal change effect (light emission patterns (1), (2), (3), (4) shown in FIG. 10(b) in the lamp 34d , (5), or (6)) ends.

In the next step S2530-5, the lamp CPU 150a clears the normal fluctuation effect lamp lighting flag of the lamp RAM 150b, and proceeds to step S2530-6.

In step S2530-6, the lamp CPU 150a confirms whether or not the step-up effect lamp light-emitting flag is set in the step-up effect lamp light-emitting flag storage area of the lamp RAM 150b (S2530-6). The step-up effect lamp light emission flag is a flag indicating that the lamp 34c is emitting light in the step-up effect light emission mode (light emission pattern (9) shown in FIG. 19). The step-up lamp light-emitting flag is set in step S2810-5 of the lamp control timer update process (FIGS. 173 to 180), which will be described later, when the light emission timing of the step-up effect lamp 34c in the variation has arrived. . If the step-up effect lamp light-emitting flag is set (S2530-6: Yes), the lamp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2530-7, and if the step-up effect lamp light-emitting flag is not set (S2530-6: No), go to step S2530-11.

In step S2530-7, lamp CPU 150a performs step-up effect lamp control mode determination processing. In the step-up effect lamp control mode determination process, the lamp CPU 150a refers to the step-up effect lamp control mode determination table in the lamp ROM 150c, and determines the step-up effect lamp 34c based on the type of the effect pattern designation command in the reception buffer. Determine control mode.

FIG. 161 is a diagram showing a step-up effect lamp control mode determination table. The step-up effect control mode determination table includes the types of effect pattern designation commands that can be received by the lamp/drive control unit 150 from the effect control unit 120m and the control mode ("end" or "continue") of the step-up effect lamp 34c. ) are stored. The "end" data indicates that the light emission of the step-up effect lamp 34c is immediately terminated when the corresponding effect pattern specifying command is received, and the "continue" data indicates that the corresponding effect pattern specifying command is received. It indicates that the light emission of the lamp 34c for the step-up effect is continued in the case of the step-up effect.

In the next step S2530-8, lamp CPU 150a determines whether the control mode determined in the step-up effect lamp control mode determination process is "end" or "continue". If the control mode is "end" (S2530-8: Yes), the lamp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2530-9. move on.

In step S2530-9, the lamp CPU 150a clears the lamp emission information for the step-up effect. The step-up effect lamp light emission information is set in step S2810-7 of the lamp control timer update process (FIGS. 173 to 180) to be described later when the light emission timing of the step-up effect lamp 34c in the variation comes. be. When the step-up effect lamp light emission information is cleared, the lamp 34c terminates light emission in the step-up effect light emission mode (light emission pattern (9) shown in FIG. 19).

In the next step S2530-10, the lamp CPU 150a clears the step-up effect lamp lighting flag of the lamp RAM 150b, and proceeds to step S2530-11.

In step S2530-11, the lamp CPU 150a confirms whether or not the normal reach effect lamp light emitting flag is set in the normal reach effect lamp light emitting flag storage area of the lamp RAM 150b. The normal reach effect lamp light emission flag is a flag indicating that the lamp 34d is emitting light in the normal reach effect light emission mode (light emission pattern (7) shown in FIG. 15). The normal reach effect lamp light emitting flag is set in step S2530-96 described later when the effect pattern specification command for reaching establishment is received from the effect control unit 120m. If the normal reach effect lamp light emitting flag is set (S2530-11: Yes), the lamp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2530-12, and if the normal reach effect lamp light emitting flag is not set (S2530-11: No). , to step S2530-16.

In step S2530-12, lamp CPU 150a performs normal reach effect lamp control mode determination processing. In the normal reach effect lamp control mode determination process, the lamp CPU 150a refers to the normal reach effect lamp control mode determination table in the lamp ROM 150c, and determines the control mode of the normal reach effect lamp 34d based on the type of the effect pattern designation command in the reception buffer. decide.

FIG. 162 is a diagram showing a normal reach effect lamp control mode determination table. In the normal reach effect control mode determination table, the type of effect pattern designation command that can be received by the lamp/drive control unit 150 from the effect control unit 120m and the control mode ("end" or "continue") of the lamp 34d of the normal reach effect are specified. Each set of data shown is stored. The "end" data indicates that the light emission of the normal reach effect lamp 34d is immediately terminated when the corresponding effect pattern designation command is received, and the "continue" data indicates that the corresponding effect pattern designation command is received. In this case, it indicates that the light emission of the lamp 34d for the normal reach effect is continued.

In the next step S2530-13, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether the control mode determined in the normal reach effect lamp control mode determination process is "end" or "continue". If the control mode is "end" (S2530-13: Yes), the lamp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2530-14. move on.

In step S2530-14, the lamp CPU 150a clears the lamp emission information for the normal reach effect. The normal reach effect lamp light emission information is set in step S2530-95 described later when a reach effect pattern specification command is received from the effect control unit 120m. When the normal reach effect lamp light emission information is cleared, the light emission of the normal reach effect light emission mode (light emission pattern (7) shown in FIG. 15) ends in the lamp 34d.

In the next step S2530-15, the lamp CPU 150a clears the normal reach effect lamp lighting flag of the lamp RAM 150b, and proceeds to step S2530-16.

In step S2530-16, the lamp CPU 150a confirms whether or not the character appearance effect lamp lighting flag is set in the character appearance effect lamp lighting flag storage area of the lamp RAM 150b (S2530-16). The character appearance effect lamp lighting flag is a flag indicating that the lamp 34c is emitting light in the character appearance effect light emission mode (light emission pattern (12) shown in FIG. 23). The character appearance lamp lighting flag is set in step S2810-11 of the lamp control timer update process (FIGS. 173 to 180), which will be described later, when the lighting timing of the character appearance effect lamp 34c in the variation has arrived. . If the character appearance effect lamp light emitting flag is set (S2530-16: Yes), the lamp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2530-17, and if the character appearance effect lamp light emitting flag is not set (S2530-16: No), go to step S2530-23.

In step S2530-17, lamp CPU 150a confirms whether or not the premium character lamp flag is set in the premium character lamp flag storage area of lamp RAM 150b. The premium character lamp flag is set in step S2530-68, which will be described later, when the character appearing in the character appearance effect is a premium character. If the premium character lamp flag is set (S2530-17: Yes), the lamp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2530-18; Go to 19.

In step S2530-18, lamp CPU 150a performs premium character appearance effect lamp control mode determination processing. In the premium character appearance effect lamp control mode determination process, the lamp CPU 150a refers to the premium character appearance effect lamp control mode determination table in the lamp ROM 150c, and determines the character appearance of the premium character based on the type of the effect pattern designation command in the reception buffer. The control mode of the effect lamp 34c is determined.

FIG. 163 is a diagram showing a premium character appearance effect lamp control mode determination table. The premium character appearance effect control mode determination table includes the types of effect pattern designation commands that can be received by the lamp/drive control unit 150 from the effect control unit 120m, and the control mode of the character appearance effect lamp 34c in which the premium character appears (" Each set of data indicating "end" or "continue") is stored. The "end" data indicates that when the corresponding effect pattern designation command is received, the light emission of the lamp 34c for the character appearance effect in which the premium character appears is immediately terminated. It indicates that the light emission of the lamp 34c for the character appearance effect in which the premium character appears is continued when the pattern designation command is received.

In step S2530-19, the lamp CPU 150a performs character appearance effect lamp control mode determination processing. In the character appearance effect lamp control mode determination process, the lamp CPU 150a refers to the premium character appearance effect lamp control mode determination table in the lamp ROM 150c, and determines the character appearance effect lamp 34c based on the type of the effect pattern designation command in the reception buffer. determines the control mode of

FIG. 164 is a diagram showing a character appearance effect lamp control mode determination table. The character appearance effect control mode determination table includes the types of effect pattern designation commands that can be received by the lamp/driving control unit 150 from the effect control unit 120m and the control mode of the character appearance effect lamp 34c ("end" or "continue"). ) are stored. The "end" data indicates that the light emission of the character appearance effect lamp 34c is immediately terminated when the corresponding effect pattern specifying command is received, and the "continue" data indicates that the corresponding effect pattern specifying command is received. It indicates that the light emission of the lamp 34c for the character appearance effect is continued when the character appearance effect is performed.

In step S2530-20, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether the control mode determined in the premium character appearance effect control mode determination process or the character appearance effect lamp control mode determination process is "end" or "continue". . If the control mode is "end" (S2530-20: Yes), the lamp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2530-21. move on.

In step S2530-21, the lamp CPU 150a clears the lamp emission information of the character appearance effect. The character appearance effect lamp light emission information is set in step S2810-13 of the lamp control timer update process (FIGS. 173 to 180), which will be described later, when the light emission timing of the character appearance effect lamp 34c in the variation has arrived. be. When the lamp light emission information for the character appearance effect is cleared, the lamp 34c stops emitting light in the light emission mode for the character appearance effect (light emission patterns (10) and (11) shown in FIG. 21).

In the next step S2530-22, the lamp CPU 150a clears the character appearance effect lamp lighting flag of the lamp RAM 150b, and proceeds to step S2530-23.

In step S2530-23, the lamp CPU 150a confirms whether or not the roulette effect lamp lighting flag is set in the roulette effect lamp lighting flag storage area of the lamp RAM 150b (S2530-23). The roulette effect lamp light emission flag indicates that the lamp 34c is emitting light in the roulette effect light emission mode (light emission pattern (12) shown in FIG. 23). The roulette lamp light emission flag is set in step S2810-17 of the lamp control timer update process (FIGS. 173 to 180) described later when the light emission timing of the roulette effect lamp 34c in the variation has arrived. If the roulette effect lamp light emitting flag is set (S2530-23: Yes), the lamp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2530-24, and if the roulette effect lamp light emitting flag is not set (S2530-23: No). , to step S2530-28.

In step S2530-24, the lamp CPU 150a performs roulette effect lamp control mode determination processing. In the roulette effect lamp control mode determination process, the lamp CPU 150a refers to the roulette effect lamp control mode determination table in the lamp ROM 150c, and determines the control mode of the roulette effect lamp 34c based on the type of the effect pattern designation command in the reception buffer. decide.

FIG. 165 is a diagram showing a roulette effect lamp control mode determination table. The roulette effect control mode determination table contains the types of effect pattern designation commands that can be received by the lamp/drive control unit 150 from the effect control unit 120m and the control mode ("end" or "continue") of the roulette effect lamp 34c. Each set of data shown is stored. The "end" data indicates that the light emission of the roulette effect lamp 34c is immediately terminated when the corresponding effect pattern designation command is received, and the "continue" data indicates that the corresponding effect pattern designation command is received. In this case, it indicates that the light emission of the lamp 34c for the roulette effect is continued.

In the next step S2530-25, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether the control mode determined in the roulette effect lamp control mode determination process is "end" or "continue". If the control mode is "end" (S2530-25: Yes), the lamp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2530-26; move on.

In step S2530-26, the lamp CPU 150a clears the lamp emission information for the roulette effect. The roulette effect lamp light emission information is set in step S2810-19 of the lamp control timer update process (FIGS. 173 to 180) described later when the light emission timing of the roulette effect lamp 34c in the variation comes. When the roulette effect lamp light emission information is cleared, the light emission of the roulette effect light emission mode (light emission pattern (12) shown in FIG. 23) ends in the lamp 34c.

In the next step S2530-27, the lamp CPU 150a clears the roulette effect lamp lighting flag of the lamp RAM 150b, and proceeds to step S2530-28.

In step S2530-28, the lamp CPU 150a confirms whether or not the SP development incentive effect lamp light emission flag is set in the SP development incentive effect lamp light emission flag storage area of the lamp RAM 150b. The SP development incentive effect lamp light emitting flag is a flag indicating that the lamp 34c is emitting light in the light emission mode of the SP development incentive effect (light emission pattern (13) shown in FIG. 25). The SP development fanning lamp light emission flag is set in step S2810-23 of the lamp control timer updating process (FIGS. 173 to 180) to be described later when the light emission timing of the lamp 34c for the SP development fanning effect in the variation has arrived. be done. The lamp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2530-29 if the SP development fan effect lamp light emitting flag is set (S2530-28: Yes), and if the SP development fan effect lamp light emitting flag is not set (S2530- 28: No), go to step S2530-33.

In step S2530-29, the lamp CPU 150a performs SP development fan effect lamp control mode determination processing. In the SP development fan effect lamp control mode determination process, the lamp CPU 150a refers to the SP development fan effect lamp control mode determination table in the lamp ROM 150c, and determines the SP development fan effect based on the type of the effect pattern designation command in the reception buffer. Determines how the lamp 34c is controlled.

FIG. 166 is a diagram showing an SP development fan effect lamp control mode determination table. The SP development fan effect control mode determination table includes the types of effect pattern designation commands that can be received by the lamp/drive control unit 150 from the effect control unit 120m and the control mode of the SP development fan effect lamp 34c ("end" or " continuation”) are stored. The "end" data indicates that when the corresponding effect pattern specifying command is received, the light emission of the lamp 34c for the SP development effect effect is immediately terminated, and the "continue" data indicates that the corresponding effect pattern specifying command is When it is received, it indicates that the light emission of the lamp 34c for the effect of promoting SP development is continued.

In the next step S2530-30, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether the control mode determined in the SP development fan effect lamp control mode determination processing is "end" or "continue". If the control mode is "end" (S2530-30: Yes), the lamp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2530-31; move on.

In step S2530-31, the lamp CPU 150a clears the lamp light emission information of the SP development fan effect. When the light emission timing of the lamp 34c for the SP development stimulus effect in the variation comes, the SP development stimulus effect lamp light emission information is generated in step S2810-25 of the lamp control timer update process (FIGS. 173 to 180) described later. set. When the lamp light emission information for the SP development stimulus effect is cleared, the lamp 34c terminates the light emission of the SP development stimulus effect light emission pattern (light emission pattern (13) shown in FIG. 25).

In the next step S2530-32, the lamp CPU 150a clears the SP development fan effect lamp light emitting flag in the lamp RAM 150b, and proceeds to step S2530-33.

In step S2530-33, the lamp CPU 150a confirms whether or not the SP development confirmation effect lamp lighting flag is set in the SP development confirmation effect lamp lighting flag storage area of the lamp RAM 150b. The SP development fixed effect lamp light emission flag is a flag indicating that the lamp 34c is emitting light in the SP development fixed effect light emission mode (light emission pattern (14) shown in FIG. 27). The SP development fixed lamp light emission flag is set in step S2810-29 of the lamp control timer update process (FIGS. 173 to 180) described later when the light emission timing of the lamp 34c for the SP development fixed effect in the change has arrived. be done. If the SP development confirmation effect lamp lighting flag is set (S2530-33: Yes), the lamp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2530-34, and if the SP development confirmation effect lamp lighting flag is not set (S2530- 33: No), go to step S2530-38.

In step S2530-34, lamp CPU 150a performs SP development finalization effect lamp control mode determination processing. In the SP development fixed effect lamp control mode determination process, the lamp CPU 150a refers to the SP development fixed effect lamp control mode determination table in the lamp ROM 150c, and based on the type of the effect pattern designation command in the reception buffer, determines the SP development fixed effect. Determines how the lamp 34c is controlled.

FIG. 167 is a diagram showing an SP development finalization effect lamp control mode determination table. The SP development fixed effect control mode determination table includes the types of effect pattern designation commands that can be received by the lamp/drive control unit 150 from the effect control unit 120m and the control mode of the SP development fixed effect lamp 34c ("end" or " continuation”) are stored. The "end" data indicates that when the corresponding effect pattern designation command is received, the light emission of the lamp 34c of the SP development fixed effect is immediately terminated, and the "continue" data indicates that the corresponding effect pattern designation command is When received, it indicates that the light emission of the lamp 34c for the SP development finalization effect is continued.

In the next step S2530-35, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether the control mode determined in the SP development finalization effect lamp control mode determination process is "end" or "continue". If the control mode is "end" (S2530-35: Yes), the lamp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2530-36; move on.

In step S2530-36, the lamp CPU 150a clears the lamp emission information for the SP development finalization effect. The SP development fixed effect lamp light emission information is obtained in step S2810-31 of the lamp control timer update process (FIGS. 173 to 180) to be described later when the light emission timing of the SP development fixed effect lamp 34c in the variation has arrived. set. When the lamp light emission information for the SP development fixed effect is cleared, the lamp 34c stops emitting light in the SP development fixed effect light emission mode (light emission pattern (14) shown in FIG. 27).

In the next step S2530-37, the lamp CPU 150a clears the SP development confirmation effect lamp light emitting flag of the lamp RAM 150b, and proceeds to step S2530-38.

In step S2530-38, the lamp CPU 150a confirms whether or not the SP reach effect lamp light emitting flag is set in the SP reach effect lamp light emitting flag storage area of the lamp RAM 150b. The SP reach effect lamp light emission flag is a flag indicating that the lamp 34d is emitting light in the SP reach effect light emission mode (light emission pattern (8) shown in FIG. 17). The SP reach lamp light emitting flag is set in step S2530-93, which will be described later, when an effect pattern specification command for development to the SP reach effect is received from the effect control unit 120m. If the SP reach effect lamp light emitting flag is set (S2530-38: Yes), the lamp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2530-39, and if the SP reach effect lamp light emitting flag is not set (S2530-38: No), go to step S2530-43.

In step S2530-39, the lamp CPU 150a performs SP reach effect lamp control mode determination processing. In the SP reach effect lamp control mode determination process, the lamp CPU 150a refers to the SP reach effect lamp control mode determination table in the lamp ROM 150c, and determines the SP reach effect lamp 34d based on the type of the effect pattern designation command in the reception buffer. Determine control mode.

FIG. 168 is a diagram showing an SP reach effect lamp control mode determination table. In the SP reach production control mode determination table, the type of production pattern designation command that the lamp/drive control unit 150 can receive from the production control unit 120m and the control mode of the lamp 34d of the SP reach production ("end" or "continue") ) are stored. The "end" data indicates that when the corresponding effect pattern designation command is received, the light emission of the lamp 34d for the SP ready-to-win effect is immediately terminated, and the "continue" data indicates that the corresponding effect pattern designation command is received. It indicates that the light emission of the lamp 34d for the SP reach effect is continued when the light is on.

In the next step S2530-40, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether the control mode determined in the SP reach effect lamp control mode determination process is "end" or "continue". If the control mode is "end" (S2530-40: Yes), the lamp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2530-41; move on.

In step S2530-41, the lamp CPU 150a clears the lamp light emission information of the SP reach effect. SP reach effect lamp light emission information is set in step S2530-100 to be described later when an effect pattern specifying command for development to SP reach effect is received from effect control unit 120m. When the SP ready-to-win effect lamp light emission information is cleared, the lamp 34d terminates light emission in the SP ready-to-win effect light emission mode (light emission pattern (8) shown in FIG. 17).

In the next step S2530-42, the lamp CPU 150a clears the SP reach effect lamp lighting flag of the lamp RAM 150b, and proceeds to step S2530-43.

In step S2530-43, the lamp CPU 150a confirms whether or not the cut-in effect lamp emitting flag is set in the cut-in effect lamp emitting flag storage area of the lamp RAM 150b. The cut-in effect lamp light emission flag is a flag indicating that the lamp 34c is emitting light in the cut-in effect light emission mode (light emission patterns (15) and (16) shown in FIG. 29). The cut-in lamp light emission flag is set in step S2810-35 of the lamp control timer update process (FIGS. 173 to 180), which will be described later, when the light emission timing of the lamp 34c for the cut-in effect in the change has arrived. . If the cut-in effect lamp emitting flag is set (S2530-43: Yes), the lamp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2530-44, and if the cut-in effect lamp emitting flag is not set (S2530-43: No), go to step S2530-50.

In step S2530-44, lamp CPU 150a confirms whether or not the premium cut-in lamp flag is set in the premium cut-in lamp flag storage area of lamp RAM 150b. The premium cut-in lamp flag is set in step S2530-82, which will be described later, when the background of the cut-in effect is the rainbow background. If the premium cut-in lamp flag is set (S2530-44: Yes), the lamp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2530-45; Proceed to S2530-46.

In step S2530-45, lamp CPU 150a performs premium cut-in effect lamp control mode determination processing. In the premium cut-in effect lamp control mode determination process, the lamp CPU 150a refers to the premium cut-in effect lamp control mode determination table in the lamp ROM 150c, and cuts the rainbow background based on the type of the effect pattern designation command in the reception buffer. The control mode of the lamp 34c for the in effect is determined.

FIG. 169 is a diagram showing a premium cut-in effect lamp control mode determination table. The premium cut-in effect control mode determination table includes the types of effect pattern designation commands that can be received by the lamp/drive control unit 150 from the effect control unit 120m, and the control mode of the lamp 34c for the rainbow background cut-in effect ("End ” or “Continue”) are stored. The "end" data indicates that when the corresponding effect pattern specifying command is received, the light emission of the lamp 34c for the rainbow background cut-in effect is immediately terminated, and the "continue" data indicates the corresponding effect pattern. It indicates that the light emission of the lamp 34c for the cut-in effect of the rainbow background is continued when the designated command is received.

In step S2530-46, lamp CPU 150a performs cut-in effect lamp control mode determination processing. In the cut-in effect lamp control mode determination process, the lamp CPU 150a refers to the premium cut-in effect lamp control mode determination table in the lamp ROM 150c, and controls the cut-in effect lamp 34c based on the type of the effect pattern designation command in the reception buffer. determines the control mode of

FIG. 170 is a diagram showing a cut-in effect lamp control mode determination table. The cut-in effect control mode determination table includes the types of effect pattern designation commands that can be received by the lamp/drive control unit 150 from the effect control unit 120m and the control mode of the cut-in effect lamp 34c ("end" or "continue"). ) are stored. The "end" data indicates that the light emission of the cut-in effect lamp 34c is immediately terminated when the corresponding effect pattern designation command is received, and the "continue" data indicates that the corresponding effect pattern designation command is received. In this case, it indicates that the light emission of the lamp 34c for the cut-in effect is continued.

In step S2530-47, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether the control mode determined in the premium cut-in effect control mode determination process or the cut-in effect lamp control mode determination process is "end" or "continue". . If the control mode is "end" (S2530-47: Yes), the lamp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2530-48. move on.

In step S2530-48, the lamp CPU 150a clears the lamp emission information for the cut-in effect. The cut-in effect lamp light emission information is set in step S2810-37 of the lamp control timer update process (FIGS. 173 to 180) to be described later when the light emission timing of the cut-in effect lamp 34c in the variation has arrived. be. When the cut-in effect lamp light emission information is cleared, the lamp 34c stops emitting light in the cut-in effect light emission mode (light emission patterns (15) and (16) shown in FIG. 29).

In the next step S2530-49, the lamp CPU 150a clears the cut-in effect lamp emitting flag of the lamp RAM 150b, and proceeds to step S2530-50.

In step S2530-50, the lamp CPU 150a confirms whether or not the fixed role product operating first effect lamp emitting flag is set in the fixed role product operating first effect lamp emitting flag storage area of the lamp RAM 150b. A flag indicating that the lamps 34a and 34b are emitting light in the light emission mode of the fixed role operation first effect (light emission pattern (17) shown in FIG. 31). is. The fixed role product operation first effect lamp light emitting flag is set when the light emission timing of the fixed role product operation first effect lamps 34a and 34b in the variation comes, the lamp control timer update process (see FIGS. 173 to 180 ) in step S2810-41. The lamp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2530-51 when the fixed role product operation first effect lamp light emitting flag is set (S2530-50: Yes), and the fixed role product operation first effect lamp light emission flag is set. If not (S2530-50: No), proceed to step S2530-55.

In step S2530-51, the lamp CPU 150a performs a fixed role product operation first effect lamp control mode determination process. In the fixed role product operation first effect lamp control mode determination process, the lamp CPU 150a refers to the fixed role product operation first effect lamp control mode determination table in the lamp ROM 150c, and based on the type of effect pattern designation command in the reception buffer , determines the control mode of the lamps 34a and 34b for the first effect of the fixed accessory operation.

FIG. 171 is a diagram showing a fixed accessory actuation first effect lamp control mode determination table. The fixed role actuation first effect control mode determination table includes the types of effect pattern designation commands that can be received by the lamp/drive control unit 150 from the effect control unit 120m, and the lamps 34a and 34b for the fixed role actuation first effect. Each set of data indicating a control mode (“end” or “continue”) is stored. The "end" data indicates that when the corresponding effect pattern designation command is received, the light emission of the lamps 34a, 34b of the fixed role operation first effect immediately ends, and the "continue" data indicates that the corresponding effect pattern designation command is received. It indicates that the light emission of the lamps 34a and 34b of the fixed role operation first effect is continued when the effect pattern designation command is received.

In the next step S2530-52, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether the control mode determined in the determined role product actuation first effect lamp control mode determination process was "end" or "continue". If the control mode is "end" (S2530-52: Yes), the lamp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2530-53. move on.

In step S2530-53, the lamp CPU 150a clears the lamp light emission information of the fixed accessory operation first effect. The lamp light emission information for the first production of the fixed role product is set to the lamp control timer update process (see FIGS. 173 to 180 ) in step S2810-43. When the lamp light emission information of the fixed role product operation first effect is cleared, the light emission of the fixed role product operation first effect light emission mode (light emission pattern (17) shown in FIG. 31) ends in the lamps 34a and 34b. .

In the next step S2530-54, the lamp CPU 150a clears the fixed role product operation first effect lamp light emitting flag of the lamp RAM 150b, and proceeds to step S2530-55.

In step S2530-55, the lamp CPU 150a confirms whether or not the fixed role product operating second effect lamp emitting flag is set in the fixed role product operating second effect lamp emitting flag storage area of the lamp RAM 150b. The flag indicating that the lamps 34a and 34b are emitting light in the light emission mode of the second production of the fixed role operation (light emission pattern (18) shown in FIG. 31). is. The fixed role product operation second effect lamp light emitting flag is set when the light emission timing of the fixed role product operation second effect lamps 34a and 34b in the variation comes, the lamp control timer update process (see FIGS. 173 to 180 ) in step S2810-47. The lamp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2530-56 when the confirmed role product operating second effect lamp emitting flag is set (S2530-55: Yes), and the confirmed role product operating second effect lamp emitting flag is set. If not (S2530-55: No), proceed to step S2530-60.

In step S2530-56, the lamp CPU 150a performs a confirmed role product operation second effect lamp control mode determination process. In the confirmed role product operation second effect lamp control mode determination process, the lamp CPU 150a refers to the confirmed role product operation second effect lamp control mode determination table in the lamp ROM 150c, and based on the type of effect pattern designation command in the reception buffer , determine the control mode of the lamps 34a and 34b for the second production of the finalized accessory operation.

FIG. 172 is a diagram showing a determined accessory actuation second effect lamp control mode determination table. The determined role actuation second effect control mode determination table includes the types of effect pattern designation commands that can be received by the lamp/drive control unit 150 from the effect control unit 120m, and the lamps 34a and 34b for the determined role actuation second effect. Each set of data indicating a control mode (“end” or “continue”) is stored. The "end" data indicates that when the corresponding effect pattern designation command is received, the light emission of the lamps 34a, 34b for the second effect of the confirmed role operation is immediately terminated, and the "continue" data indicates that the corresponding It indicates that the light emission of the lamps 34a and 34b of the fixed role product operation second effect is continued when the production pattern designation command is received.

In the next step S2530-57, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether the control mode determined in the determined role product operation second effect lamp control mode determination process was "end" or "continue". If the control mode is "end" (S2530-57: Yes), the lamp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2530-58. move on.

In step S2530-58, the lamp CPU 150a clears the lamp light emission information of the confirmed accessory actuation second effect. The lamp light emission information for the second production of the fixed role product is set to the lamp control timer update process (see FIGS. 173 to 180 ) in step S2810-49. When the lamp light emission information of the confirmed role product operation second effect is cleared, the light emission of the fixed role product operation second effect light emission mode (light emission pattern (18) shown in FIG. 31) ends in the lamps 34a and 34b. .

In the next step S2530-59, the lamp CPU 150a clears the fixed role product operation second effect lamp light emitting flag of the lamp RAM 150b, and proceeds to step S2530-60.

In step S2530-60, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the command in the reception buffer is the effect pattern designation command for starting variation. If the command in the reception buffer is the production pattern designation command for start of fluctuation (S2530-60: Yes), the lamp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2530-61, and if it is not the production pattern designation command for start of fluctuation (S2530-60: No ), and proceeds to step S2530-91.

In step S2530-61, the lamp CPU 150a sets the normal fluctuation effect lamp light emission flag in the normal change effect lamp light emission flag storage area of the lamp RAM 150b.

In the next step S2530-62, the lamp CPU 150a sets the lamp light emission information for the normal variation effect. After this, in the lamp 34d, the light emission mode of the normal variation effect (light emission patterns (1), (2), (3), (4), (5), or (6) shown in FIG. 10(b)) starts to emit light.

In the next step S2530-63, the ramp CPU 150a analyzes the effect pattern specification command for starting the variation, and determines whether or not there is a step-up effect in the series of effects to be executed in the variation. If there is a step-up effect (S2530-63: Yes), the ramp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2530-64, and if there is no step-up effect (S2530-63: No), it proceeds to step S2530-66.

At the next step S2530-64, the lamp CPU 150a sets a step-up effect lamp standby flag in the step-up effect lamp standby flag storage area of the lamp RAM 150b.

In the next step S2530-65, the lamp CPU 150a obtains the remaining time until the light emission timing of the lamp 34c for the step-up effect, and divides this time by 2 milliseconds, which is the generation cycle of the reset clock pulse. is set in the step-up effect lamp standby timer counter.

At the next step S2530-66, the ramp CPU 150a analyzes the effect pattern designation command for starting the variation, and determines whether or not there is a character appearance effect in the series of effects to be executed in the variation. If there is a character appearance effect (S2530-66: Yes), the lamp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2530-67, and if there is no character appearance effect (S2530-66: No), it proceeds to step S2530-71.

In step S2530-67, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the character appearing in the character appearance effect is a premium character. If a premium character appears (S2530-67: Yes), the ramp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2530-68, and if a character other than the premium character appears (S2530-67: No), proceeds to step S2530-69.

In step S2530-68, lamp CPU 150a sets a premium character lamp flag in the premium character lamp flag storage area of lamp RAM 150b.

In the next step S2530-69, the lamp CPU 150a sets the character appearance effect lamp standby flag in the character appearance effect lamp standby flag storage area of the lamp RAM 150b.

In the next step S2530-70, the lamp CPU 150a obtains the remaining time until the light emission timing of the lamp 34c for the character appearance effect, and divides this time by 2 milliseconds, which is the generation cycle of the reset clock pulse, to the lamp RAM 150b. character appearance effect lamp waiting timer counter.

In the next step S2530-71, the ramp CPU 150a analyzes the effect pattern designation command for starting the variation, and determines whether or not there is a roulette effect in the series of effects to be executed in the variation. If there is a roulette effect (S2530-71: Yes), the ramp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2530-72, and if there is no roulette effect (S2530-71: No), proceeds to step S2530-74.

In the next step S2530-72, the lamp CPU 150a sets a roulette effect lamp standby flag in the roulette effect lamp standby flag storage area of the lamp RAM 150b.

In the next step S2530-73, the lamp CPU 150a obtains the remaining time until the light emission timing of the lamp 34c for the roulette effect, divides this time by 2 milliseconds, which is the reset clock pulse generation cycle, and stores the value in the lamp RAM 150b. Set the roulette effect lamp standby timer counter.

In the next step S2530-74, the ramp CPU 150a analyzes the variation start effect pattern specification command, and determines whether or not there is an SP development fan effect in the series of effects to be executed in the variation. The lamp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2530-75 if there is an SP development stimulating effect (S2530-74: Yes), and proceeds to step S2530-77 if there is no SP development stimulating effect (S2530-74: No).

In the next step S2530-75, the lamp CPU 150a sets the SP development fan effect lamp standby flag in the SP development fan effect lamp standby flag storage area of the lamp RAM 150b.

In the next step S2530-76, the lamp CPU 150a obtains the remaining time until the light emission timing of the lamp 34c for the SP development fan effect, and divides this time by 2 milliseconds, which is the generation cycle of the reset clock pulse. It is set in the SP development fan effect lamp standby timer counter in the RAM 150b.

At the next step S2530-77, the ramp CPU 150a analyzes the effect pattern specification command for starting the variation, and determines whether or not there is an SP development fixed effect in the series of effects to be executed in the variation. If there is SP development fixed effect (S2530-77: Yes), the ramp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2530-78, and if there is no SP development fixed effect (S2530-77: No), it proceeds to step S2530-80.

In the next step S2530-78, the lamp CPU 150a sets the SP development fixed effect lamp standby flag in the SP development fixed effect lamp standby flag storage area of the lamp RAM 150b.

In the next step S2530-79, the lamp CPU 150a obtains the remaining time until the light emission timing of the lamp 34c for the SP development finalization effect, and divides this time by 2 milliseconds, which is the generation cycle of the reset clock pulse. It is set in the SP development confirmation production lamp standby timer counter of the RAM 150b.

At the next step S2530-80, the ramp CPU 150a analyzes the effect pattern specifying command for starting the variation, and determines whether or not there is a cut-in effect in the series of effects to be executed in the variation. If there is a cut-in effect (S2530-80: Yes), the lamp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2530-81, and if there is no cut-in effect (S2530-80: No), it proceeds to step S2530-85.

In step S2530-81, lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the background of the cut-in effect is rainbow-colored. If the background is rainbow-colored (S2530-81: Yes), lamp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2530-82, and if the background is not rainbow-colored (S2530-81: No), proceeds to step S2530-83.

In step S2530-82, lamp CPU 150a sets the premium cut-in lamp flag in the premium cut-in lamp flag storage area of lamp RAM 150b.

In the next step S2530-83, the lamp CPU 150a sets the cut-in effect lamp standby flag in the cut-in effect lamp standby flag storage area of the lamp RAM 150b.

In the next step S2530-84, the lamp CPU 150a obtains the remaining time until the light emission timing of the lamp 34c for the cut-in effect, and divides this time by 2 milliseconds, which is the generation cycle of the reset clock pulse, to the lamp RAM 150b. set to the cut-in effect lamp standby timer counter.

In the next step S2530-85, the lamp CPU 150a analyzes the production pattern specification command for starting the variation, and determines whether or not there is a fixed accessory actuation first production in the series of productions to be executed in the variation. . If there is a fixed role actuation first effect (S2530-85: Yes), the ramp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2530-86, and if there is no fixed role actuation first effect (S2530-85: No), step S2530- Proceed to 88.

In the next step S2530-86, the lamp CPU 150a sets the fixed role product operation first effect lamp standby flag in the fixed role product operation first effect lamp standby flag storage area of the lamp RAM 150b.

In the next step S2530-87, the lamp CPU 150a obtains the remaining time until the light emission timing of the lamps 34a and 34b of the fixed role operation first effect, and this time is 2 milliseconds, which is the generation cycle of the reset clock pulse. The divided value is set in the fixed role product operation first effect lamp standby timer counter of the lamp RAM 150b.

In the next step S2530-88, the lamp CPU 150a analyzes the production pattern specification command for starting the variation, and determines whether or not there is a second production for the finalized accessory operation in the series of productions to be executed in the variation. . If there is a confirmed role actuation second effect (S2530-88: Yes), the ramp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2530-89; Go to 91.

In the next step S2530-89, the lamp CPU 150a sets the confirmed role product operation second effect lamp standby flag in the fixed role product operation second effect lamp standby flag storage area of the lamp RAM 150b.

In the next step S2530-90, the lamp CPU 150a obtains the remaining time until the light emission timing of the lamps 34a and 34b for the second effect of the fixed role operation, and this time is 2 milliseconds, which is the generation cycle of the reset clock pulse. The divided value is set in the fixed role product operation second effect lamp standby timer counter of the lamp RAM 150b.

At the next step S2530-91, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the command in the reception buffer is the effect pattern specification command for finalizing the design. If the command in the reception buffer is not the production pattern designation command for design confirmation (S2530-91: No), the lamp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2530-92, and if it is the production pattern designation command for design establishment (S2530-91: Yes ) and proceed to step S2530-98.

In step S2530-92, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the command in the reception buffer is an effect pattern designation command for developing to the SP ready-to-win effect. If the command in the reception buffer is an effect pattern specification command for development to SP reach effect (S2530-92: Yes), the lamp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2530-93 and is not an effect pattern specification command for development to SP reach effect. If so (S2530-92: No), the process proceeds to step S2530-95.

In step S2530-93, the lamp CPU 150a sets the SP reach effect lamp light emitting flag in the SP reach effect lamp light emitting flag storage area of the lamp RAM 150b.

At the next step S2530-94, the lamp CPU 150a sets the lamp emission information for the SP ready-to-win effect, and proceeds to step S2530-101. After that, the lamp 34d starts emitting light in the SP ready-to-win effect light emission mode (light emission pattern (8) shown in FIG. 17). .

At step S2530-95, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the command in the reception buffer is a ready-to-win effect pattern designation command. If the command in the reception buffer is a ready-to-win effect pattern designation command (S2530-95: Yes), the ramp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2530-96, and if it is not a ready-to-win effect pattern designation command (S2530-95: No). , to step S2530-105.

In step S2530-96, the lamp CPU 150a sets the normal reach effect lamp light emission flag in the normal reach effect lamp light emission flag storage area of the lamp RAM 150b.

At the next step S2530-97, the lamp CPU 150a sets the lamp emission information for the normal reach effect, and proceeds to step S2530-103. Thereafter, the lamp 34d starts to emit light in the normal reach effect light emission mode (light emission pattern (7) shown in FIG. 15).

In step S2530-98, the lamp CPU 150a sets the lamp light emission information for design confirmation effect, and proceeds to step S2530-99. After that, the lamp 34d starts to emit light in the light emission mode of the pattern confirmation effect.

In step S2530-99, the lamp CPU 150a confirms whether or not the SP reach effect lamp light emitting flag is set in the SP reach effect lamp light emitting flag storage area of the lamp RAM 150b. If the SP reach effect lamp light emitting flag is set (2530-99: Yes), the lamp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2530-100, and if the SP reach effect lamp light emitting flag is not set (2530-99: No), go to step S2530-101.

In step S2530-100, the lamp CPU 150a clears the SP reach effect lamp light emitting flag, and proceeds to step S2530-101.

In step S2530-101, the lamp CPU 150a confirms whether or not the normal reach effect lamp light emitting flag is set in the normal reach effect lamp light emitting flag storage area of the lamp RAM 150b. If the normal reach effect lamp light emitting flag is set (S2530-101: Yes), the lamp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2530-102, and if the normal reach effect lamp light emitting flag is not set (S2530-101: No). , the process proceeds to step S2530-103.

In step S2530-102, the lamp CPU 150a clears the normal reach effect lamp light emitting flag, and proceeds to step S2530-103.

In step S2530-103, the lamp CPU 150a confirms whether or not the normal fluctuation effect lamp lighting flag is set in the normal fluctuation lamp lighting flag storage area of the lamp RAM 150b. If the normal fluctuation effect lamp light emission flag is set (S2530-103: Yes), the lamp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2530-104, and if the normal change effect lamp light emission flag is not set (S2530-103: No), go to step S2530-105.

In step S2530-104, the lamp CPU 150a clears the normal fluctuation effect lamp light emission flag, and proceeds to step S2530-105.

In step S2530-105, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the command in the reception buffer is an opening effect pattern designation command. If the command in the reception buffer is an opening effect pattern designation command (S2530-105: Yes), the lamp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2530-106; Proceed to step S2530-107.

In step S2530-106, the lamp CPU 150a sets lamp emission information for the opening effect. After that, the lamp 34d starts emitting light in the lighting mode of the opening effect.

In step S2530-107, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the command in the reception buffer is a round effect pattern designation command. If the command in the reception buffer is a round effect pattern designation command (S2530-107: Yes), the lamp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2530-108; Proceed to step S2530-109.

In step S2530-108, the lamp CPU 150a sets lamp light emission information for round effect. After that, the lamp 34d starts to emit light in the round effect lighting mode.

In step S2530-109, lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the command in the reception buffer is an ending effect pattern designation command. If the command in the reception buffer is an ending effect pattern designation command (S2530-109: Yes), the lamp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2530-110; Proceed to step S2530-111.

In step S2530-110, the lamp CPU 150a sets the lamp emission information for the ending effect. After that, the lamp 34d starts emitting light in the lighting mode for the ending effect.

In step S2530-111, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the command in the reception buffer is a pending display change effect pattern specification command. If the command in the reception buffer is a pending display change effect pattern designation command (S2530-111: Yes), the lamp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2530-112, and if not a pending display change effect pattern designation command (S2530-111 : No), and proceeds to step S2530-113.

In step S2530-112, the lamp CPU 150a sets the lamp emission information of the pending display change effect. After that, the lamp 34d starts emitting light in the light emission mode of the pending display change effect.

In step S2530-113, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the command in the reception buffer is an effect pattern designation command for success in ranking up. If the command in the reception buffer is a production pattern designation command for successful rank up (S2530-113: Yes), the ramp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2530-114, and if it is not a production pattern designation command for successful rank up (S2530-113). : No), and proceeds to step S2530-115.

In step S2530-114, the lamp CPU 150a sets lamp emission information for a rank-up success effect. After that, the lamp 34d starts to emit light in the lighting mode of the rank-up success effect.

In step S2530-115, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the command in the reception buffer is an effect pattern designation command for rank-up failure. If the command in the reception buffer is a production pattern designation command for rank-up failure (S2530-115: Yes), the lamp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2530-116, and if it is not a production pattern designation command for rank-up failure (S2530-115). : No), and proceeds to step S2530-117.

In step S2530-116, the lamp CPU 150a sets lamp emission information for a rank-up failure effect. After that, the lamp 34d starts emitting light in the lighting mode of the rank-up failure effect.

In step S2530-117, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the command in the reception buffer is a stage change effect pattern designation command. If the command in the reception buffer is a stage change production pattern specification command (S2530-117: Yes), the lamp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2530-118, and if it is not a stage change production pattern specification command (S2530-117: No). ), the current lamp emission information setting process is terminated.

In step S2530-118, the lamp CPU 150a sets lamp light emission information for stage change effect. After that, the lamp 34d starts to emit light in a stage change effect.

In the lamp light emission information setting process described above, the normal variation effect lamp control mode determination table shown in FIG. The state determination table is referred to when a command is received during execution of the step-up effect, and the normal reach effect lamp control state determination table shown in FIG. 162 is referred to when a command is received during execution of the normal reach effect, The premium character appearance effect lamp control mode determination table shown in FIG. 163 is referred to when a command is received during execution of the character appearance effect of the premium character, and the character appearance effect lamp control mode determination table shown in FIG. The roulette effect lamp control mode determination table shown in FIG. 166 is referred to, and the SP development fixed effect lamp control mode determination table shown in FIG. 167 is referred to when a command is received during execution of the SP development stimulus effect. is referred to when a command is received during the execution of the SP development fixed effect, and the SP reach effect lamp control mode determination table shown in FIG. 168 is referred to when a command is received during the execution of the SP reach effect, The premium cut-in effect lamp control mode determination table shown in FIG. 169 is referred to when a command is received during execution of the cut-in effect with a rainbow background, and the cut-in effect lamp control mode determination table shown in FIG. , is referred to when a command is received during execution of a cut-in effect, and the determined role product actuation first effect lamp control mode determination table shown in FIG. The fixed role product operation second effect lamp control mode determination table shown in FIG. 172 is referred to when a command is received during execution of the fixed role product operation second effect.

Here, when comparing the step-up effect lamp control mode determination table of FIG. 161 and the confirmed role product operation second effect lamp control mode determination table of FIG. Data associated with the command is "end" data, and in the determined role product activation second effect lamp control mode determination table, "continue" data is associated with the commands for starting fluctuation and determining the pattern. Data.

Further, when the command is for start of fluctuation, in the lamp emission information setting process, the process proceeds from step S2530-60: Yes to step S2530-62, and the lamp emission information for normal fluctuation effect is set. When the command is for design confirmation, in the lamp light emission information setting process, the process advances from step S2530-91: Yes to step S2530-98, and the lamp light emission information for design confirmation effect is set. Therefore, simultaneously with the end of the light emission pattern of the step-up effect, the light emission pattern of the start of variation and the determination of the design according to the execution of the command of the start of variation and determination of the design starts.

Therefore, when the effect control unit 120m receives the variation start command or the pattern confirmation command, which is the predetermined command, when the step-up effect is being executed, the lamp 34c ends the step-up effect light emission mode, The lamp 34d emits light in a light emitting mode according to the execution of the variation start command or the pattern confirmation command, and the timing at which the production control unit 120m receives the variation start command or the pattern confirmation command is during execution of the second production of the fixed accessory operation. If it is, the lamps 34a and 34b continue the light emission mode of the fixed accessory actuation second effect.

Comparing the SP development fanning effect lamp control mode determination table of FIG. 166 and the confirmed role product operation second effect lamp control mode determination table of FIG. is associated with "end" data, and in the confirmed role product activation second effect lamp control mode determination table, "continue" data is associated with the commands for starting fluctuation and design confirmation. is.

Further, as described above, when a command for start of variation or confirmation of the pattern is received, the lamp emission information for start of variation or confirmation of the pattern is set in the lamp light emission information setting process (step S2530-62 or step S2530- 98), Simultaneously with the end of the light emission pattern of the SP development fan effect, the light emission pattern of the start of variation and the determination of the design according to the execution of the command of the start of variation and determination of the design starts.

Therefore, when the performance control unit 120m receives the variation start command or the pattern confirmation command, which is a predetermined command, when the SP development inflection performance is being executed, the lamp 34c terminates the light emission mode of the SP development inflection performance. Then, the lamp 34d emits light in a light emitting mode according to the execution of the variation start command or the pattern confirmation command, and the timing at which the production control unit 120m receives the variation start command or the pattern confirmation command is the second production of the fixed accessory operation. If it is being executed, the lamps 34a and 34b continue the light emission mode of the fixed accessory actuation second effect.

Comparing the SP development fixed effect lamp control mode determination table of FIG. 167 and the fixed role product operation second effect lamp control mode determination table of FIG. is associated with "end" data, and in the confirmed role product activation second effect lamp control mode determination table, "continue" data is associated with the commands for starting fluctuation and design confirmation. is.

Further, as described above, when a command for start of variation or confirmation of the pattern is received, the lamp emission information for start of variation or confirmation of the pattern is set in the lamp light emission information setting process (step S2530-62 or step S2530- 98), Simultaneously with the end of the light emission pattern of the SP development finalization production effect, the light emission pattern of the start of variation and the finalization of the design according to the execution of the command of the start of variation and the finalization of the design starts.

Therefore, when the effect control unit 120m receives the variation start command or the pattern confirmation command, which is a predetermined command, when the SP development fixed effect is being executed, the lamp 34c ends the light emission mode of the SP development fixed effect. Then, the lamp 34d emits light in a light emitting mode according to the execution of the variation start command or the pattern confirmation command, and the timing at which the production control unit 120m receives the variation start command or the pattern confirmation command is the second production of the fixed accessory operation. If it is being executed, the lamps 34a and 34b continue the light emission mode of the fixed accessory actuation second effect.

Comparing the cut-in effect lamp control mode determination table in FIG. 170 with the confirmed accessory activation second effect lamp control mode determination table in FIG. "End" data is attached, and "Continue" data is associated with the variation start and pattern confirmation commands in the confirmed role product activation second effect lamp control mode determination table. .

Further, as described above, when a command for start of variation or confirmation of the pattern is received, the lamp emission information for start of variation or confirmation of the pattern is set in the lamp light emission information setting process (step S2530-62 or step S2530- 98), Simultaneously with the end of the light emission pattern for the cut-in effect effect, the light emission pattern for the start of variation and the determination of the design according to the execution of the command for the start of variation and determination of the design starts.

Therefore, when the effect control unit 120m receives the variation start command or the pattern confirmation command, which is a predetermined command, when the cut-in effect is being executed, the lamp 34c ends the light emission mode of the cut-in effect, The lamp 34d emits light in a light emitting mode according to the execution of the variation start command or the pattern confirmation command, and the timing at which the production control unit 120m receives the variation start command or the pattern confirmation command is during execution of the second production of the fixed accessory operation. If it is, the lamps 34a and 34b continue the light emission mode of the fixed accessory actuation second effect.

Comparing the premium character appearance effect lamp control mode determination table in FIG. 163 with the confirmed accessory actuation second effect lamp control mode determination table in FIG. is associated with "end" data, and in the confirmed role product activation second effect lamp control mode determination table, "continue" data is associated with the commands for starting fluctuation and design confirmation. is.

Further, as described above, when a command for start of variation or confirmation of the pattern is received, the lamp emission information for start of variation or confirmation of the pattern is set in the lamp light emission information setting process (step S2530-62 or step S2530- 98), Simultaneously with the end of the luminous pattern for the character appearance effect of the premium character, the luminous pattern for the start of variation and the determination of the design according to the execution of the command for the start of variation and determination of the design begins.

Therefore, when the effect control unit 120m receives the variation start command or the design confirmation command, which are the predetermined commands, when the character appearance effect of the premium character is being executed, the lamp 34c emits light of the character appearance effect of the premium character. Ending the mode, the lamp 34d emits light in a light emission mode according to the execution of the variation start command or the pattern confirmation command, and the timing at which the production control unit 120m receives the variation start command or the pattern confirmation command is the confirmed accessory operation When the second effect is being executed, the lamps 34a and 34b continue the light emission mode of the fixed accessory actuation second effect.

Comparing the premium cut-in effect lamp control mode determination table in FIG. 169 with the confirmed accessory activation second effect lamp control mode determination table in FIG. is associated with "end" data, and in the confirmed role product activation second effect lamp control mode determination table, "continue" data is associated with the commands for starting fluctuation and design confirmation. is.

Further, as described above, when a command for start of variation or confirmation of the pattern is received, the lamp emission information for start of variation or confirmation of the pattern is set in the lamp light emission information setting process (step S2530-62 or step S2530- 98), Simultaneously with the end of the light emission pattern for the cut-in effect of the rainbow background, the light emission pattern for the start of variation and finalization of the pattern according to the execution of the command for start of variation and finalization of the pattern starts.

Therefore, when the effect control unit 120m receives the predetermined command, that is, the variation start command or the pattern confirmation command, when the rainbow background cut-in effect is being executed, the lamp 34c is turned on. After finishing the light emission mode, the lamp 34d emits light in a light emission mode according to the execution of the variation start command or the pattern confirmation command, and the timing at which the effect control unit 120m receives the variation start command or the pattern confirmation command is the confirmation role When the object actuation second effect is being executed, the lamps 34a and 34b continue the light emitting mode of the fixed role actuation second effect.

173 to 180 are flowcharts showing the details of the lamp control timer update process (step S2810 in FIG. 81) of lamp/drive control section 150. FIG. In FIG. 173, the lamp CPU 150a decrements the timer counter of the lamp RAM 150b, which is referred to in the lamp emission information setting process, by 1 if it is not 0, and updates it.

In the next step S2810-2, the lamp CPU 150a confirms whether or not the step-up effect lamp standby flag is set in the step-up effect lamp standby flag storage area of the lamp RAM 150b. If the step-up effect lamp standby flag is set (S2810-2: Yes), the lamp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2810-3, and if the step-up effect lamp standby flag is not set (S2810-2: No). , the process proceeds to step S2810-8.

In step S2810-3, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the step-up effect lamp standby timer counter of the lamp RAM 150b is greater than zero. If the step-up effect lamp standby timer counter is 0 (S2810-3: No), the lamp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2810-4, and if the step-up effect lamp standby timer counter is greater than 0 (S2810-3: Yes). , the process proceeds to step S2810-8.

In step S2810-4, lamp CPU 150a clears the step-up effect lamp standby flag.

In the next step S2810-5, the lamp CPU 150a sets the step-up effect lamp light-emitting flag in the step-up effect lamp light-emitting flag storage area of the lamp RAM 150b.

In the next step S2810-6, the lamp CPU 150a obtains the remaining time until the light emission end timing of the light emission mode of the step-up effect, and divides this time by 2 milliseconds, which is the generation cycle of the reset clock pulse. It is set in the step-up effect lamp termination standby timer counter of the RAM 150b.

In the next step S2810-7, the lamp CPU 150a sets the lamp emission information for the step-up effect. After that, the lamp 34c starts to emit light in a step-up effect.

In the next step S2810-8, the lamp CPU 150a confirms whether or not the character appearance effect lamp standby flag is set in the character appearance effect lamp standby flag storage area of the lamp RAM 150b. If the character appearance effect lamp standby flag is set (S2810-8: Yes), the lamp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2810-9, and if the character appearance effect lamp standby flag is not set (S2810-8: No). , go to step S2810-14.

In step S2810-9, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the character appearance effect lamp standby timer counter of the lamp RAM 150b is greater than zero. If the character appearance effect lamp standby timer counter is 0 (S2810-9: No), the lamp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2810-10, and if the character appearance effect lamp standby timer counter is greater than 0 (S2810-9: Yes). , go to step S2810-14.

In step S2810-10, lamp CPU 150a clears the character appearance effect lamp standby flag.

In the next step S2810-11, the lamp CPU 150a sets the character appearance effect lamp lighting flag in the character appearance effect lamp lighting flag storage area of the lamp RAM 150b.

In the next step S2810-12, the lamp CPU 150a obtains the remaining time until the light emission end timing of the light emission mode of the character appearance effect, and divides this time by 2 milliseconds, which is the generation cycle of the reset clock pulse. It is set in the character appearance effect lamp termination standby timer counter in the RAM 150b.

In the next step S2810-13, the lamp CPU 150a sets the lamp emission information for character appearance effect. After that, the lamp 34c starts emitting light in the character appearance effect.

In the next step S2810-14, the lamp CPU 150a confirms whether or not the roulette effect lamp standby flag is set in the roulette effect lamp standby flag storage area of the lamp RAM 150b. If the roulette effect lamp standby flag is set (S2810-14: Yes), the lamp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2810-15; if the roulette effect lamp standby flag is not set (S2810-14: No), step Proceed to S2810-20.

In step S2810-15, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the roulette effect lamp standby timer counter of the lamp RAM 150b is greater than zero. If the roulette effect lamp standby timer counter is 0 (S2810-15: No), the lamp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2810-16; Proceed to S2810-20.

In step S2810-16, lamp CPU 150a clears the roulette effect lamp standby flag.

In the next step S2810-17, the lamp CPU 150a sets the roulette effect lamp lighting flag in the roulette effect lamp lighting flag storage area of the lamp RAM 150b.

In the next step S2810-18, the lamp CPU 150a obtains the remaining time until the light emission end timing of the light emission mode of the roulette effect, divides this time by 2 milliseconds, which is the generation cycle of the reset clock pulse, and divides the value into the lamp RAM 150b. roulette effect lamp termination standby timer counter.

In the next step S2810-19, the lamp CPU 150a sets the lamp emission information for the roulette effect. After that, the lamp 34c starts to emit light in the roulette rendering mode.

In the next step S2810-20, the lamp CPU 150a confirms whether or not the SP development fan effect lamp standby flag is set in the SP development fan effect lamp standby flag storage area of the lamp RAM 150b. If the SP development fan effect lamp standby flag is set (S2810-20: Yes), the lamp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2810-21, and if the SP development fan effect lamp standby flag is not set (S2810-20: No), go to step S2810-26.

In step S2810-21, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the SP development fan effect lamp standby timer counter of the lamp RAM 150b is greater than zero. If the SP development fan effect lamp standby timer counter is 0 (S2810-21: No), the lamp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2810-22, and if the SP development fan effect lamp standby timer counter is greater than 0 (S2810-21: Yes), go to step S2810-26.

In step S2810-22, the lamp CPU 150a clears the SP development fan effect lamp standby flag.

In the next step S2810-23, the lamp CPU 150a sets the SP development fan effect lamp light emission flag in the SP development fan effect lamp light emission flag storage area of the lamp RAM 150b.

In the next step S2810-24, the lamp CPU 150a obtains the remaining time until the light emission end timing of the light emission mode of the SP development fan effect, and divides this time by 2 milliseconds, which is the generation cycle of the reset clock pulse. It is set in the SP development fan effect lamp end waiting timer counter of the lamp RAM 150b.

In the next step S2810-25, the lamp CPU 150a sets the lamp emission information for the SP development fan effect. After that, the lamp 34c starts to emit light in the light emission mode of the SP development fanning effect.

In the next step S2810-26, the lamp CPU 150a confirms whether or not the SP development fixed effect lamp standby flag is set in the SP development fixed effect lamp standby flag storage area of the lamp RAM 150b. If the SP development fixed effect lamp standby flag is set (S2810-26: Yes), the lamp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2810-27, and if the SP development fixed effect lamp standby flag is not set (S2810-26: No), go to step S2810-32.

In step S2810-27, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the SP development confirmation effect lamp standby timer counter of the lamp RAM 150b is greater than zero. If the SP development confirmation effect lamp standby timer counter is 0 (S2810-27: No), the lamp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2810-28, and if the SP development confirmation effect lamp standby timer counter is greater than 0 (S2810-27: Yes), go to step S2810-32.

In step S2810-28, the lamp CPU 150a clears the SP development confirmation effect lamp standby flag.

In the next step S2810-29, the lamp CPU 150a sets the SP development fixed effect lamp lighting flag in the SP development fixed effect lamp lighting flag storage area of the lamp RAM 150b.

In the next step S2810-30, the lamp CPU 150a obtains the remaining time until the light emission end timing of the light emission mode of the fixed SP development effect, and divides this time by 2 milliseconds, which is the generation cycle of the reset clock pulse. It is set in the SP development confirmation effect lamp end waiting timer counter of the lamp RAM 150b.

In the next step S2810-31, the lamp CPU 150a sets the lamp emission information for the SP development finalization effect. After that, the lamp 34c starts to emit light in the SP development finalization effect.

In the next step S2810-32, the lamp CPU 150a confirms whether or not the cut-in effect lamp standby flag is set in the cut-in effect lamp standby flag storage area of the lamp RAM 150b. If the cut-in effect lamp standby flag is set (S2810-32: Yes), the lamp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2810-33, and if the cut-in effect lamp standby flag is not set (S2810-32: No). , go to step S2810-38.

In step S2810-33, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the cut-in effect lamp standby timer counter of the lamp RAM 150b is greater than zero. If the cut-in effect lamp standby timer counter is 0 (S2810-33: No), the lamp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2810-34, and if the cut-in effect lamp standby timer counter is greater than 0 (S2810-33: Yes). , go to step S2810-38.

In step S2810-34, lamp CPU 150a clears the cut-in effect lamp standby flag.

In the next step S2810-35, the lamp CPU 150a sets the cut-in effect lamp lighting flag in the cut-in effect lamp lighting flag storage area of the lamp RAM 150b.

In the next step S2810-36, the lamp CPU 150a obtains the remaining time until the light emission end timing of the light emission mode of the cut-in effect, and divides this time by 2 milliseconds, which is the generation cycle of the reset clock pulse. It is set in the cut-in effect lamp end standby timer counter of the RAM 150b.

In the next step S2810-37, the lamp CPU 150a sets lamp emission information for cut-in effects. After that, the lamp 34c starts emitting light in a cut-in effect lighting mode.

In the next step S2810-38, the lamp CPU 150a confirms whether or not the fixed role product operation first effect lamp standby flag is set in the fixed role product operation first effect lamp standby flag storage area of the lamp RAM 150b. If the fixed role product operation first effect lamp standby flag is set (S2810-38: Yes), the lamp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2810-39, and the fixed role product operation first effect lamp standby flag is not set. If so (S2810-38: No), proceed to step S2810-44.

In step S2810-39, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the fixed role product operation first effect lamp standby timer counter of the lamp RAM 150b is greater than zero. If the fixed role product operation first effect lamp standby timer counter is 0 (S2810-39: No), the lamp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2810-40, and the fixed role product operation first effect lamp standby timer counter is greater than 0. If so (S2810-39: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2810-44.

In step S2810-40, the lamp CPU 150a clears the confirmed role product operation first effect lamp standby flag.

In the next step S2810-41, the lamp CPU 150a sets the fixed role product operating first effect lamp emitting flag in the fixed role product operating first effect lamp emitting flag storage area of the lamp RAM 150b.

In the next step S2810-42, the lamp CPU 150a obtains the remaining time until the light emission end timing of the light emission mode of the fixed accessory operation first effect, and divides this time by 2 milliseconds, which is the generation cycle of the reset clock pulse. The value obtained is set in the fixed role product operation first effect lamp end waiting timer counter of the lamp RAM 150b.

In the next step S2810-43, the lamp CPU 150a sets the lamp light emission information of the fixed accessory operation first effect. After that, the lamps 34a and 34b start to emit light in the light emission mode of the fixed accessory actuation first effect.

In the next step S2810-44, the lamp CPU 150a confirms whether or not the fixed role product operation second effect lamp standby flag is set in the fixed role product operation second effect lamp standby flag storage area of the lamp RAM 150b. If the confirmed role product operation second effect lamp standby flag is set (S2810-44: Yes), the lamp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2810-45, and the confirmed role product operation second effect lamp standby flag is not set. If so (S2810-44: No), proceed to step S2810-50.

In step S2810-45, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the fixed role product operation second effect lamp standby timer counter of the lamp RAM 150b is greater than zero. If the fixed role product operation second effect lamp standby timer counter is 0 (S2810-45: No), the lamp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2810-46, and the fixed role product operation second effect lamp standby timer counter is greater than 0. If so (S2810-45: Yes), proceed to step S2810-50.

In step S2810-46, the lamp CPU 150a clears the confirmed accessory actuation second effect lamp standby flag.

In the next step S2810-47, the lamp CPU 150a sets the fixed role product operating second effect lamp emitting flag in the fixed role product operating second effect lamp emitting flag storage area of the lamp RAM 150b.

At the next step S2810-48, the lamp CPU 150a obtains the remaining time until the light emission end timing of the light emission mode of the second production of the fixed role product operation, and divides this time by 2 milliseconds, which is the generation cycle of the reset clock pulse. The value obtained is set in the fixed role product operation second effect lamp end waiting timer counter of the lamp RAM 150b.

In the next step S2810-49, the lamp CPU 150a sets the lamp light emission information for the second production of the confirmed role product operation. After that, the lamps 34a and 34b start to emit light in the light emission mode of the fixed accessory actuation second effect.

In step S2810-50, the lamp CPU 150a confirms whether or not the step-up effect lamp light-emitting flag is set in the step-up effect lamp light-emitting flag storage area of the lamp RAM 150b. If the step-up effect lamp light-emitting flag is set (S2810-50: Yes), the lamp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2810-51, and if the step-up effect lamp light-emitting flag is not set (S2810-50: No), go to step S2810-54.

In step S2810-51, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the step-up effect lamp end waiting timer counter of the lamp RAM 150b is greater than zero. If the step-up effect lamp end standby timer counter is 0 (S2810-51: No), the lamp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2810-52, and if the step-up effect lamp end standby timer counter is greater than 0 (S2810-51: Yes), go to step S2810-54.

In step S2810-52, the lamp CPU 150a clears the step-up effect lamp lighting flag.

In step S2810-53, the lamp CPU 150a clears the step-up effect lamp light emission information. When the step-up effect lamp light emission information is cleared, the lamp 33c terminates light emission in the step-up effect light emission mode.

In step S2810-54, the lamp CPU 150a confirms whether or not the character appearance effect lamp lighting flag is set in the character appearance effect lamp lighting flag storage area of the lamp RAM 150b. If the character appearance effect lamp lighting flag is set (S2810-54: Yes), the lamp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2810-55, and if the character appearance effect lamp lighting flag is not set (S2810-54: No), go to step S2810-60.

In step S2810-55, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the character appearance effect lamp end standby timer counter of the lamp RAM 150b is greater than zero. If the character appearance effect lamp end standby timer counter is 0 (S2810-55: No), the lamp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2810-56, and if the character appearance effect lamp end standby timer counter is greater than 0 (S2810-55: Yes), go to step S2810-60.

In step S2810-56, lamp CPU 150a confirms whether or not the premium character lamp flag is set in the premium character lamp flag storage area of lamp RAM 150b. If the premium character lamp flag is set (S2810-56: Yes), the ramp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2810-57; Proceed to 58.

In step S2810-57, ramp CPU 150a clears the premium character ramp flag.

In step S2810-58, the lamp CPU 150a clears the character appearance effect lamp lighting flag.

In step S2810-59, the lamp CPU 150a clears the lamp emission information for the character appearance effect. When the lamp light emission information for the character appearance effect is cleared, the lamp 33c stops emitting light in the light emission mode for the character appearance effect.

In step S2810-60, the lamp CPU 150a confirms whether or not the roulette effect lamp lighting flag is set in the roulette effect lamp lighting flag storage area of the lamp RAM 150b. If the roulette effect lamp light emitting flag is set (S2810-60: Yes), the lamp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2810-61, and if the roulette effect lamp light emitting flag is not set (S2810-60: No). , go to step S2810-64.

In step S2810-61, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the roulette effect lamp termination standby timer counter of the lamp RAM 150b is greater than zero. If the roulette effect lamp end standby timer counter is 0 (S2810-61: No), the ramp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2810-62, and if the roulette effect lamp end standby timer counter is greater than 0 (S2810-61: Yes). , go to step S2810-64.

In step S2810-62, the lamp CPU 150a clears the roulette effect lamp lighting flag.

In step S2810-63, the lamp CPU 150a clears the lamp emission information for the roulette effect. When the lamp light emission information for the roulette effect is cleared, the lamp 33c stops emitting light in the light emission mode for the roulette effect.

In step S2810-64, the lamp CPU 150a confirms whether or not the SP development incentive effect lamp light emission flag is set in the SP development incentive effect lamp light emission flag storage area of the lamp RAM 150b. The lamp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2810-65 if the SP development fan effect lamp light emitting flag is set (S2810-64: Yes), and if the SP development fan effect lamp light emitting flag is not set (S2810- 64: No), go to step S2810-68.

In step S2810-65, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the SP development fan effect lamp end standby timer counter of the lamp RAM 150b is greater than zero. If the SP development fan effect lamp end standby timer counter is 0 (S2810-65: No), the ramp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2810-66, and if the SP development fan effect lamp end standby timer counter is greater than 0 (S2810- 65: Yes), go to step S2810-68.

In step S2810-66, the lamp CPU 150a clears the SP development fan effect lamp lighting flag.

In step S2810-67, the lamp CPU 150a clears the lamp emission information of the SP development fan effect. When the lamp light emission information for the SP development stimulus effect is cleared, the lamp 33c terminates the light emission of the SP development stimulus effect light emission mode.

In step S2810-68, the lamp CPU 150a confirms whether or not the SP development confirmation effect lamp lighting flag is set in the SP development confirmation effect lamp lighting flag storage area of the lamp RAM 150b. If the SP development confirmation effect lamp lighting flag is set (S2810-68: Yes), the lamp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2810-69, and if the SP development confirmation effect lamp lighting flag is not set (S2810- 68: No), go to step S2810-72.

In step S2810-69, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the SP development finalization effect lamp end waiting timer counter of the lamp RAM 150b is greater than zero. If the SP development confirmation effect lamp end standby timer counter is 0 (S2810-69: No), the lamp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2810-70, and if the SP development confirmation effect lamp end standby timer counter is greater than 0 (S2810- 69: Yes), go to step S2810-72.

In step S2810-70, the lamp CPU 150a clears the SP development confirmation effect lamp light emitting flag.

In step S2810-71, the lamp CPU 150a clears the lamp emission information for the SP development finalization effect. When the lamp light emission information for the SP development finalization effect is cleared, the lamp 33c finishes emitting light in the light emission mode for the SP development finalization effect.

In step S2810-72, the lamp CPU 150a confirms whether or not the cut-in effect lamp lighting flag is set in the cut-in effect lamp lighting flag storage area of the lamp RAM 150b. If the cut-in effect lamp emitting flag is set (S2810-72: Yes), the lamp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2810-73, and if the cut-in effect lamp emitting flag is not set (S2810-72: No), go to step S2810-78.

In step S2810-73, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the cut-in effect lamp end waiting timer counter of the lamp RAM 150b is greater than zero. If the cut-in effect lamp end standby timer counter is 0 (S2810-73: No), the lamp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2810-74, and if the cut-in effect lamp end standby timer counter is greater than 0 (S2810-73: Yes), go to step S2810-78.

In step S2810-74, lamp CPU 150a checks whether or not the premium cut-in lamp flag is set in the premium cut-in lamp flag storage area of lamp RAM 150b. If the premium cut-in lamp flag is set (S2810-74: Yes), the lamp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2810-75; Proceed to S2810-76.

In step S2810-75, lamp CPU 150a clears the premium cut-in lamp flag.

In step S2810-76, the lamp CPU 150a clears the cut-in effect lamp lighting flag.

In step S2810-77, the lamp CPU 150a clears the lamp emission information for the cut-in effect. When the lamp light emission information for the cut-in effect is cleared, the lamp 33c stops emitting light in the light emission mode for the cut-in effect.

In step S2810-78, the lamp CPU 150a confirms whether or not the fixed role product operating first effect lamp emitting flag is set in the fixed role product operating first effect lamp emitting flag storage area of the lamp RAM 150b. The lamp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2810-79 when the fixed role operating first effect lamp emitting flag is set (S2810-78: Yes), and the fixed role operating first effect lamp emitting flag is set. If not (S2810-78: No), proceed to step S2810-82.

In step S2810-79, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the fixed role product operation first effect lamp end waiting timer counter of the lamp RAM 150b is greater than zero. Ramp CPU150a, when the fixed role product operation first effect lamp end standby timer counter is 0 (S2810-79: No), proceeds to step S2810-80, the fixed role product operation first effect lamp end standby timer counter is 0 If larger (S2810-79: Yes), proceed to step S2810-82.

In step S2810-80, the lamp CPU 150a clears the fixed accessory operation first effect lamp light emitting flag.

In step S2810-81, the lamp CPU 150a clears the lamp emission information of the fixed accessory operation first effect. When the lamp light emission information of the fixed role actuation first effect is cleared, the lamps 33a and 33b stop emitting light in the light emission mode of the fixed role actuation first effect.

In step S2810-82, the lamp CPU 150a confirms whether or not the fixed role product operating second effect lamp emitting flag is set in the fixed role product operating second effect lamp emitting flag storage area of the lamp RAM 150b. The lamp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2810-83 when the confirmed role product operating second effect lamp emitting flag is set (S2810-82: Yes), and the confirmed role product operating second effect lamp emitting flag is set. If not (S2810-82: No), the current lamp control timer update process is terminated.

In step S2810-83, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the fixed role product operation second effect lamp end waiting timer counter of the lamp RAM 150b is greater than zero. Ramp CPU150a, when the confirmed role product operation second effect lamp end standby timer counter is 0 (S2810-83: No), proceeds to step S2810-84, the fixed role product operation second effect lamp end standby timer counter is 0 If it is larger (S2810-83: Yes), the current lamp control timer update process is terminated.

In step S2810-84, the lamp CPU 150a clears the fixed accessory operation second effect lamp light emitting flag.

In step S2810-85, the lamp CPU 150a clears the lamp light emission information of the confirmed accessory actuation second effect. When the lamp light emission information of the confirmed role actuation second effect is cleared, the lamps 33a and 33b stop emitting light in the light emission mode of the confirmed role actuation second effect.

181 to 188 are flowcharts showing the details of the role product drive information setting process (step S2540 in FIG. 78) of the lamp/drive control unit 150. FIG. In FIG. 181, the lamp CPU 150a confirms whether or not the step-up effect accessory operating flag is set in the step-up effect accessory operating flag storage area of the lamp RAM 150b (S2540-6). The step-up effect accessory operating flag is a flag indicating that the movable accessory 33c is operating in the step-up effect operation mode (first operation mode shown in FIGS. 19 and 4). The step-up accessory in operation flag is set in step S2820-5 of the accessory control timer update process (FIGS. 199 to 206) described later when the operation timing of the movable accessory 33c for the step-up effect in the variation has arrived. , is set. If the step-up effect accessory operating flag is set (S2540-6: Yes), the lamp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2540-7, and if the step-up effect accessory operating flag is not set (S2540- 6: No), go to step S2540-16.

In step S2540-7, the lamp CPU 150a performs a step-up production accessory control mode determination process. In the step-up effect accessory control mode determination process, the lamp CPU 150a refers to the step-up effect accessory control mode determination table in the lamp ROM 150c, and based on the type of the effect pattern designation command in the reception buffer, the step-up effect can be activated. A control mode of the role object 33c is determined.

FIG. 189 is a diagram showing a step-up effect accessory control mode determination table. The step-up effect control mode determination table includes the types of effect pattern designation commands that can be received by the lamp/drive control unit 150 from the effect control unit 120m, and the control mode ("end" or " continuation”) are stored. The "end" data indicates that the action of the movable accessory 33c of the step-up effect is immediately terminated when the corresponding effect pattern designation command is received, and the "continue" data indicates the corresponding effect pattern designation command. is received, the operation of the movable accessory 33c for the step-up effect is continued.

In the next step S2540-8, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether the control mode determined in the step-up production accessory control mode determination process is "end" or "continue". If the control mode is "end" (S2540-8: Yes), lamp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2540-9; move on.

In step S2540-9, the lamp CPU 150a clears the step-up production accessory drive information. The step-up production accessory driving information is set to step S2820-7 of the later-described accessory control timer update process (FIGS. 199 to 206) when the operation timing of the step-up production movable accessory 33c in the variation has arrived. is set in When the accessory driving information for the step-up effect is cleared, the operation of the step-up effect operation mode (the first operation mode shown in FIGS. 19 and 4) ends in the movable accessory 33c.

In the next step S2540-10, the lamp CPU 150a clears the step-up effect accessory operating flag of the lamp RAM 150b, and proceeds to step S2540-16.

In step S2540-16, the lamp CPU 150a confirms whether or not the character appearance effect accessory operating flag is set in the character appearance effect accessory operating flag storage area of the lamp RAM 150b (S2540-16). The character appearance effect accessory action flag is a flag indicating that the movable accessory 33c is operating in the character appearance effect action mode (the first action mode shown in FIGS. 23 and 4). The character appearing accessory operating flag is set in step S2820-11 of the accessory control timer update process (FIGS. 199 to 206), which will be described later, when the movement timing of the movable accessory 33c for the character appearance effect in the change has arrived. , is set. If the character appearance effect accessory operating flag is set (S2540-16: Yes), the ramp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2540-17, and if the character appearance effect accessory operating flag is not set (S2540- 16: No), go to step S2540-23.

In step S2540-17, the lamp CPU 150a confirms whether or not the premium character role product flag is set in the premium character role product flag storage area of the lamp RAM 150b. The premium character accessory flag is set in step S2540-68, which will be described later, when the character appearing in the character appearance effect is a premium character. If the premium character role product flag is set (S2540-17: Yes), the lamp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2540-18; if the premium character role product flag is not set (S2540-17: No), the step Proceed to S2540-19.

In step S2540-18, the lamp CPU 150a performs a premium character appearance production accessory control mode determination process. In the premium character appearance effect accessory control mode determination process, the lamp CPU 150a refers to the premium character appearance effect accessory control mode determination table in the lamp ROM 150c, and determines the premium character based on the type of the effect pattern designation command in the reception buffer. A control mode of the movable accessory 33c for the character appearance effect is determined.

FIG. 190 is a diagram showing a premium character appearance performance accessory control mode determination table. The premium character appearance effect control mode determination table contains the types of effect pattern designation commands that can be received by the lamp/drive control unit 150 from the effect control unit 120m and the control mode of the movable accessory 33c for the character appearance effect in which the premium character appears. Each set of data indicating (“end” or “continue”) is stored. The "end" data indicates that the action of the movable accessory 33c of the character appearance effect in which the premium character appears is immediately terminated when the corresponding effect pattern designation command is received, and the "continue" data indicates that the corresponding effect pattern designation command is received. It indicates that the action of the movable accessory 33c of the character appearance production in which the premium character appears is continued when the production pattern designation command is received.

In step S2540-19, the lamp CPU 150a performs character appearance effect accessory control mode determination processing. In the character appearance effect accessory control mode determination process, the lamp CPU 150a refers to the premium character appearance effect accessory control mode determination table in the lamp ROM 150c, and selects characters A and B based on the type of effect pattern designation command in the reception buffer. , or the control mode of the movable accessory 33c for the character appearance effect of C is determined.

FIG. 191 is a diagram showing a character appearance effect accessory control mode determination table. The character appearance effect control mode determination table includes the types of effect pattern designation commands that can be received by the lamp/driving control unit 150 from the effect control unit 120m and the control mode of the movable accessory 33c for the character appearance effect ("end" or " continuation”) are stored. The "end" data indicates that the action of the movable accessory 33c for the character appearance effect is immediately terminated when the corresponding effect pattern specifying command is received, and the "continue" data indicates that the corresponding effect pattern specifying command is received. is received, the movement of the movable accessory 33c for the character appearance effect is continued.

In step S2540-20, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether the control mode determined in the premium character appearance effect control mode determination process or the character appearance effect accessory control mode determination process is either "end" or "continue". do. If the control mode is "end" (S2540-20: Yes), the lamp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2540-21. move on.

In step S2540-21, the lamp CPU 150a clears the character item drive information for the character appearance effect. The character entry drive information for the character appearance effect is generated in step S2820-13 of the character object control timer update process (FIGS. 199 to 206) described later when the movement timing of the movable accessory 33c for the character appearance effect in the variation has arrived. is set in When the accessory drive information for the character appearance effect is cleared, the action of the character appearance effect action mode (the first action mode shown in FIGS. 21 and 4) ends in the movable accessory 33c.

In the next step S2540-22, the lamp CPU 150a clears the character appearance effect accessory operating flag in the lamp RAM 150b, and proceeds to step S2540-23.

In step S2540-23, the lamp CPU 150a confirms whether or not the roulette effect accessory operating flag is set in the roulette effect accessory operating flag storage area of the lamp RAM 150b (S2540-23). The roulette effect accessory operating flag is a flag indicating that the movable accessory 33c is operating in the roulette effect operation mode (the first operation mode shown in FIGS. 23 and 4). The roulette accessory operating flag is set in step S2820-17 of the accessory control timer update process (FIGS. 199 to 206) to be described later when the operation timing of the movable accessory 33c for the roulette effect in the variation has arrived. be done. If the roulette effect accessory operating flag is set (S2540-23: Yes), the ramp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2540-24, and if the roulette effect accessory operating flag is not set (S2540-23: No), go to step S2540-28.

In step S2540-24, the lamp CPU 150a performs roulette effect accessory control mode determination processing. In the roulette effect accessory control mode determination process, the lamp CPU 150a refers to the roulette effect accessory control mode determination table in the lamp ROM 150c, and based on the type of the effect pattern designation command in the reception buffer, determines the roulette effect movable accessory 33c. determines the control mode of

FIG. 192 is a diagram showing a roulette effect accessory control mode determination table. The roulette effect control mode determination table includes the types of effect pattern designation commands that can be received by the lamp/drive control unit 150 from the effect control unit 120m, and the control modes ("end" or "continue") of the movable accessory 33c for the roulette effect. ) are stored. The "end" data indicates that the operation of the movable accessory 33c for the roulette effect is immediately terminated when the corresponding effect pattern specifying command is received, and the "continue" data indicates that the corresponding effect pattern specifying command is to be terminated. When received, it indicates that the action of the movable accessory 33c for roulette effect is to be continued.

In the next step S2540-25, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether the control mode determined in the roulette effect accessory control mode determination process is "end" or "continue". If the control mode is "end" (S2540-25: Yes), the lamp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2540-26; move on.

In step S2540-26, the lamp CPU 150a clears the accessory drive information for the roulette effect. When the operation timing of the movable accessory 33c for the roulette effect in the variation comes, the accessory driving information for the roulette effect is generated in step S2820-19 of the accessory control timer update process (FIGS. 199 to 206), which will be described later. set. When the accessory driving information for the roulette effect is cleared, the operation of the roulette effect operation mode (the first operation mode shown in FIGS. 23 and 4) ends in the movable accessory 33c.

In the next step S2540-27, the lamp CPU 150a clears the roulette effect accessory operating flag in the lamp RAM 150b, and proceeds to step S2540-28.

In step S2540-28, the lamp CPU 150a confirms whether or not the flag during operation of the SP development stimulus performance accessory is set in the SP development stimulus performance performance performance flag storage area of the lamp RAM 150b. The SP development fanning performance accessory in operation flag is a flag indicating that the movable accessories 33c and 33d are operating in the SP development fanning performance action mode (the second action mode shown in FIGS. 25 and 5). . The flag during operation of the SP development inciting role is set in the step of the later-described role control timer update process (FIGS. 199 to 206) when the operation timing of the movable accessories 33c and 33d for the SP development inciting effect in the variation comes. Set in S2820-23. If the SP development fanning effect accessory operating flag is set (S2540-28: Yes), the lamp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2540-29, and if the SP development fanning effect accessory operating flag is not set ( S2540-28: No), proceed to step S2540-33.

In step S2540-29, the lamp CPU 150a performs the SP development incitement performance accessory control mode determination process. In the SP development stimulus performance accessory control mode determination process, the lamp CPU 150a refers to the SP development stimulus performance accessory control mode determination table in the lamp ROM 150c, and based on the type of the performance pattern designation command in the reception buffer, the SP development stimulus The control mode of the movable accessories 33c and 33d for presentation is determined.

FIG. 193 is a diagram showing an SP development fanning performance accessory control mode determination table. The SP development fan effect control mode determination table includes the types of effect pattern designation commands that can be received by the lamp/drive control unit 150 from the effect control unit 120m, and the control modes of the movable accessories 33c and 33d of the SP development fan effect (" Each set of data indicating "end" or "continue") is stored. The "end" data indicates that the action of the movable accessories 33c, 33d of the SP development fanning effect is immediately terminated when the corresponding effect pattern designation command is received, and the "continue" data indicates that the corresponding effect pattern designation command is received. It indicates that the action of the movable accessories 33c and 33d of the SP development fanning effect is continued when the pattern designation command is received.

In the next step S2540-30, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether the control mode determined in the SP development fanning effect accessory control mode determination process was "end" or "continue". If the control mode is "end" (S2540-30: Yes), the lamp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2540-31; move on.

In step S2540-31, the lamp CPU 150a clears the character product drive information for the SP development fan effect. When the operation timing of the movable accessories 33c and 33d for the SP development instigation effect in the variation comes, the character product driving information for the SP development instigation effect is executed in the character product control timer update process (FIGS. 199 to 206) to be described later. Set in step S2820-25. When the accessory driving information for the SP development fanning effect is cleared, the operation of the SP development fanning effect operation mode (the second operation mode shown in FIGS. 25 and 5) ends in the movable accessories 33c and 33d.

In the next step S2540-32, the lamp CPU 150a clears the flag during operation of the SP development fanning effect accessory in the lamp RAM 150b, and proceeds to step S2540-33.

In step S2540-33, the lamp CPU 150a confirms whether or not the flag during operation of the SP development confirmed production role is set in the SP development fixed production role operating flag storage area of the lamp RAM 150b. The SP development fixed effect accessory in operation flag is a flag indicating that the movable accessories 33c and 33d are operating in the SP development fixed effect operation mode (the second operation mode shown in FIGS. 27 and 5). . The flag during operation of the SP development confirmed role product is set in the step of the role product control timer update process (FIGS. 199 to 206) described later when the operation timing of the movable accessories 33c and 33d of the SP development fixed effect in the change comes. Set in S2820-29. The lamp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2540-34 when the SP development fixed effect accessory operating flag is set (S2540-33: Yes), and when the SP development fixed effect accessory operating flag is not set ( S2540-33: No), proceed to step S2540-43.

In step S2540-34, the lamp CPU 150a performs SP development finalized performance accessory control mode determination processing. In the SP development finalized performance accessory control mode determination process, the lamp CPU 150a refers to the SP development finalized performance accessory control mode determination table in the lamp ROM 150c, and determines the SP development based on the type of the performance pattern designation command in the reception buffer. The control mode of the movable accessories 33c and 33d for presentation is determined.

FIG. 194 is a diagram showing an SP development finalized performance accessory control mode determination table. The SP development fixed effect control mode determination table includes the types of effect pattern designation commands that can be received by the lamp/driving control unit 150 from the effect control unit 120m and the control modes of the movable accessories 33c and 33d of the SP development fixed effect (" Each set of data indicating "end" or "continue") is stored. The "end" data indicates that the action of the movable accessories 33c, 33d of the SP development finalized effect is immediately terminated when the corresponding effect pattern designation command is received, and the "continue" data indicates that the corresponding effect pattern designation command is received. It indicates that the action of the movable accessories 33c and 33d of the SP development fixed effect is continued when the pattern designation command is received.

In the next step S2540-35, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether the control mode determined in the SP development finalized performance accessory control mode determination process was "end" or "continue". If the control mode is "end" (S2540-35: Yes), the lamp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2540-36; move on.

In step S2540-36, the lamp CPU 150a clears the accessory drive information for the SP development fixed effect. The SP development finalized performance performance drive information is used in the performance control timer update process (FIGS. 199 to 206) to be described later when the operation timing of the SP development final performance movable performance 33c, 33d in the relevant variation arrives. Set in step S2820-31. When the accessory driving information for the SP development fixed effect is cleared, the operation of the SP development fixed effect operation mode (the second operation mode shown in FIGS. 27 and 5) ends in the movable accessories 33c and 33d.

At the next step S2540-37, the lamp CPU 150a clears the flag of the SP development fixed production accessory operating flag of the lamp RAM 150b, and proceeds to step S2540-43.

In step S2540-43, the lamp CPU 150a confirms whether or not the cut-in effect accessory operating flag is set in the cut-in effect accessory operating flag storage area of the lamp RAM 150b. The cut-in effect accessory operating flag is a flag indicating that the movable accessories 33c and 33d are operating in the cut-in effect operation mode (the second operation mode shown in FIGS. 29 and 5). The cut-in role object in operation flag is set at step S2820- of the role object control timer update process (Figs. At 35 it is set. If the cut-in effect accessory operating flag is set (S2540-43: Yes), the lamp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2540-44, and if the cut-in effect accessory operating flag is not set (S2540- 43: No), go to step S2540-50.

In step S2540-44, the lamp CPU 150a confirms whether or not the premium cut-in role product flag is set in the premium cut-in role product flag storage area of the lamp RAM 150b. The premium cut-in accessory flag is set in step S2540-82, which will be described later, when the background of the cut-in effect is a rainbow background. If the premium cut-in accessory flag is set (S2540-44: Yes), the ramp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2540-45, and if the premium cut-in accessory flag is not set (S2540-44: No). , go to step S2540-46.

In step S2540-45, the lamp CPU 150a performs a premium cut-in production accessory control mode determination process. In the premium cut-in effect accessory control mode determination process, the lamp CPU 150a refers to the premium cut-in effect accessory control mode determination table in the lamp ROM 150c, and based on the type of the effect pattern designation command in the reception buffer, the rainbow background is displayed. The control mode of the movable accessories 33c and 33d for the cut-in effect is determined.

FIG. 195 is a diagram showing a premium cut-in effect accessory control mode determination table. The premium cut-in effect control mode determination table includes the types of effect pattern designation commands that can be received by the lamp/drive control unit 150 from the effect control unit 120m, and the control of the movable accessories 33c and 33d for the rainbow background cut-in effect. Each set of data indicating a mode (“end” or “continue”) is stored. The "end" data indicates that the action of the movable accessories 33c, 33d for the cut-in effect of the rainbow background is immediately terminated when the corresponding effect pattern designation command is received, and the "continue" data is It indicates that the action of the movable accessories 33c and 33d of the rainbow background cut-in effect is continued when the corresponding effect pattern designation command is received.

In step S2540-46, the lamp CPU 150a performs cut-in effect accessory control mode determination processing. In the cut-in effect accessory control mode determination process, the lamp CPU 150a refers to the premium cut-in effect accessory control mode determination table in the lamp ROM 150c, and determines the cut-in effect based on the type of effect pattern designation command in the reception buffer. A control mode of the movable accessories 33c and 33d is determined.

FIG. 196 is a diagram showing a cut-in production accessory control mode determination table. The cut-in effect control mode determination table includes the types of effect pattern designation commands that can be received by the lamp/drive control unit 150 from the effect control unit 120m, and the control modes of the movable accessories 33c and 33d of the cut-in effect ("end"). or "continuation") are stored. The "end" data indicates that the action of the movable accessories 33c, 33d for the cut-in effect is immediately terminated when the corresponding effect pattern specifying command is received, and the "continue" data indicates that the corresponding effect pattern designation command is received. It indicates that the action of the movable accessories 33c and 33d for the cut-in effect is continued when the designated command is received.

In step S2540-47, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether the control mode determined in the premium cut-in effect control mode determination process or the cut-in effect accessory control mode determination process is either "end" or "continue". do. If the control mode is "end" (S2540-47: Yes), the lamp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2540-48. move on.

In step S2540-48, the lamp CPU 150a clears the accessory drive information for the cut-in effect. The character product drive information for cut-in effect is generated in step S2820 of the character product control timer update process (FIGS. 199 to 206) described later when the operation timing of the movable accessories 33c and 33d for cut-in effect in the variation has arrived. At -37 it is set. When the accessory drive information for the cut-in effect is cleared, the operation of the cut-in effect operation mode (the second operation mode shown in FIGS. 29 and 5) ends in the movable accessories 33c and 33d.

In the next step S2540-49, the lamp CPU 150a clears the cut-in effect accessory operating flag of the lamp RAM 150b, and proceeds to step S2540-50.

In step S2540-50, the lamp CPU 150a confirms whether or not the flag during operation of the first production accessory in operation is set in the flag storage area of the flag in operation of the first production accessory in operation of the lamp RAM 150b. . The flag for the fixed role operation first production role operation flag indicates that the movable roles 33a, 33c, and 33d are operating in the operation mode of the fixed role operation first production (the third operation mode shown in FIGS. 31 and 6) This is a flag indicating that When the operation timing of the movable accessories 33a, 33c, and 33d of the fixed accessory operation first effect in the variation comes, the fixed accessory operation first effect accessory operation flag is the role control timer update process described later. Set in step S2820-41 of (FIGS. 199-206). Ramp CPU150a, when the fixed role operation first production role operation flag is set (S2540-50: Yes), proceeds to step S2540-51, the fixed role operation first production role operation flag If not set (S2540-50: No), proceed to step S2540-55.

In step S2540-51, the ramp CPU 150a performs a fixed role operation first production role product control mode determination process. In the fixed role operation first production role control mode determination process, the lamp CPU 150a refers to the fixed role operation first production role control mode determination table in the lamp ROM 150c, and determines the type of the production pattern designation command in the reception buffer. Based on this, the control mode of the movable roles 33a, 33c, and 33d of the fixed role actuation first effect is determined.

FIG. 197 is a diagram showing a fixed role operation first effect role control mode determination table. The fixed role operation first effect control mode determination table includes the type of effect pattern designation command that the lamp/drive control unit 150 can receive from the effect control unit 120m, the movable role 33a of the fixed role operation first effect, Each set of data indicating the control mode (“end” or “continue”) of 33c and 33d is stored. The "end" data indicates that the operation of the movable roles 33a, 33c, 33d of the fixed role actuation first effect immediately ends when the corresponding effect pattern designation command is received, and the "continue" data indicates that the operation of the movable roles 33a, 33c, and 33d of the fixed role operation first effect is continued when the corresponding effect pattern designation command is received.

In the next step S2540-52, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether the control mode determined in the determined role operation first effect role control mode determination process was "end" or "continue". If the control mode is "end" (S2540-52: Yes), the lamp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2540-53; move on.

In step S2540-53, the lamp CPU 150a clears the role product driving information of the fixed role product operation first effect. The role drive information for the first fixed role actuation effect is executed in the role control timer update process described later when the operation timing of the movable roles 33a, 33c, and 33d for the first fixed role actuation effect in the variation comes. Set in step S2820-43 of (FIGS. 199-206). When the role drive information for the first fixed role actuation effect is cleared, the movable roles 33a, 33c, and 33d perform the operation mode of the first fixed role actuation effect (the third action shown in FIGS. mode) ends.

In the next step S2540-54, the lamp CPU 150a clears the fixed role operation first effect role operating flag of the lamp RAM 150b, and proceeds to step S2540-55.

In step S2540-55, the lamp CPU 150a confirms whether or not the flag during operation of the second production role in operation of the fixed role is set in the storage area of the flag during operation of the second production role in operation of the lamp RAM 150b. . The fixed role actuation second production accessory operating flag indicates that the movable roles 33a, 33b, 33c, and 33d are in the operation mode of the fixed role actuation second production (fourth action mode shown in FIGS. 31 and 7). This is a flag indicating that it is in operation. When the operation timing of the movable accessories 33a, 33b, 33c, and 33d of the fixed role operation second effect in the variation comes, the flag during operation of the second production role of the fixed role is set to the role control timer which will be described later. Set in step S2820-47 of the update process (FIGS. 199-206). Ramp CPU150a, if the flag is set during operation of the second production role operation flag is set (S2540-55: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2540-56, the second production role operation flag is activated If not set (S2540-55: No), proceed to step S2540-60.

In step S2540-56, the ramp CPU 150a performs a confirmed role operation second effect role product control mode determination process. In the confirmed role operation second production role control mode determination process, the lamp CPU 150a refers to the fixed role operation second production role control mode determination table in the lamp ROM 150c, and determines the type of the production pattern designation command in the reception buffer. Based on this, the control mode of the movable roles 33a, 33b, 33c, and 33d of the fixed role actuation second effect is determined.

FIG. 198 is a diagram showing a confirmed role actuation second effect role control mode determination table. The fixed role actuation second effect control mode determination table includes the types of effect pattern designation commands that can be received by the lamp/drive control unit 150 from the effect control unit 120m, the movable role 33a of the fixed role actuation second effect, Each set of data indicating the control mode ("end" or "continue") of 33b, 33c and 33d is stored. The "end" data indicates that the operation of the movable roles 33a, 33b, 33c, and 33d of the fixed role actuation second effect immediately ends when the corresponding effect pattern designation command is received, and "continue". data indicates that the operation of the movable accessories 33a, 33b, 33c, and 33d of the fixed accessory operation second presentation is continued when the corresponding production pattern designation command is received.

In the next step S2540-57, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether the control mode determined in the determined role product operation second effect role product control mode determination process was "end" or "continue". If the control mode is "end" (S2540-57: Yes), the lamp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2540-58. move on.

In step S2540-58, the lamp CPU 150a clears the role product drive information of the second production of the confirmed role product operation. The role drive information for the second production of the fixed role is set to the role control timer, which will be described later, when the operation timing of the movable roles 33a, 33b, 33c, and 33d of the second production of the fixed role in the variation comes. Set in step S2820-49 of the update process (FIGS. 199-206). When the role drive information for the second fixed role actuation effect is cleared, the operation mode of the second fixed role actuation effect (the second 4 operation mode) is completed.

In the next step S2540-59, the lamp CPU 150a clears the flag of the determined role operating second effect role operating in the lamp RAM 150b, and proceeds to step S2540-60.

In step S2540-60, lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the command in the reception buffer is an effect pattern designation command for starting variation. If the command in the reception buffer is the production pattern designation command for start of fluctuation (S2540-60: Yes), the lamp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2540-63, and if it is not the production pattern designation command for start of fluctuation (S2540-60: No). ) and proceed to step S2540-91.

In the next step S2540-63, the ramp CPU 150a analyzes the effect pattern specifying command for starting the variation, and determines whether or not there is a step-up effect in the series of effects to be executed in the variation. If there is a step-up effect (S2540-63: Yes), the ramp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2540-64, and if there is no step-up effect (S2540-63: No), ends the current accessory driving information setting process. .

In the next step S2540-64, the lamp CPU 150a sets the step-up effect role standby flag in the step-up effect role standby flag storage area of the lamp RAM 150b.

In the next step S2540-65, the lamp CPU 150a obtains the remaining time until the operation timing of the movable accessory 33c for the step-up effect, and divides this time by 2 milliseconds, which is the generation cycle of the reset clock pulse. It is set in the step-up effect accessory standby timer counter of the lamp RAM 150b.

In the next step S2540-66, the ramp CPU 150a analyzes the effect pattern specifying command for starting the variation, and determines whether or not there is a character appearance effect in the series of effects to be executed in the variation. If there is a character appearance effect (S2540-66: Yes), the lamp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2540-67, and if there is no character appearance effect (S2540-66: No), it proceeds to step S2540-71.

In step S2540-67, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the character appearing in the character appearance effect is a premium character. If a premium character appears (S2540-67: Yes), the ramp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2540-68, and if a character other than the premium character appears (S2540-67: No), proceeds to step S2540-69.

In step S2540-68, the lamp CPU 150a sets a premium character role product flag in the premium character role product flag storage area of the lamp RAM 150b.

In the next step S2540-69, the lamp CPU 150a sets the character appearance effect role standby flag in the character appearance effect role standby flag storage area of the lamp RAM 150b.

In the next step S2540-70, the lamp CPU 150a obtains the remaining time until the movement timing of the movable accessory 33c for the character appearance effect, and divides this time by 2 milliseconds, which is the generation cycle of the reset clock pulse. It is set in the character appearance effect accessory standby timer counter of the lamp RAM 150b.

In the next step S2540-71, the ramp CPU 150a analyzes the variation start effect pattern specification command, and determines whether or not there is a roulette effect in the series of effects to be executed in the variation. If there is a roulette effect (S2540-71: Yes), the ramp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2540-72, and if there is no roulette effect (S2540-71: No), proceeds to step S2540-74.

In the next step S2540-72, the lamp CPU 150a sets the roulette effect accessory standby flag in the roulette effect accessory standby flag storage area of the lamp RAM 150b.

In the next step S2540-73, the ramp CPU 150a obtains the remaining time until the operation timing of the movable accessory 33c for the roulette effect, and divides this time by 2 milliseconds, which is the generation cycle of the reset clock pulse. It is set in the roulette performance accessory standby timer counter of the RAM 150b.

In the next step S2540-74, the ramp CPU 150a analyzes the variation start effect pattern specification command, and determines whether or not there is an SP development fan effect in the series of effects to be executed in the variation. The lamp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2540-75 if there is an SP development stimulating effect (S2540-74: Yes), and proceeds to step S2540-77 if there is no SP development stimulating effect (S2540-74: No).

In the next step S2540-75, the lamp CPU 150a sets the SP development stimulating effect accessory standby flag in the SP development stimulating effect accessory standby flag storage area of the lamp RAM 150b.

In the next step S2540-76, the lamp CPU 150a obtains the remaining time until the operation timing of the movable accessories 33c and 33d for the SP development fan effect, and divides this time by 2 milliseconds, which is the generation cycle of the reset clock pulse. The value obtained is set to the SP development fanning effect accessory standby timer counter of the lamp RAM 150b.

In the next step S2540-77, the ramp CPU 150a analyzes the effect pattern specifying command for starting the variation, and determines whether or not there is an SP development fixed effect in the series of effects to be executed in the variation. If there is SP development fixed effect (S2540-77: Yes), the ramp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2540-78, and if there is no SP development fixed effect (S2540-77: No), it proceeds to step S2540-80.

In the next step S2540-78, the lamp CPU 150a sets the SP development confirmed production role standby flag in the SP development confirmed production role standby flag storage area of the lamp RAM 150b.

At the next step S2540-79, the lamp CPU 150a obtains the remaining time until the operation timing of the movable accessories 33c and 33d of the SP development finalization effect, and divides this time by 2 milliseconds, which is the generation cycle of the reset clock pulse. The value obtained is set to the SP development finalized performance accessory standby timer counter of the lamp RAM 150b.

In the next step S2540-80, the ramp CPU 150a analyzes the effect pattern designation command for starting the variation, and determines whether or not there is a cut-in effect in the series of effects to be executed in the variation. If there is a cut-in effect (S2540-80: Yes), the lamp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2540-81, and if there is no cut-in effect (S2540-80: No), it proceeds to step S2540-85.

In step S2540-81, lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the background of the cut-in effect is rainbow colored. If the background is rainbow colored (S2540-81: Yes), lamp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2540-82, and if the background is not rainbow colored (S2540-81: No), proceeds to step S2540-83.

In step S2540-82, the lamp CPU 150a sets the premium cut-in role product flag in the premium cut-in role product flag storage area of the lamp RAM 150b.

In the next step S2540-83, the lamp CPU 150a sets the cut-in effect role standby flag in the cut-in effect role standby flag storage area of the lamp RAM 150b.

In the next step S2540-84, the lamp CPU 150a obtains the remaining time until the operation timing of the movable accessories 33c and 33d for the cut-in effect, and divides this time by 2 milliseconds, which is the generation cycle of the reset clock pulse. A value is set in the cut-in effect accessory standby timer counter of the lamp RAM 150b.

In the next step S2540-85, the ramp CPU 150a analyzes the production pattern specification command for starting the variation, and determines whether or not there is a fixed accessory actuation first production in the series of productions to be executed in the variation. . If there is a fixed role actuation first effect (S2540-85: Yes), the ramp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2540-86, and if there is no fixed role actuation first effect (S2540-85: No), step S2540- Proceed to 88.

In the next step S2540-86, the lamp CPU 150a sets the confirmed role operation first production role standby flag in the fixed role operation first production role standby flag storage area of the lamp RAM 150b.

In the next step S2540-87, the lamp CPU 150a obtains the remaining time until the operation timing of the movable roles 33a, 33c, and 33d of the fixed role operation first effect, and this time is the generation period of the reset clock pulse. The value obtained by dividing by 2 milliseconds is set in the fixed role operation first effect role standby timer counter of the lamp RAM 150b.

In the next step S2540-88, the lamp CPU 150a analyzes the production pattern designation command for starting the variation, and determines whether or not there is a second production of the confirmed role product operation in the series of productions to be executed in the variation. . If there is a confirmed role actuation second effect (S2540-88: Yes), the ramp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2540-89, and if there is no confirmed role actuation second effect (S2540-88: No), step S2540 Go to 91.

In the next step S2540-89, the lamp CPU 150a sets the confirmed role operation second production role standby flag in the fixed role operation second production role standby flag storage area of the lamp RAM 150b.

In the next step S2540-90, the lamp CPU 150a obtains the remaining time until the operation timing of the movable roles 33a, 33b, 33c, and 33d of the fixed role actuation second effect, and this time is the generation cycle of the reset clock pulse. A value obtained by dividing by 2 milliseconds is set in the fixed role product operation second effect role standby timer counter of the lamp RAM 150b.

In the above accessory driving information setting process, the step-up effect accessory control mode determination table shown in FIG. 189 is referred to when a command is received during execution of the step-up effect. The effect accessory control mode determination table is referred to when a command is received during execution of the character appearance effect of the premium character, and the character appearance effect accessory control mode determination table shown in FIG. The roulette effect accessory control mode determination table shown in FIG. 192 is referred to when a command is received during execution of the character appearance effect of C, and is referred to when a command is received during execution of the roulette effect, and FIG. 194 is referred to when a command is received during the execution of the SP development instigation production, and the SP development fixed production accessory control mode determination table shown in FIG. The premium cut-in effect accessory control mode determination table shown in FIG. The cut-in effect accessory control mode determination table shown in FIG. 196 is referred to when a command is received during execution of the cut-in effect with a background of green, red, or zebra pattern, and is shown in FIG. Confirmed role operation first production role control mode determination table is referred to when a command is received during the execution of the fixed role operation first production, and the fixed role operation second production role control shown in FIG. The mode determination table is referred to when a command is received during execution of the fixed accessory actuation second effect.

Here, when comparing the step-up production role control mode determination table in FIG. 189 and the SP development fixed production role control mode determination table in FIG. "End" data is associated with the command, and "Continue" data is associated with the fluctuation start and pattern confirmation command in the SP development finalized performance accessory control mode determination table. be.

Therefore, when the performance control unit 120m receives the variation start command or the pattern confirmation command, which is the predetermined command, when the step-up performance is being executed, the movable accessory 33c terminates the step-up performance operation mode. When the performance control unit 120m receives the variation start command or the pattern confirmation command during execution of the SP development finalization performance, the movable accessories 33c and 33d continue the operation mode of the SP development finalization performance.

In addition, when comparing the SP development instigation performance accessory control mode determination table in FIG. 193 and the SP development fixed performance accessory control mode determination table in FIG. "End" data is associated with the command, and "Continue" data is associated with the fluctuation start and pattern confirmation commands in the SP development fixed performance accessory control mode determination table. is.

Therefore, when the performance control unit 120m receives the variation start command or the pattern confirmation command, which is a predetermined command, when the SP development inflection performance is being executed, the movable accessories 33c and 33d perform the SP development inflection performance. When the mode is ended and the timing at which the effect control unit 120m receives the variation start command or the pattern confirmation command is during execution of the SP development fixed effect, the movable accessories 33c and 33d are in the SP development fixed effect operation mode. continue.

194 and the cut-in effect accessory control mode determination table of FIG. 196, in the SP development confirmed effect accessory control mode determination table, "Continue" data is associated with the command, and "End" data is associated with the variation start and symbol determination command in the cut-in effect accessory control mode determination table. .

Therefore, when the performance control unit 120m receives a variation start command or a pattern confirmation command, which is a predetermined command, when the SP development finalization performance is being executed, the movable accessories 33c and 33d perform the SP development finalization performance. If the mode is continued and the timing at which the effect control unit 120m receives the variation start command or the pattern confirmation command is during execution of the cut-in effect, the movable accessories 33c and 33d end the operation mode of the cut-in effect. Let

194 and the premium character appearance effect accessory control mode determination table shown in FIG. "Continue" data is associated with the command, and "End" data is associated with the command of starting fluctuation and finalizing the pattern in the premium character appearance effect accessory control mode determination table. is.

Therefore, when the performance control unit 120m receives a variation start command or a pattern confirmation command, which is a predetermined command, when the SP development finalization performance is being executed, the movable accessories 33c and 33d perform the SP development finalization performance. If the mode is continued, and the timing at which the effect control unit 120m receives the variation start command or the pattern confirmation command is during execution of the character appearance effect of the premium character, the movable accessory 33c is used for the character appearance effect of the premium character. Terminate the mode of operation.

194 and the premium cut-in effect accessory control mode determination table shown in FIG. "Continue" data is associated with the command, and "End" data is associated with the fluctuation start and pattern confirmation commands in the premium cut-in effect accessory control mode determination table. is.

Therefore, when the performance control unit 120m receives a variation start command or a pattern confirmation command, which is a predetermined command, when the SP development finalization performance is being executed, the movable accessories 33c and 33d perform the SP development finalization performance. The mode is continued, and when the timing when the production control unit 120m receives the variation start command or the pattern confirmation command is during execution of the cut-in production with the rainbow background, the movable accessories 33c and 33d are displayed with the rainbow background. Terminate the action mode of the cut-in presentation.

Also, when comparing the step-up production accessory control mode determination table in FIG. 189 and the confirmed accessory operation second production accessory control mode determination table in FIG. Data associated with the confirmation command is "end" data, and in the confirmation table for the second production role product control mode determination table, the command for start of fluctuation and pattern confirmation is associated with " continuation” data.

Therefore, when the performance control unit 120m receives the variation start command or the pattern confirmation command, which is the predetermined command, when the step-up performance is being executed, the movable accessory 33c terminates the step-up performance operation mode. , When the timing when the production control unit 120m receives the fluctuation start command or the pattern confirmation command is during the execution of the second production of the confirmed role product operation, the movable accessories 33a, 33b, 33c, and 33d operate the confirmed role product operation The operation mode of the second production is continued.

Also, when comparing the SP development instigation production accessory control mode determination table in FIG. 193 and the confirmed accessory operation second production accessory control mode determination table in FIG. And the command for confirming the pattern is associated with the data of "end", and in the second production role product control mode determination table for the confirmed role product operation, it is associated with the command for starting fluctuation and fixing the pattern. is data of "continuation".

Therefore, when the performance control unit 120m receives the variation start command or the pattern confirmation command, which is a predetermined command, when the SP development inflection performance is being executed, the movable accessories 33c and 33d perform the SP development inflection performance. When the mode is terminated and the timing at which the production control unit 120m receives the variation start command or the symbol confirmation command is during execution of the second production for the fixed role operation, the movable roles 33a, 33b, 33c, and 33d are Continue the operation mode of the fixed role product operation second effect.

Also, when comparing the cut-in production role control mode determination table of FIG. 196 and the confirmed role operation second production role control mode determination table of FIG. Data associated with the confirmation command is "end" data, and in the confirmation table for the second production role product control mode determination table, the command for start of fluctuation and pattern confirmation is associated with " continuation” data.

Therefore, when the production control unit 120m receives a variation start command or a pattern confirmation command, which is a predetermined command, during execution of a cut-in production with a green, red, or zebra pattern background, the movable accessory 33c, 33d terminates the operation mode of the cut-in effect of the background of green, red or zebra pattern, and the timing when the effect control unit 120m receives the variation start command or the pattern confirmation command is the execution of the second effect of the operation of the confirmed accessory. If it is in the middle, the movable accessories 33a, 33b, 33c, and 33d continue the operation mode of the fixed accessory operation second effect.

Further, when comparing the premium character appearance performance accessory control mode determination table of FIG. 190 and the confirmed accessory activation second performance accessory control mode determination table of FIG. And the command for confirming the pattern is associated with the data of "end", and in the second production role product control mode determination table for the confirmed role product operation, it is associated with the command for starting fluctuation and fixing the pattern. is data of "continuation".

Therefore, when the presentation control unit 120m receives the predetermined command, that is, the variation start command or the pattern confirmation command, when the character appearance presentation of the premium character is being executed, the movable accessory 33c performs the character appearance presentation of the premium character. , and the timing at which the production control unit 120m receives the variation start command or the pattern confirmation command is during execution of the second production for the fixed accessory operation, the movable accessories 33a, 33b, 33c, and 33d Continues the operation mode of the confirmed role product operation second effect.

Also, when comparing the premium cut-in effect accessory control mode determination table in FIG. 195 and the confirmed accessory activation second effect accessory control mode determination table in FIG. And the command for confirming the pattern is associated with the data of "end", and in the second production role product control mode determination table for the confirmed role product operation, it is associated with the command for starting fluctuation and fixing the pattern. is data of "continuation".

Therefore, when the production control unit 120m receives the variation start command or the pattern confirmation command, which are the predetermined commands, when the rainbow background cut-in production is being executed, the movable accessories 33c and 33d are displayed with the rainbow background. When the timing when the production control unit 120m receives the variation start command or the pattern confirmation command is during the execution of the second fixed role operation production, the movable roles 33a, 33b , 33c, and 33d continue the operation mode of the fixed accessory operation second effect.

Here, when a command is received from the effect control unit 120m during execution of the step-up effect, the step-up effect accessory control mode determination table in FIG. 95 is referred to, the step-up effect lamp control mode determination table of FIG. 161 is referred to in the lamp emission information setting process, and the step-up effect of FIG. The effect sound control mode determination table is referred to. Comparing the four tables, the step-up effect accessory control mode determination table, the step-up effect image control mode determination table, and the step-up effect lamp control mode determination table are associated with commands for starting fluctuation and design determination. While there is "end" data, in the step-up effect sound effect control mode determination table, "continue" data is associated with the command of start of fluctuation and determination of pattern.

Also, if the command is for the start of variation, in the animation pattern setting process, the process advances from step S2030-60: Yes to step S2030-62, and the animation pattern for normal variation effect is set. If the command is for design confirmation, in the animation pattern setting process, the process advances from step S2030-91: Yes to step S2030-98, and the animation pattern for design confirmation effect is set. Therefore, simultaneously with the end of the display of the effect image of the SP development finalization effect, the display of the effect image of the start of variation and the finalization of the pattern corresponding to the execution of the command of the start of variation and the finalization of the pattern is performed. Also, as described above, in this case, in the lamp light emission information setting process, since the lamp light emission information for the start of fluctuation and the determination of the pattern is set (step S2530-62 and step S2530-98), the light emission pattern of the step-up effect is set. Simultaneously with the end, the light emission pattern of the start of variation and the determination of the design according to the execution of the command of the determination of the start of variation and the determination of the design starts. On the other hand, in the role product driving information setting process, there is no step itself for setting the role product driving information corresponding to the start of fluctuation or the confirmation of the pattern. Variation production and symbol determination accessory drive information are not set.

Therefore, the movable accessory 33c is operating in the step-up effect operation mode, the image display device 31 is displaying the step-up effect effect image, and the lamp 34c is emitting light in the step-up effect light emission mode. When the production control unit 120m receives a predetermined command, that is, a variation start command or a pattern confirmation command, while the audio output device 32 is outputting a step-up production effect sound, the movable accessory 33c performs a step-up production. , the image display device 31 stops displaying the effect image of the step-up effect, and displays the effect image according to the execution of the variation start command or the pattern confirmation command, and the lamp 34c is the step-up effect , the light emission mode is emitted in accordance with the execution of the variation start command or the pattern determination command, and the sound output device 32 continues the output of the effect sound of the step-up performance.

Further, when a command is received from the effect control unit 120m during execution of the character appearance effect of the premium character, the character product drive information setting process refers to the premium character appearance effect accessory control mode determination table in FIG. In the pattern setting process, the premium character appearance effect image control mode determination table in FIG. 97 is referred to. In the lamp light emission information setting process, the premium character appearance effect lamp control mode determination table in FIG. 163 is referred to. The premium character appearance effect sound effect control mode determination table in FIG. 130 is referred to. Comparing the four tables, the premium character appearance effect accessory control mode determination table, the premium character appearance effect image control mode determination table, and the premium character appearance effect lamp control mode determination table are associated with commands for starting fluctuation and design determination. In contrast to the "end" data, in the premium character appearance effect sound effect control mode determination table, "continue" data is associated with the commands for starting fluctuation and finalizing the design. .

Further, as described above, when a command for start of variation or confirmation of pattern is received, in the animation pattern setting process, the animation pattern for start of variation or confirmation of pattern is set (step S2030-62 and step S2030-98), and the lamp In the light emission information setting process, lamp light emission information for start of fluctuation and design confirmation is set (step S2530-62 and step S2530-98). Not set.

Therefore, the movable accessory 33c is operating in the action mode of the character appearance effect of the premium character, the image display device 31 is displaying the effect image of the character appearance effect of the premium character, and the lamp 34c is in the state of the premium character. When the light is emitted in the light emission mode of the character appearance effect, and the sound output device 32 is outputting the effect sound of the character appearance effect of the premium character, the effect control unit 120m outputs a variation start command or a pattern as a predetermined command. When the confirmation command is received, the movable accessory 33c ends the action mode of the character appearance effect of the premium character, and the image display device 31 stops displaying the effect image of the character appearance effect of the premium character, and starts fluctuation. The effect image is displayed according to the execution of the command or the pattern confirmation command, and the lamp 34c ends the light emission mode of the character appearance effect of the premium character, and emits light in the light emission mode according to the execution of the fluctuation start command or the pattern confirmation command. Light is emitted, and the voice output device 32 continues outputting the effect sound of the character appearance performance of the premium character.

Also, when a command is received from the effect control unit 120m during the execution of the SP development fan effect, the character product drive information setting process refers to the SP development fan effect accessory control mode determination table in FIG. 193 to set the animation pattern. 100 is referred to in the processing, the table of FIG. 166 is referred to in the lamp emission information setting process, and the FIG. 133 is referred to in the sound pattern setting processing. The SP development provoke production sound effect control mode determination table is referred to. Comparing the four tables, it is found that in the SP development hype effect accessory control mode determination table, the SP development hype effect image control mode determination table, and the SP development hype effect lamp control mode determination table, the commands for starting fluctuation and design determination are associated with each other. In contrast to the "end" data, in the SP development hype production sound effect control mode determination table, "continue" data is associated with the commands for starting fluctuation and finalizing the design. .

Further, as described above, when a command for start of variation or confirmation of pattern is received, in the animation pattern setting process, the animation pattern for start of variation or confirmation of pattern is set (step S2030-62 and step S2030-98), and the lamp In the light emission information setting process, lamp light emission information for start of fluctuation and design confirmation is set (step S2530-62 and step S2530-98). Not set.

Therefore, the movable accessories 33c and 33d are operating in the action mode of the SP development stimulus effect, the image display device 31 displays the effect image of the SP development stimulus effect, and the lamp 34c is in the SP development stimulus effect light emission mode. , and when the sound output device 32 is outputting the effect sound of the SP development inciting effect, when the effect control unit 120m receives a predetermined command, that is, a variation start command or a pattern confirmation command, the movable role Objects 33c and 33d end the action mode of the SP development hype effect, the image display device 31 stops displaying the effect image of the SP development hype effect, and displays the effect image in response to the execution of the variation start command or the pattern determination command. Display is performed, the lamp 34c ends the light emission mode of the SP development fanning production, and emits light in a light emission mode according to the execution of the variation start command or the pattern determination command, and the sound output device 32 emits the effect sound of the SP development fanning production. to continue the output of

Also, when a command is received from the effect control unit 120m during execution of the SP development fixed effect, the animation pattern setting process refers to the SP development fixed effect image control mode determination table shown in FIG. , the SP development fixed effect lamp control mode determination table in FIG. 167 is referred to, in the sound pattern setting process, the SP development fixed effect sound effect control mode determination table in FIG. The SP development finalized performance accessory control mode determination table is referred to. Comparing the four tables, in the SP development fixed effect image control mode determination table and the SP development fixed effect lamp control mode determination table, "end" data is associated with the fluctuation start and symbol determination commands. On the other hand, in the SP development fixed production effect sound control mode determination table and the SP development fixed production accessory control mode determination table, "Continue" data is associated with the fluctuation start and symbol determination commands. .

Further, as described above, when a command for start of variation or confirmation of pattern is received, in the animation pattern setting process, the animation pattern for start of variation or confirmation of pattern is set (step S2030-62 and step S2030-98), and the lamp In the light emission information setting process, lamp light emission information for start of variation and design determination is set (step S2530-62 and step S2530-98).

Therefore, the image display device 31 displays the effect image of the SP development fixed effect, the lamp 34c emits light in the light emission mode of the SP development fixed effect, and the sound output device 32 emits the effect sound of the SP development fixed effect. When the production control unit 120m receives a predetermined command, that is, a variation start command or a pattern confirmation command, while the movable accessories 33c and 33d are operating in the operation mode of the SP development finalization production, image display. The device 31 stops displaying the effect image of the fixed SP development effect, displays the effect image according to the execution of the variation start command or the pattern confirmation command, and the lamp 34c ends the light emission mode of the fixed SP development effect. , emits light in a light emission mode according to the execution of the variation start command or the pattern confirmation command, the audio output device 32 continues outputting the effect sound of the SP development confirmation production, and the movable accessories 33c and 33d are the SP development confirmation production. to continue the operation mode of

Further, when a command is received from the effect control unit 120m during execution of the cut-in effect of the rainbow background, in the character product driving information setting process, the premium cut-in effect accessory control mode determination table in FIG. 195 is referred to, The animation pattern setting process refers to the premium cut-in effect image control mode determination table in FIG. 103, the lamp light emission information setting process refers to the premium cut-in effect lamp control mode determination table in FIG. , the premium cut-in effect sound control mode determination table in FIG. 136 is referred to. Comparing the four tables, in the premium cut-in effect accessory control mode determination table, the premium cut-in effect image control mode determination table, and the premium cut-in effect lamp control mode determination table, the commands for starting fluctuation and design determination are associated with each other. In contrast to the "end" data, in the premium cut-in effect sound effect control mode determination table, "continue" data is associated with the fluctuation start and pattern confirmation commands. .

Further, as described above, when a command for start of variation or confirmation of pattern is received, in the animation pattern setting process, the animation pattern for start of variation or confirmation of pattern is set (step S2030-62 and step S2030-98), and the lamp In the light emission information setting process, lamp light emission information for start of fluctuation and design confirmation is set (step S2530-62 and step S2530-98). Not set.

Therefore, the movable accessories 33c and 33d are operating in the operation mode of the rainbow background cut-in effect, the image display device 31 is displaying the effect image of the rainbow background cut-in effect, and the lamp 34c is the rainbow When the light is emitted in the light emission mode of the cut-in effect of the colored background, and the sound output device 32 is outputting the effect sound of the cut-in effect of the rainbow-colored background, the effect control unit 120m starts fluctuation as a predetermined command. When a command or a pattern confirmation command is received, the movable accessory 33c, 33d terminates the operation mode of the cut-in effect of the rainbow-colored background, and the image display device 31 stops displaying the effect image of the cut-in effect of the rainbow-colored background. Then, the effect image is displayed according to the execution of the variation start command or the pattern confirmation command, and the lamp 34c ends the lighting mode of the cut-in effect of the rainbow background, and the variation start command or the pattern confirmation command is executed. Light is emitted in a corresponding light emission mode, and the sound output device 32 continues outputting the effect sound of the rainbow background cut-in effect.

Further, when a command is received from the effect control unit 120m during execution of a cut-in effect with a background of green, red, or zebra pattern, in the character product driving information setting process, the cut-in effect character control mode determination of FIG. 104 in the animation pattern setting process, and the cut-in effect lamp control mode determination table in FIG. In the setting process, the cut-in effect sound control mode determination table in FIG. 137 is referred to. Comparing the four tables, the cut-in effect accessory control mode determination table, the cut-in effect image control mode determination table, and the cut-in effect lamp control mode determination table are associated with commands for starting fluctuation and design determination. is "end" data, whereas in the cut-in effect sound control mode determination table, "continue" data is associated with commands for start of fluctuation and determination of pattern.

Further, as described above, when a command for start of variation or confirmation of pattern is received, in the animation pattern setting process, the animation pattern for start of variation or confirmation of pattern is set (step S2030-62 and step S2030-98), and the lamp In the light emission information setting process, lamp light emission information for start of fluctuation and design confirmation is set (step S2530-62 and step S2530-98). Not set.

Therefore, the movable accessories 33c and 33d are operating in a mode of cut-in production with a green, red, or zebra-patterned background, and the image display device 31 operates with a cut-in effect with a green, red, or zebra-patterned background. The effect image of the effect is displayed, the lamp 34c emits light in a cut-in effect light emission mode with a background of green, red or zebra pattern, and the sound output device 32 emits green, red or zebra pattern. When the production control unit 120m receives a variation start command or a pattern confirmation command, which are predetermined commands, while outputting the production sound effect of the background cut-in production, the movable accessories 33c and 33d are green, red, Alternatively, the operation mode of the zebra-patterned background cut-in effect is terminated, and the image display device 31 stops displaying the effect image of the green, red, or zebra-patterned background cut-in effect, and receives a variation start command or pattern. The effect image is displayed according to the execution of the confirmation command, and the lamp 34c ends the light emission mode of the cut-in effect of the background of green, red, or zebra pattern, and responds to the execution of the fluctuation start command or the pattern confirmation command. The sound output device 32 continues to output the effect sound for the cut-in effect of the green, red, or zebra-patterned background.

Further, when a command is received from the effect control unit 120m during the execution of the confirmed role actuation second effect, in the animation pattern setting process, the confirmed role actuation second effect image control mode determination table of FIG. 106 is referred to, In the lamp light emission information setting process, the determined role product operation second effect lamp control mode determination table in FIG. is referred to, and in the sound pattern setting process, the determined accessory actuation second effect sound control mode determination table of FIG. 139 is referred to. Comparing the four tables, in the fixed role product actuation second effect image control mode determination table, the data of "end" is associated with the command of start of variation and determination of pattern, whereas the data of "end" In the operation second effect lamp control mode determination table, the determined role act second effect control mode determination table, and the determined role act second effect sound control mode determination table, the commands for starting fluctuation and determining the pattern are associated. What is shown is the data of "continuation".

Further, as described above, when a command for start of variation or confirmation of design is received, the animation pattern for start of variation or determination of design is set in the animation pattern setting process (step S2030-62 and step S2030-98). , Simultaneously with the end of the display of the effect image of the confirmed accessory actuation second effect, the display of the effect image of the start of variation and the determination of the pattern according to the execution of the command of the start of variation and the determination of the pattern is performed.

Therefore, the image display device 31 is displaying the effect image of the second effect of the confirmed role actuation, the lamps 34a and 34b are emitting light in the light emission mode of the second effect of the confirmed role actuation, and the movable accessory 33a, When 33b, 33c, and 33d are operating in the operation mode of the confirmed role actuation second production, and the sound output device 32 is outputting the production effect sound of the confirmed role actuation second production, the production control unit 120m is a predetermined command, the image display device 31 stops displaying the effect image of the second production of the confirmed role product operation, and responds to the execution of the variation start command or the pattern confirmation command. The effect image is displayed, the lamps 34a and 34b continue the light emitting mode of the confirmed role actuation second effect, and the movable accessories 33a, 33b, 33c and 33d continue the operation mode of the confirmed role actuation second effect. , the audio output device 32 continues to output the production effect sound of the second production of the confirmed accessory actuation.

199 to 206 are flowcharts showing the details of the role product control timer update process (step S2820 in FIG. 81) of the lamp/drive control unit 150. FIG. In FIG. 199, the lamp CPU 150a decrements the timer counter of the lamp RAM 150b, which is referred to in the accessory driving information setting process, by 1 if it is not 0, and updates it.

In the next step S2820-2, the lamp CPU 150a confirms whether or not the step-up effect role standby flag is set in the step-up effect role standby flag storage area of the lamp RAM 150b. If the step-up effect role standby flag is set (S2820-2: Yes), the lamp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2820-3, and if the step-up effect role standby flag is not set (S2820-2: No), go to step S2820-8.

In step S2820-3, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the step-up effect accessory standby timer counter of the lamp RAM 150b is greater than zero. If the step-up effect accessory standby timer counter is 0 (S2820-3: No), the lamp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2820-4, and if the step-up effect accessory standby timer counter is greater than 0 (S2820-3: Yes), go to step S2820-8.

In step S2820-4, the lamp CPU 150a clears the step-up effect accessory standby flag.

In the next step S2820-5, the lamp CPU 150a sets the step-up effect accessory operating flag in the step-up effect accessory operating flag storage area of the lamp RAM 150b.

In the next step S2820-6, the ramp CPU 150a obtains the remaining time until the operation end timing of the operation mode of the step-up effect, and divides this time by 2 milliseconds, which is the generation cycle of the reset clock pulse. It is set in the step-up performance accessory completion standby timer counter of the RAM 150b.

In the next step S2820-7, the lamp CPU 150a sets the step-up production performance driving information. After this, the action of the action mode of the step-up effect is started in the movable accessory 33c.

In the next step S2820-8, the lamp CPU 150a confirms whether or not the character appearance effect role standby flag is set in the character appearance effect role standby flag storage area of the lamp RAM 150b. If the character appearance effect accessory standby flag is set (S2820-8: Yes), the lamp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2820-9, and if the character appearance effect accessory standby flag is not set (S2820-8: No), go to step S2820-14.

In step S2820-9, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the character appearance effect role standby timer counter of the lamp RAM 150b is greater than zero. If the character appearance effect accessory standby timer counter is 0 (S2820-9: No), the ramp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2820-10, and if the character appearance effect accessory standby timer counter is greater than 0 (S2820-9: Yes), go to step S2820-14.

In step S2820-10, the lamp CPU 150a clears the character appearance effect accessory standby flag.

In the next step S2820-11, the lamp CPU 150a sets the character appearance effect accessory operating flag in the character appearance effect accessory operating flag storage area of the lamp RAM 150b.

In the next step S2820-12, the ramp CPU 150a obtains the remaining time until the action end timing of the action mode of the character appearance effect, and divides this time by 2 milliseconds, which is the generation cycle of the reset clock pulse. It is set in the character appearance performance accessory termination standby timer counter of the RAM 150b.

In the next step S2820-13, the lamp CPU 150a sets the character product drive information for the character appearance effect. After this, the action of the action mode of the character appearance effect is started in the movable accessory 33c.

In the next step S2820-14, the lamp CPU 150a confirms whether or not the roulette effect accessory standby flag is set in the roulette effect accessory standby flag storage area of the lamp RAM 150b. If the roulette effect accessory standby flag is set (S2820-14: Yes), the ramp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2820-15, and if the roulette effect accessory standby flag is not set (S2820-14: No). , to step S2820-20.

In step S2820-15, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the roulette effect accessory standby timer counter of the lamp RAM 150b is greater than zero. If the roulette effect accessory standby timer counter is 0 (S2820-15: No), the lamp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2820-16, and if the roulette effect accessory standby timer counter is greater than 0 (S2820-15: Yes). , to step S2820-20.

In step S2820-16, the lamp CPU 150a clears the roulette effect accessory standby flag.

In the next step S2820-17, the lamp CPU 150a sets the roulette effect accessory operating flag in the roulette effect accessory operating flag storage area of the lamp RAM 150b.

In the next step S2820-18, the lamp CPU 150a obtains the remaining time until the operation end timing of the operation mode of the roulette performance, and divides this time by 2 milliseconds, which is the generation cycle of the reset clock pulse, to the lamp RAM 150b. is set to the roulette performance accessory end standby timer counter.

At the next step S2820-19, the lamp CPU 150a sets the character product drive information for the roulette effect. Thereafter, the action of the action mode of the roulette effect is started in the movable accessory 33c.

In the next step S2820-20, the lamp CPU 150a confirms whether or not the SP development promotion performance role standby flag is set in the SP development promotion performance performance standby flag storage area of the lamp RAM 150b. The lamp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2820-21 if the SP development incitement effect accessory standby flag is set (S2820-20: Yes), and if the SP development incitement effect accessory standby flag is not set (S2820- 20: No), go to step S2820-26.

In step S2820-21, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the SP development instigation performance accessory standby timer counter of the lamp RAM 150b is greater than zero. The lamp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2820-22 when the SP development inciting effect accessory standby timer counter is 0 (S2820-21: No), and when the SP development inciting effect accessory standby timer counter is greater than 0 (S2820- 21: Yes), go to step S2820-26.

In step S2820-22, the lamp CPU 150a clears the SP development instigation performance accessory standby flag.

In the next step S2820-23, the lamp CPU 150a sets the flag during operation of the SP development promotion performance accessory in the SP development promotion performance performance performance flag storage area of the lamp RAM 150b.

In the next step S2820-24, the lamp CPU 150a obtains the remaining time until the operation end timing of the action mode of the SP development fan effect, and divides this time by 2 milliseconds, which is the generation cycle of the reset clock pulse. It is set to the SP development fanning performance accessory termination standby timer counter of the lamp RAM 150b.

In the next step S2820-25, the lamp CPU 150a sets the character product drive information for the SP development fan effect. After that, the movable accessories 33c and 33d start to operate in the action mode of the SP development fanning effect.

In the next step S2820-26, the lamp CPU 150a confirms whether or not the SP development confirmed production role standby flag is set in the SP development confirmed production role standby flag storage area of the lamp RAM 150b. If the SP development confirmed effect accessory standby flag is set (S2820-26: Yes), the ramp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2820-27, and if the SP development confirmed effect accessory standby flag is not set (S2820- 26: No), go to step S2820-32.

In step S2820-27, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the SP development fixed effect accessory standby timer counter of the lamp RAM 150b is greater than zero. If the SP development confirmed production role standby timer counter is 0 (S2820-27: No), the ramp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2820-28, and if the SP development fixed production role standby timer counter is greater than 0 (S2820- 27: Yes), go to step S2820-32.

In step S2820-28, the ramp CPU 150a clears the SP development finalized performance accessory standby flag.

In the next step S2820-29, the lamp CPU 150a sets the SP development confirmed production accessory operating flag in the SP development confirmed production accessory operating flag storage area of the lamp RAM 150b.

In the next step S2820-30, the lamp CPU 150a obtains the remaining time until the operation end timing of the operation mode of the fixed SP development effect, and divides this time by 2 milliseconds, which is the generation cycle of the reset clock pulse. It is set to the SP development finalization performance accessory termination standby timer counter of the lamp RAM 150b.

In the next step S2820-31, the lamp CPU 150a sets the character product drive information for the SP development finalization effect. Thereafter, in the movable accessories 33c and 33d, the action of the action mode of the SP development finalization effect is started.

In the next step S2820-32, the lamp CPU 150a confirms whether or not the cut-in effect role standby flag is set in the cut-in effect role standby flag storage area of the lamp RAM 150b. If the cut-in effect accessory standby flag is set (S2820-32: Yes), the lamp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2820-33, and if the cut-in effect accessory standby flag is not set (S2820-32: No), go to step S2820-38.

In step S2820-33, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the cut-in effect accessory standby timer counter of the lamp RAM 150b is greater than zero. If the cut-in effect role standby timer counter is 0 (S2820-33: No), the lamp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2820-34, and if the cut-in effect role standby timer counter is greater than 0 (S2820-33: Yes), go to step S2820-38.

In step S2820-34, the lamp CPU 150a clears the cut-in effect accessory standby flag.

In the next step S2820-35, the lamp CPU 150a sets the cut-in effect accessory operating flag in the cut-in effect accessory operating flag storage area of the lamp RAM 150b.

In the next step S2820-36, the ramp CPU 150a obtains the remaining time until the operation end timing of the operation mode of the cut-in effect, and divides this time by 2 milliseconds, which is the generation cycle of the reset clock pulse. It is set in the cut-in production accessary end standby timer counter of the RAM 150b.

In the next step S2820-37, the lamp CPU 150a sets the character product driving information for the cut-in effect. After that, the movable accessories 33c and 33d start to operate in the action mode of cut-in effect.

In the next step S2820-38, the lamp CPU 150a confirms whether or not the fixed role operation first effect role standby flag is set in the fixed role operation first effect role standby flag storage area of the lamp RAM 150b. . When the confirmed role operation first effect role standby flag is set (S2820-38: Yes), the lamp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2820-39, and the fixed role operation first effect role standby flag is set. If not (S2820-38: No), proceed to step S2820-44.

In step S2820-39, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the fixed role operating first effect role standby timer counter of the lamp RAM 150b is greater than zero. When the confirmed role operation first effect role standby timer counter is 0 (S2820-39: No), the lamp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2820-40, and the fixed role operation first effect role standby timer counter is 0. If larger (S2820-39: Yes), proceed to step S2820-44.

In step S2820-40, the ramp CPU 150a clears the confirmed role operation first effect role standby flag.

In the next step S2820-41, the lamp CPU 150a sets the fixed role actuation first effect accessory operating flag in the decided role actuation first effect accessory operating flag storage area of the lamp RAM 150b.

In the next step S2820-42, the lamp CPU 150a obtains the remaining time until the operation end timing of the operation mode of the fixed role operation first effect, and divides this time by 2 milliseconds, which is the generation cycle of the reset clock pulse. The value obtained is set to the finalized accessory operation first effect accessory end standby timer counter of the lamp RAM 150b.

In the next step S2820-43, the lamp CPU 150a sets the role product driving information of the fixed role product operation first effect. After that, the movable accessories 33a, 33c, and 33d start to operate in the operation mode of the fixed accessory operation first effect.

In the next step S2820-44, the lamp CPU 150a confirms whether or not the confirmed role operation second effect role standby flag is set in the fixed role operation second effect role standby flag storage area of the lamp RAM 150b. . If the confirmed role operation second effect role standby flag is set (S2820-44: Yes), the ramp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2820-45, and the confirmed role operation second effect role standby flag is set. If not (S2820-44: No), proceed to step S2820-50.

In step S2820-45, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the fixed role operating second effect role standby timer counter of the lamp RAM 150b is greater than zero. If the confirmed role operation second effect role standby timer counter is 0 (S2820-45: No), the lamp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2820-46, and the fixed role operation second effect role standby timer counter is 0. If larger (S2820-45: Yes), proceed to step S2820-50.

In step S2820-46, the ramp CPU 150a clears the confirmed role operation second effect role standby flag.

In the next step S2820-47, the lamp CPU 150a sets the flag during operation of the second production role in operation in the flag storage area of the second production role in operation of the lamp RAM 150b.

In the next step S2820-48, the ramp CPU 150a obtains the remaining time until the operation end timing of the operation mode of the fixed accessory operation second effect, and divides this time by 2 milliseconds, which is the generation cycle of the reset clock pulse. The value obtained is set in the finalized accessory activation second effect accessory end standby timer counter of the lamp RAM 150b.

In the next step S2820-49, the lamp CPU 150a sets the role product drive information for the second production of the confirmed role product operation. After that, the movable accessories 33a, 33b, 33c, and 33d start to operate in the operation mode of the fixed accessory actuation second effect.

In step S2820-50, the lamp CPU 150a confirms whether or not the step-up effect accessory operating flag is set in the step-up effect accessory operating flag storage area of the lamp RAM 150b. If the step-up effect accessory operating flag is set (S2820-50: Yes), the lamp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2820-51, and if the step-up effect accessory operating flag is not set (S2820- 50: No), go to step S2820-54.

In step S2820-51, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the step-up effect accessory end standby timer counter of the lamp RAM 150b is greater than zero. If the step-up effect accessory end standby timer counter is 0 (S2820-51: No), the lamp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2820-52, and if the step-up effect accessory end standby timer counter is greater than 0 (S2820- 51: Yes), go to step S2820-54.

In step S2820-52, the lamp CPU 150a clears the step-up production accessory operating flag.

In step S2820-53, the lamp CPU 150a clears the step-up production accessory drive information. When the accessory driving information for the step-up effect is cleared, the operation of the step-up effect operation mode ends in the movable accessory 33c.

In step S2820-54, the lamp CPU 150a confirms whether or not the character appearance effect accessory operating flag is set in the character appearance effect accessory operating flag storage area of the lamp RAM 150b. If the character appearance effect accessory operating flag is set (S2820-54: Yes), the ramp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2820-55, and if the character appearance effect accessory operating flag is not set (S2820- 54: No), go to step S2820-60.

In step S2820-55, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the character appearance production accessory end standby timer counter of the lamp RAM 150b is greater than zero. If the character appearance effect accessory end standby timer counter is 0 (S2820-55: No), the ramp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2820-56, and if the character appearance effect accessory end standby timer counter is greater than 0 (S2820- 55: Yes), go to step S2820-60.

In step S2820-56, the lamp CPU 150a confirms whether or not the premium character role product flag is set in the premium character role product flag storage area of the lamp RAM 150b. If the premium character role product flag is set (S2820-56: Yes), the lamp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2820-57; if the premium character role product flag is not set (S2820-56: No), the step Proceed to S2820-58.

In step S2820-57, the lamp CPU 150a clears the premium character accessory flag.

In step S2820-58, the lamp CPU 150a clears the character appearance effect accessory operating flag.

In step S2820-59, the lamp CPU 150a clears the character item drive information for the character appearance effect. When the accessory drive information for the character appearance effect is cleared, the motion of the action mode of the character appearance effect ends in the movable accessory 33c.

In step S2820-60, the lamp CPU 150a confirms whether or not the roulette effect accessory operating flag is set in the roulette effect accessory operating flag storage area of the lamp RAM 150b. If the roulette effect accessory operating flag is set (S2820-60: Yes), the lamp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2820-61, and if the roulette effect accessory operating flag is not set (S2820-60: No), go to step S2820-64.

In step S2820-61, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the roulette effect accessory completion standby timer counter of the lamp RAM 150b is greater than zero. If the roulette effect accessory end standby timer counter is 0 (S2820-61: No), the lamp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2820-62, and if the roulette effect accessory end standby timer counter is greater than 0 (S2820-61: Yes), go to step S2820-64.

In step S2820-62, the lamp CPU 150a clears the roulette effect accessory operating flag.

In step S2820-63, the lamp CPU 150a clears the accessory drive information for the roulette effect. When the accessory driving information for the roulette effect is cleared, the operation of the roulette effect operation mode ends in the movable accessory 33c.

In step S2820-64, the lamp CPU 150a confirms whether or not the flag during operation of the SP development stimulus performance accessory is set in the SP development stimulus performance performance performance flag storage area of the lamp RAM 150b. If the SP development fanning performance accessory operating flag is set (S2820-64: Yes), the lamp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2820-65, and if the SP development fanning performance accessory operating flag is not set ( S2820-64: No), go to step S2820-68.

In step S2820-65, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the SP development inciting performance accessory end standby timer counter of the lamp RAM 150b is greater than zero. The lamp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2820-66 if the SP development inciting effect accessory end standby timer counter is 0 (S2820-65: No), and if the SP development inciting effect accessory end standby timer counter is greater than 0 ( S2820-65: Yes), proceed to step S2820-68.

In step S2820-66, the lamp CPU 150a clears the flag during operation of the SP development fanning effect accessory.

In step S2820-67, the lamp CPU 150a clears the character product drive information for the SP development fan effect. When the accessory driving information for the SP development fanning effect is cleared, the operation of the SP development fanning effect operation mode ends in the movable accessories 33c and 33d.

In step S2820-68, the lamp CPU 150a confirms whether or not the SP development confirmed production accessory operating flag is set in the SP development confirmed production accessory operating flag storage area of the lamp RAM 150b. The lamp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2820-69 if the SP development confirmed production accessory operating flag is set (S2820-68: Yes), and if the SP development confirmed production accessory operating flag is not set ( S2820-68: No), proceed to step S2820-72.

In step S2820-69, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the SP development fixed effect accessory end standby timer counter of the lamp RAM 150b is greater than zero. If the SP development fixed performance accessory end standby timer counter is 0 (S2820-69: No), the ramp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2820-70, and if the SP development fixed performance accessory end standby timer counter is greater than 0 ( S2820-69: Yes), proceed to step S2820-72.

In step S2820-70, the lamp CPU 150a clears the SP development finalized performance accessory operating flag.

In step S2820-71, the lamp CPU 150a clears the accessory drive information for the SP development fixed effect. When the accessory drive information for the SP development fixed effect is cleared, the operation of the SP development fixed effect operation mode ends in the movable accessories 33c and 33d.

In step S2820-72, the lamp CPU 150a confirms whether or not the cut-in effect accessory operating flag is set in the cut-in effect accessory operating flag storage area of the lamp RAM 150b. If the cut-in effect accessory operating flag is set (S2820-72: Yes), the lamp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2820-73, and if the cut-in effect accessory operating flag is not set (S2820- 72: No), go to step S2820-78.

In step S2820-73, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the cut-in effect accessory end waiting timer counter of the lamp RAM 150b is greater than zero. If the cut-in effect accessory end standby timer counter is 0 (S2820-73: No), the lamp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2820-74, and if the cut-in effect accessory end standby timer counter is greater than 0 (S2820- 73: Yes), go to step S2820-78.

In step S2820-74, the lamp CPU 150a confirms whether or not the premium cut-in role product flag is set in the premium cut-in role product flag storage area of the lamp RAM 150b. If the premium cut-in accessory flag is set (S2820-74: Yes), the ramp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2820-75, and if the premium cut-in accessory flag is not set (S2820-74: No). , go to step S2820-76.

At step S2820-75, the ramp CPU 150a clears the premium cut-in accessory flag.

In step S2820-76, the lamp CPU 150a clears the cut-in effect accessory operating flag.

In step S2820-77, the lamp CPU 150a clears the accessory drive information for the cut-in effect. When the accessory driving information for the cut-in effect is cleared, the operation of the action mode of the cut-in effect ends in the movable accessories 33c and 33d.

In step S2820-78, the lamp CPU 150a confirms whether or not the flag during operation of the first production role in operation of the fixed role is set in the flag storage area of the first production role in operation of the lamp RAM 150b. . Ramp CPU150a, when the fixed role operation first production role operation flag is set (S2820-78: Yes), proceeds to step S2820-79, the fixed role operation first production role operation flag If not set (S2820-78: No), proceed to step S2820-82.

In step S2820-79, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the fixed role operation first effect role end standby timer counter of the lamp RAM 150b is greater than zero. If the fixed role operation first effect role end standby timer counter is 0 (S2820-79: No), the lamp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2820-80, and the fixed role operation first effect role end standby timer counter is greater than 0 (S2820-79: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2820-82.

In step S2820-80, the ramp CPU 150a clears the fixed role operating first production role operating flag.

In step S2820-81, the lamp CPU 150a clears the role product driving information of the fixed role product operation first effect. When the role driving information of the first fixed role actuation effect is cleared, the operation of the action mode of the first fixed role actuation effect ends in the movable roles 33a, 33c, and 33d.

In step S2820-82, the lamp CPU 150a confirms whether or not the flag during operation of the second production role in operation of the fixed role is set in the storage area of the flag during operation of the second production role in operation of the lamp RAM 150b. . Ramp CPU150a, when the confirmed role actuation second production role in operation flag is set (S2820-82: Yes), proceeds to step S2820-83, the fixed role actuation second production role in operation flag If it is not set (S2820-82: No), the current accessory control timer update process is terminated.

In step S2820-83, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the fixed role operation second effect role end standby timer counter of the lamp RAM 150b is greater than zero. Ramp CPU150a, when the confirmed role operation second production role end standby timer counter is 0 (S2820-83: No), proceeds to step S2820-84, the fixed role operation second production role end standby timer counter is greater than 0 (S2820-83: Yes), the current accessory control timer update process is terminated.

In step S2820-84, the ramp CPU 150a clears the flag during operation of the determined role product operation second effect role product.

In step S2820-85, the lamp CPU 150a clears the role product driving information of the second production of the confirmed role product operation. When the role drive information of the second fixed role actuation effect is cleared, the operation of the action mode of the second fixed role actuation effect ends in the movable roles 33a, 33b, 33c, and 33d.

The above is the details of the present embodiment. According to this embodiment, it is possible to further enhance interest in the game machine 1 while the special symbols are changing. In this embodiment, in the fixed role actuation second production role, which is a specific fixed role actuation effect, the first movable role 33a falls → the second movable role 33b rises → the second movable role 33b A continuous action is performed by a plurality of movable accessories such as separation to the left and right→swinging of the separated second movable accessory 33b. When the production control unit 120m receives a command to start a change or confirm a pattern during execution of an effect involving such a complicated action of the movable role, the action of the movable role is immediately stopped, and a return operation to the initial position is performed. If you start , there is a risk that the order of retracting the movable accessories will be wrong, or that multiple movable accessories will interfere and break. In the present embodiment, when the effect control unit 120m receives a command for start of variation or finalization of a symbol during a specific effect in the symbol variation display, the movable accessory continues to operate, and the movable accessory is broken. It's gone.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1... Game machine 1, 2... Game board, 14... 1st start opening, 14a... 1st start opening detection switch, 15... 2nd start opening, 15a... 2nd start opening detection switch, 16... 1st big winning opening , 16a... 1st big winning opening detection switch, 17... second big winning opening, 17a... second big winning opening detection switch, 20... first special symbol display device, 21... second special symbol display device, 31... image Display device 110 Main control board 110a Main CPU 110b Main ROM 110c Main RAM 141a Integrated control unit 120a Sub CPU 120b Sub ROM 120c Sub RAM 150 Image control board

Claims (1)

production means including image display means, movable accessories, lamps, and audio output means;
a pattern display means;
special game execution means;
Each lottery including a jackpot lottery is executed, and based on the result of the lottery, the pattern display means is caused to execute the symbol variation display, the special game execution means is caused to execute a special game, and a command corresponding to the progress of the game is included. a main control means capable of generating multiple types of commands;
a production control means for receiving a command generated by the main control means, and performing production by the production means according to the symbol variation display and special game based on the received command,
When the timing when the performance control means receives the predetermined command is during execution of the predetermined development fixed performance in the performance in accordance with the symbol variation display, the development is confirmed without returning the movable accessory to the initial position. Move to the predetermined exposure position corresponding to the production, cut off ,
When the timing when the performance control means receives the predetermined command is during execution of a predetermined premium performance in the performance in accordance with the symbol variation display, the movable accessory terminates the operation mode of the premium performance. A gaming machine characterized by: